Well Plan

WELLPLAN, Release 2000.
0
Training Manual
copyright © 2001 by Landmark Graphics Corporation
Part No. 157853 March 2001

Copyright © 2001 Landmark Graphics Corporation
All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation

15150 Memorial Drive, Houston, TX 77079, U.S.A.
Phone: 281-560-1000
FAX: 281-560-1401
Internet: www.lgc.com
Trademark Notice
Landmark, 3DVIEW, ARIES, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant,
DecisionSpace, Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam
Extreme, DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Drillability Suite,
DrillModel, DSS, EarthCube, EdgeCa$h, Fast Track, FZAP!, GeoDataLoad, GeoLink, GRIDGENR, I2 Enterprise,
iDIMS, LogEdit, LogPrep, MathPack, OpenBooks, OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenSGM, OpenVision,
OpenWorks, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus, Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack,
PostStack ESP, PROFILE, ProMAX, ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX
VSP, RAVE, Reservoir Framework Builder, RMS, SafeStart, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisWell, SeisWorks,
SigmaView, StrataMap, Stratamodel, StratAmp, StrataSim, StratWorks, StressCheck, SynTool, SystemStart,
SystemStart for Clients, SystemStart for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, TERAS, TOW/cs, TOW/cs The
Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, VIP, VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-
EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement, VIP-POLYMER, VIP-THERM, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner,
WELLCAT, WELLPLAN, ZAP! and Z-MAP Plus are trademarks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Landmark WELLPLAN Training Manual
Contents
Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 15
What is WELLPLAN? ................................................................................................. 15
Training Course and Manual Overview ....................................................................... 15
Single User and Network Installations ........................................................................ 16
Basics ................................................................................................................................... 17
Overview............................................................................................................................. 17
Getting Started .................................................................................................................... 18
Starting WELLPLAN .................................................................................................. 19
Projects, Wells, and Cases .................................................................................................. 20
What is a Project, Well and Case? ............................................................................... 20
Database ....................................................................................................................... 20
Creating a Project, Well and Case ............................................................................... 21
Saving and Deleting Cases, Wells, and Projects ......................................................... 22
Main Window Layout ......................................................................................................... 25
Title Bar ....................................................................................................................... 25
Menu Bars .................................................................................................................... 26
File Menu ............................................................................................................... 27
Edit Menu .............................................................................................................. 28
Modules Menu ....................................................................................................... 28
Case Menu ............................................................................................................. 29
Parameter Menu ..................................................................................................... 29
Deviation Menu ..................................................................................................... 29
Wellbore Menu ...................................................................................................... 30
String Menu ........................................................................................................... 30
View Menu ............................................................................................................ 30
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................ 31
Window Menu ....................................................................................................... 32
Help Menu ............................................................................................................. 32
Tool Bars ...................................................................................................................... 32
Wizard .......................................................................................................................... 34
Helpful Features.................................................................................................................. 35
Online Help .................................................................................................................. 35
Configuring Units ........................................................................................................ 35
Tubular Properties ........................................................................................................ 37
Grade ...................................................................................................................... 37
Material .................................................................................................................. 38
Class ....................................................................................................................... 39
Halliburton Cementing Tables ..................................................................................... 39
March 2001 Contents iii

WELLPLAN Training Manual Landmark
Sound Effects ............................................................................................................... 39

Entering Case Data ............................................................................................................. 40
Two Common Entry Forms ......................................................................................... 40
Entering General Well Information ............................................................................. 40
Designating an Offshore Well ..................................................................................... 41
Defining the Wellbore Geometry ................................................................................ 42
Wellbore Menu ...................................................................................................... 43
Using Catalogs ............................................................................................................. 43
Using a Library ............................................................................................................ 44
Defining a Work String ................................................................................................ 45
Managing Deviation (Survey) Data ............................................................................. 46
Entering Survey Data ............................................................................................. 47
Importing Survey Files .......................................................................................... 47
Setting Survey Options .......................................................................................... 48
Viewing Surveys w/Interpolation .......................................................................... 49
Viewing Surveys w/Tortuosity .............................................................................. 49
Define Fluid Properties and Rheological Model ......................................................... 50
Defining Drilling Fluids ......................................................................................... 50
Define Cement Slurries Tab .................................................................................. 52
Select the Fluid You Want to Use in the Analysis ................................................ 52
Specify Circulating System Equipment ....................................................................... 52
Enter Pore Pressure Data ............................................................................................. 54
Enter Fracture Gradient Data ....................................................................................... 54
Enter Undisturbed Temperature Data .......................................................................... 54
Catalogs .............................................................................................................................. 56
Creating a Catalog ....................................................................................................... 56
Configuring the Workspace ................................................................................................ 58
Windows ...................................................................................................................... 58
Window Panes ............................................................................................................. 58
Tabs .............................................................................................................................. 59
Toolbars ....................................................................................................................... 59
What are Data Status Tooltips and Status Messages ................................................... 60
Viewing Data and Analysis Results.................................................................................... 62
Viewing Well Schematics ............................................................................................ 62
Viewing Survey Plots .................................................................................................. 62
Printing and Print Preview ........................................................................................... 63
Plot Properties..................................................................................................................... 64
Changing Curve Line Properties .................................................................................. 64
Changing the Scale ...................................................................................................... 65
Configuring the Axis ................................................................................................... 66
Changing the Grid ........................................................................................................ 66
Changing the Axis Labels ............................................................................................ 67
Changing the Font ........................................................................................................ 67
Changing the Line Styles ............................................................................................. 68
Using Data Markers ..................................................................................................... 68
Configuring the Legend ............................................................................................... 69
iv Contents March 2001

DEX and File Importing and Exporting ............................................................................. 70
Torque Drag Analysis................................................................................................... 71

Overview............................................................................................................................. 71
Torque Drag Analysis: An Introduction ............................................................................. 72
Starting Torque Drag Analysis .................................................................................... 72
Available Analysis Modes ........................................................................................... 73
Using Normal Analysis....................................................................................................... 74
Purpose and Use ........................................................................................................... 74
Entering Case Data ...................................................................................................... 74
Selecting Analysis Models and Options ...................................................................... 75
Why Use Bending Stress Magnification Factor? ................................................... 76
Defining Operating Conditions .................................................................................... 77
Defining Multiple Fluids ............................................................................................. 77
How does Fluid Flow Change the Forces and Stresses on the Workstring? ......... 78
Using Friction Reduction Devices ............................................................................... 79
Analyzing Results ........................................................................................................ 80
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 80
Tables ..................................................................................................................... 84
Reports ................................................................................................................... 85
Calibrating Coefficients of Friction from Field Data ......................................................... 87
Purpose and Use ........................................................................................................... 87
Starting the Calibrate Friction Analysis Mode ............................................................ 88
Entering Actual Loads ................................................................................................. 88
Calibrating Coefficients of Friction ............................................................................. 88
Using Drag Charts .............................................................................................................. 90
Purpose and Use ........................................................................................................... 90
Start Drag Chart Analysis ............................................................................................ 90
Defining Operating Conditions and Analysis Interval ................................................ 90
Displaying Actual Loads ............................................................................................. 91
Measured Weight Chart ......................................................................................... 91
Torque Point Chart ................................................................................................. 92
Using Top Down Analysis.................................................................................................. 94
Purpose and Use ........................................................................................................... 94
Selecting Top Down Analysis ..................................................................................... 94
Defining Operating Conditions .................................................................................... 94
Tables ..................................................................................................................... 95
Reports ................................................................................................................... 96
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 97
Using Stiff String Analysis ................................................................................................. 99
Purpose ......................................................................................................................... 99
When to Use the Stiff String Model ............................................................................ 99
Activating Stiff String Model ...................................................................................... 99
March 2001 Contents v


Plots ....................................................................................................................... 100
Analysis Mode Methodology.............................................................................................. 102
Normal Analysis .......................................................................................................... 102
Calibrate Friction Analysis .......................................................................................... 104
Drag Chart Analysis ..................................................................................................... 105
Top Down Analysis ..................................................................................................... 107
Supporting Information and Calculations........................................................................... 110
Additional Side Force Due to Buckling ....................................................................... 110
Sinusoidal Buckling Mode ..................................................................................... 110
Helical Buckling Mode .......................................................................................... 110
Axial Force .................................................................................................................. 111
Buoyancy Method .................................................................................................. 112
Pressure Area Method ............................................................................................ 112
Bending Stress Magnification (BSM) .......................................................................... 113
Buoyed Weight ............................................................................................................ 114
Critical Buckling Forces .............................................................................................. 116
Straight Model Calculations .................................................................................. 116
Curvilinear Model .................................................................................................. 117
Loading and Unloading Models ............................................................................ 118
Drag Force Calculations .............................................................................................. 119
Fatigue Calculations .................................................................................................... 121
Establish A Fatigue Endurance Limit For The Pipe .............................................. 122
Derate The Fatigue Endurance Limit For Tension ................................................ 123
Friction Factors ............................................................................................................ 125
Models ......................................................................................................................... 126
Pipe Wall Thickness Modification Due to Pipe Class ................................................. 126
Sheave Friction ............................................................................................................ 127
Side Force for Soft String Model ................................................................................. 128
Soft String Model ......................................................................................................... 130
Stiff String Model ........................................................................................................ 130
Stress ............................................................................................................................ 132
Von Mises Stress ................................................................................................... 132
Radial Stress .......................................................................................................... 133
Transverse Shear Stress ......................................................................................... 133
Hoop Stress ............................................................................................................ 133
Torsional Stress ...................................................................................................... 133
Bending Stress ....................................................................................................... 133
Buckling Stress ...................................................................................................... 133
Axial Stress ............................................................................................................ 134
Stretch .......................................................................................................................... 135
Stretch due to axial load ......................................................................................... 135
Stretch due to buckling .......................................................................................... 135
Stretch due to ballooning ....................................................................................... 136
Tortuosity ..................................................................................................................... 137
Torque .......................................................................................................................... 137
vi Contents March 2001

Twist ............................................................................................................................ 139

Viscous Drag ................................................................................................................ 140
References........................................................................................................................... 143
General ......................................................................................................................... 143
Bending Stress Magnification Factor .......................................................................... 143
Buckling ....................................................................................................................... 143
Fatigue ......................................................................................................................... 144
Sheave Friction ............................................................................................................ 144
Side Force Calculations ............................................................................................... 144
Stiff String Model ........................................................................................................ 145
Hydraulics Analysis ...................................................................................................... 147

Overview............................................................................................................................. 147
Hydraulics Analysis: An Introduction ................................................................................ 148
Starting Hydraulics Analysis ....................................................................................... 148
Using Pressure: Pump Rate Range Analysis Mode ............................................................ 150
Select Pressure Pump Rate Range Analysis Mode ...................................................... 150
Fluid Selector Tab .................................................................................................. 151
Specify the Undisturbed Temperature Profile ............................................................. 152
Eccentricity .................................................................................................................. 152
Define Pump Rate Range ............................................................................................. 155
Specify Nozzle Configuration ..................................................................................... 156
Set ECD Calculation Depths ........................................................................................ 158
Plot ......................................................................................................................... 159
Report Options ....................................................................................................... 159
Report ........................................................................................................................... 160
Using Pressure: Pump Rate Fixed Analysis Mode ............................................................. 161
Starting Pressure Pump Rate Fixed Analysis Mode .................................................... 161
Define Pump Rate to Analyze ..................................................................................... 162
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 163
Using Annular Velocity Analysis Mode............................................................................. 166
Select Annular Velocity Analysis Mode ..................................................................... 166
Define Pump Rates to Analyze .................................................................................... 167
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 167
March 2001 Contents vii

Table ...................................................................................................................... 169

Using Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule ................................................................................ 171
Starting Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule Analysis ....................................................... 171
Define Analysis Constraints ........................................................................................ 172
Report Options ....................................................................................................... 173
Report ..................................................................................................................... 173
Using Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD Analysis Mode ....................................................... 175
Starting Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD Analysis Mode ............................................. 175
Defining Operations Constraints ................................................................................. 176
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 177
Report Options ....................................................................................................... 178
Report ..................................................................................................................... 178
Using Graphical Analysis Mode......................................................................................... 179
Starting Graphical Analysis Mode ............................................................................... 179
Enter Pump Specifications ........................................................................................... 180
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 180
Using Optimization Planning Analysis Mode .................................................................... 188
Selecting Optimization Planning Analysis .................................................................. 189
Specify Solution Constraints ....................................................................................... 190
Set ECD Calculation Depths ........................................................................................ 191
Report Options ....................................................................................................... 191
Reports ................................................................................................................... 192
Using Optimization Well Site Analysis Mode ................................................................... 193
Starting Optimization Well Site Analysis .................................................................... 193
Enter Case Data ........................................................................................................... 193
Enter Analysis Dialog .................................................................................................. 194
Using Weight Up Analysis Mode ....................................................................................... 195
Starting Weight Up Analysis ....................................................................................... 195
Enter Case Data ........................................................................................................... 195
Enter Analysis Data and Calculate Data ...................................................................... 195
Using Hole Cleaning Operational Analysis Mode ............................................................. 197
Starting Hole Cleaning Operational Analysis .............................................................. 197
Enter Case Data ........................................................................................................... 197
Enter Analysis Data ..................................................................................................... 198
viii Contents March 2001


Plot ......................................................................................................................... 198
Report ..................................................................................................................... 200
Using Hole Cleaning Parametric Analysis Mode ............................................................... 202
Starting Hole Cleaning Parametric Analysis ............................................................... 202
Enter Case Data ........................................................................................................... 203
Entering Transport Analysis Data ................................................................................ 203
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 204
Backreaming Rate (Maximum) Calculation ................................................................ 207
Bingham Plastic Rheology Model ............................................................................... 207
Bit Hydraulic Power .................................................................................................... 211
Bit Pressure Loss Calculations .................................................................................... 212
Derivations for PV, YP, 0-Sec Gel and Fann Data ...................................................... 212
ECD Calculations ........................................................................................................ 213
Graphical Analysis Calculations .................................................................................. 214
Hole Cleaning Methodology and Calculations ............................................................ 215
Bit Impact Force .......................................................................................................... 221
Nozzle Velocity ........................................................................................................... 222
Optimization Planning Calculations ............................................................................ 222
Optimization Well Site Calculations ........................................................................... 223
Power Law Rheology Model ....................................................................................... 226
Pressure Loss Analysis Calculations ........................................................................... 231
Pump Power Calculations ............................................................................................ 232
Pump Pressure Calculations ......................................................................................... 233
Shear Rate and Shear Stress Calculations .................................................................... 233
Swab/Surge Calculations ............................................................................................. 234
Tool Joint Pressure Loss Calculations ......................................................................... 236
Weight Up Calculations ............................................................................................... 237
References........................................................................................................................... 238
General ......................................................................................................................... 238
Bingham Plastic Model ................................................................................................ 238
Coiled Tubing .............................................................................................................. 238
Hole Cleaning .............................................................................................................. 238
Herschel Bulkley Model .............................................................................................. 239
Optimization Well Site ................................................................................................ 239
Power Law Model ........................................................................................................ 239
Rheology Thermal Effects ........................................................................................... 239
Surge Swab .................................................................................................................. 240
Tool Joint Pressure Loss .............................................................................................. 240
Well Control Analysis................................................................................................... 241

Overview............................................................................................................................. 241
Well Control Analysis: An Introduction............................................................................. 242
March 2001 Contents ix

Starting Well Control Analysis .................................................................................... 242

Using Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode ................................................................. 244
Starting Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode ....................................................... 244
Enter Case Data ........................................................................................................... 244
Specify Choke and Kill Line Use ................................................................................ 245
Enter Temperature Profile for Well Control Analysis ................................................. 245
Determining Type of Kick ........................................................................................... 247
Estimating Influx Volume ........................................................................................... 248
Influx Volume Estimation Results Tab ................................................................. 251
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 251
Using Kick Tolerance Analysis Mode................................................................................ 252
Enter Case Data ........................................................................................................... 252
Specify Kill Method, Choke/Kill Line and Slow Pumps Data .................................... 253
Enter Choke/Kill Data ........................................................................................... 253
Select Kill Method and Enter Operational Data .................................................... 254
Enter Kill Rate, Kick Data ........................................................................................... 254
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 255
Animation .............................................................................................................. 260
Using Kill Sheet Analysis Mode ........................................................................................ 262
Enter Case Data ........................................................................................................... 262
Enter Kill Sheet Data ................................................................................................... 263
Enter Kick Analysis Parameters ............................................................................ 263
Enter Mud Weight Up Data ................................................................................... 263
Enter Annular Volumes ......................................................................................... 264
Enter String Volumes ............................................................................................. 265
Select Kill Pump Speed ......................................................................................... 265
Analysis Results ........................................................................................................... 266
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 266
Reports ................................................................................................................... 267
Analysis Mode Methodology.............................................................................................. 268
General Assumptions and Terminology ...................................................................... 268
Initial Influx Volume ............................................................................................. 268
Influx Properties Assumptions ............................................................................... 268
Influx Annular Volume and Height ....................................................................... 269
Choke Pressure and Influx Position ....................................................................... 269
Kill Methods .......................................................................................................... 269
Expected Influx Volume .............................................................................................. 270
Kick Tolerance ............................................................................................................. 271
Kill Sheet ..................................................................................................................... 275
x Contents March 2001

Allowable Kick Volume Calculations ......................................................................... 276

Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate Calculations ............................................... 276
Gas Compressibility ..................................................................................................... 278
Influx Circulation Model for Kick While Drilling or After Pump Shutdown ............. 280
Influx Circulation Model for Swab Kicks ................................................................... 284
Kick Classification ....................................................................................................... 289
Kick While Drilling ............................................................................................... 289
Kick After Pump Shutdown ................................................................................... 290
Swab Kick .............................................................................................................. 290
Kick After Pump Shut Down Influx Estimation .......................................................... 290
Kick While Drilling Influx Estimation ........................................................................ 293
Kill Sheet ..................................................................................................................... 296
Pressure at Depth of Interest ........................................................................................ 301
Pressure Loss Analysis ................................................................................................ 301
Steady State Circulation Temperature Model .............................................................. 302
Viscosity and Compressibility of Methane .................................................................. 305
References........................................................................................................................... 308
General ......................................................................................................................... 308
Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate .................................................................... 308
Gas Compressibility (Z Factor) Model Calculations ................................................... 308
Steady State Temperature ............................................................................................ 308
Surge Analysis ................................................................................................................. 309

Overview............................................................................................................................. 309
Surge Analysis: An Introduction ........................................................................................ 310
What is the Surge Module? .......................................................................................... 310
What is the Difference Between a Transient and Steady-State Model? ...................... 310
When Should I use the Transient Surge Model? ......................................................... 311
Workflow ............................................................................................................................ 313
Using Surge Analysis Mode ............................................................................................... 316
Starting Surge Analysis ............................................................................................... 316
Formation Properties .................................................................................................... 317
Cement Properties ........................................................................................................ 318
Eccentricity .................................................................................................................. 318
Specifying Surge Operations and Analysis Parameters ............................................... 319
Analysis Details ..................................................................................................... 321
Calculating Results ...................................................................................................... 324
Specify Diagnostic File Usage ............................................................................... 325
Plots ....................................................................................................................... 326
Miscellaneous Plots ............................................................................................... 335
Report ..................................................................................................................... 336
March 2001 Contents xi

Methodology ................................................................................................................ 337

Pressure and Temperature Behavior of Water Based Muds ........................................ 337
Viscosity Correlations of Oil Based Muds .................................................................. 338
Surge Analysis ............................................................................................................. 338
Two Analysis Regions ........................................................................................... 338
Connecting the Coupled-Pipe/Annulus and the Pipe-to-Bottomhole Regions ...... 341
Open Annulus Calculations ......................................................................................... 342
Mass Balance ......................................................................................................... 342
Momentum Balance ............................................................................................... 342
Coupled Pipe Annulus Calculations ............................................................................ 343
Pipe Flow ............................................................................................................... 343
Annulus Flow ......................................................................................................... 344
Pipe Motion ............................................................................................................ 344
References........................................................................................................................... 346
Transient Pressure Surge ............................................................................................. 346
Validation ..................................................................................................................... 346
Pipe and Borehole Expansion ...................................................................................... 346
Frictional Pressure Drop .............................................................................................. 346
Pressure and Temperature Fluid Property Dependence ............................................... 347
Cementing-OptiCem Analysis ................................................................................. 349

Overview............................................................................................................................. 349
Cementing Analysis: An Introduction ................................................................................ 350
What is Cementing? ..................................................................................................... 350
Workflow ............................................................................................................................ 351
Using Cementing Analysis Mode ....................................................................................... 353
Starting Cementing Analysis ....................................................................................... 353
Define Fluids Used During the Cement Job ................................................................ 353
Defining Muds and Spacers ................................................................................... 354
Defining Cement Slurries ...................................................................................... 354
Define Job Information ................................................................................................ 356
Specify the Volume Excess % ..................................................................................... 356
Specify the Standoff or Calculate the Centralizer Placement ...................................... 357
Define the Cement Job ................................................................................................. 359
Define Temperatures, Depths of Interest and Offshore Returns Information ............. 364
Specify Additional Analysis Parameters ..................................................................... 366
What is the Circulating Pressure Throughout the Cement Job? ............................ 367
Is There Free Fall? ................................................................................................. 368
What is the Surface Pressure? ................................................................................ 369
Automatically Adjusting the Flowrate ................................................................... 370
Using Foamed Cement ........................................................................................... 372
References........................................................................................................................... 380
xii Contents March 2001

Critical Speed ................................................................................................................... 381

Critical Speed Course Overview......................................................................................... 381
Critical Speed: An Introduction .......................................................................................... 382
What is the Critical Speed Module? ............................................................................ 382
Why Use the Critical Speed Module? .......................................................................... 382
Critical Speed Limitations ........................................................................................... 383
Workflow ............................................................................................................................ 384
Using Critical Speed ........................................................................................................... 386
Starting the Critical Speed Module .............................................................................. 386
Opening the Case ......................................................................................................... 386
Specify the Finite Element Mesh ........................................................................... 386
Defining Analysis Parameters ..................................................................................... 388
Specify the Boundary Conditions .......................................................................... 389
Calculating Results ...................................................................................................... 390
Analyzing the Results .................................................................................................. 390
What are the Critical Rotational Speeds? .............................................................. 390
Where in the BHA are the Large Relative Stresses Occurring? ............................ 391
What Kind of Stress is Causing the Large Relative Stress? .................................. 392
How Do I View the Large Relative Stress at Any Position on One Plot? ............. 393
Structural Solution ....................................................................................................... 394
Vibrational Analysis .................................................................................................... 394
Mass Matrix ................................................................................................................. 397
Damping Matrix ........................................................................................................... 397
Excitation Factors ........................................................................................................ 398
References........................................................................................................................... 401
Bottom Hole Assembly ............................................................................................... 403

Bottom Hole Assembly Course Overview.......................................................................... 403
Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis: An Introduction............................................................ 404
What is the Bottom Hole Assembly Module? ............................................................. 404
Why Should I Use the Bottom Hole Assembly Module? ............................................ 404
Bottom Hole Assembly Module Limitations ............................................................... 405
Workflow ............................................................................................................................ 406
Using Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis Mode................................................................... 407
Starting Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis ................................................................... 407
Specify the Finite Element Mesh ........................................................................... 407
Analyzing a Static Bottom Hole Assembly ................................................................. 408
Defining Analysis Parameters for Static Analysis ................................................. 408
Analyzing Results for the Static (in-place) Position .............................................. 411
Predicting How a Bottom Hole Assembly Will Drill Ahead ....................................... 418
Defining Analysis Parameters for Drillahead Analysis ......................................... 418
Analyzing Drillahead Results ................................................................................ 419
March 2001 Contents xiii


Analysis Methodology ................................................................................................. 422
Three Fundamental Requirements of Structural Analysis ..................................... 422
Defining the Finite Element Mesh ......................................................................... 422
Compute the Local Stiffness Matrix and the Global Stiffness Matrix .................. 423
Degrees of Freedom ............................................................................................... 428
Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................. 428
Constructing the Wellbore and Bottom Hole Assembly Reference Axis .............. 431
Calculating the Solution ......................................................................................... 432
Bit Tilt and Resultant Side Force ........................................................................... 432
Drillahead Solutions .............................................................................................. 435
Bit Coefficient ........................................................................................................ 436
Formation Hardness ............................................................................................... 437
References........................................................................................................................... 438
Notebook ............................................................................................................................. 439

Overview............................................................................................................................. 439
Starting Notebook ........................................................................................................ 439
Notebook Analysis Modes ........................................................................................... 440
Miscellaneous Mode ........................................................................................................... 441
Linear Weight .............................................................................................................. 441
Blockline Cut Off Length ............................................................................................ 441
Leak Off Test ............................................................................................................... 442
Fluids Mode ........................................................................................................................ 443
Mix Fluids .................................................................................................................... 443
Dilute /Weight Up ........................................................................................................ 443
Fluid Compressibility .................................................................................................. 444
Hydraulics Mode................................................................................................................. 445
Pump Output ................................................................................................................ 445
Annular ........................................................................................................................ 445
Pipe .............................................................................................................................. 446
Nozzles ......................................................................................................................... 446
Buoyancy ..................................................................................................................... 447
Calculations ........................................................................................................................ 448
Block Line Cut Off Length .......................................................................................... 448
Dilute/Wt Up Fluid ...................................................................................................... 448
Fluid Buoyancy ............................................................................................................ 448
Fluid Compressibility .................................................................................................. 449
Leak Off Test ............................................................................................................... 449
Mix Fluids .................................................................................................................... 449
Pump Output ................................................................................................................ 450
Nozzle Area ................................................................................................................. 450
xiv Contents March 2001

Chapter 1
Introduction
What is WELLPLAN?
WELLPLAN is a drilling engineering software system to assist with
solving engineering problems during the design and operational phases
of drilling and completing wells. WELLPLAN 1998.7 is comprised of
several modules including Torque Drag Analysis, Hydraulics, Well
Control, Surge and Notebook.
WELLPLAN can be used in the office or at the well site. WELLPLAN

can be installed on a network for use by several individuals, or on an
individual “stand alone” computer. Regardless of the installation
location or type, data can be transferred between installations. In
addition, WELLPLAN is compatible with other LANDMARK software
and data can be transferred between a variety of LANDMARK software
packages.
Training Course and Manual Overview

The purpose of this manual is to provide you a reference for entering
data and performing an analysis during the class. Perhaps more
importantly, you can refer to it after the class is over to refresh your
memory concerning analysis steps. This manual contains technical
information concerning the methodology and calculations used to
develop this software. If you require more technical information than
what is presented in this manual, please ask you instructor. The on-line
help is very useful, and may assist you while using the software.
This training class is designed to be flexible to meet the needs of the

attendees. In this manual, there may be information regarding a module
that you do not have.
Generally, a training course begins with a quick introduction. Following

the introduction, time will be spent covering the “Basics”. The basics are
common to all of the modules. In this section you will learn how to
navigate the system, enter data, and produce output. After the “Basics”
have been reviewed, you will begin to look at the individual modules
(Torque Drag, Hydraulics, Well Control, Surge and Notebook.)
Landmark WELLPLAN 15
Chapter 1: Introduction
Single User and Network Installations

WELLPLAN can be installed standalone for a single user or site, or
installed centrally on a network for multiple users.
A typical installation at the rigsite is standalone with all modules

installed on a single hard disk drive. Additionally, a backup computer
may have WELLPLAN installed on it for use if the main computer
becomes unavailable.
In the office, a network installation enables most components to be

shared centrally on a network drive. A minimum local directory
structure is used for storing WELLPLAN data, user unit sets, catalogs
and custom report formats.
WELLPLAN is licensed software, and requires some form of license in

order to operate. For standalone installations, a bitlock may be used. A
bitlock is a special hardware device that is plugged into the parallel port
(LPT1) of the computer. Network installations can use Network
Licensing.
Network Licensing uses a lock file configuration to track the number of

users using the varies software modules. Network licensing uses a first
come-first served principle and users can access WELLPLAN modules
if licenses are available.
If a license to any WELLPLAN module is not available, a warning

message will appear. A license must become available before the
module can be used.
16 WELLPLAN Landmark
Chapter 2
Basics
Overview
In this section of the course, you will become familiar with the basic
functionality common to all WELLPLAN modules. You will learn how
to enter data, generate and print tables, plots, and reports, manage
catalogs, configure units, design your workspace, and many other
features that will enable you to use the WELLPLAN engineering
modules efficiently.
To reinforce what you learn in the class lecture, you will have the
opportunity to complete exercises designed to prepare you for using the
program outside of class. The information presented in this chapter can
be used as a study guide during the course and can also be used as a
reference for future WELLPLAN use.
Chapter 2: Basics
Getting Started
WELLPLAN is installed with several tools and documentation to assist

you with using the product. These tools and documentation can be found
by using the Start Menu. The default installation will create a program
group titled ‘Landmark Drilling & Well Services’. From this group,
select ‘Planning’ then ‘WELLPLAN’. From here, you can select the
Documentation sub-group, or the Tools sub-group.
Using the Documentation sub-group, you may select:
l Help - Use to launch the online help. The online help is also
accessible from all windows, and dialogs in WELLPLAN.
l Install Guide - The installation guide for WELLPLAN can be

viewed using this option.
l Landmark Home Page - This option can be used to access

Landmark Graphics internet home page.
l Release Notes - The Release Notes provide useful information

about the current release, including: new features, bug fixes, known
problems, and how to get support when you need it.
l User Guide - The User Guide contains information about using the
software.
Using the Tools sub-group, you may select:
l Bitlock Status - This tool can be used to view the settings of the
bitlock installed on the parallel port.
l Crpkey Licensing - This tool can be used to view the status and
settings of the Crpkey licensing.
l Netsecure Licensing -This tool can be used to view the status and
settings of the Netsecure licensing.
l Report Manager - Use to view or print reports generated using

WELLPLAN’s Report Manager utility.
l Unit System Upgrade Wizard - Use this tool to upgrade unit systems
from earlier versions of WELLPLAN.
Chapter 2: Basics
l WELLPLAN 5 Catalog Import - Use this tool to import catalogs

developed using WELLPLAN 5.X.
Starting WELLPLAN
You can start WELLPLAN in two ways:
l Use the Start Menu. Select ‘WELLPLAN’ using Landmark

Drilling and Well Services→Planning→WELLPLAN.
l Double-click on any desktop shortcut you have configured.
After WELLPLAN launches, a splash window appears that displays

licensing and version information. Shortly after the display of the splash
window, the first WELLPLAN window will appear.
The first window to appear when you start WELLPLAN looks similar
to the following. At this time, the window contains few menu options,
and most of the toolbar buttons are not available for use.
You can select an item from the menu using the mouse or the keyboard
quick keys. To use the quick keys to select an item, press and hold the
ALT key while pressing the underlined character in the menu item. For
example, to open the File menu, press ALT F. To use the mouse, click
on the menu item.
You must select or define a new Case to expand the menu bar options or
to activate additional toolbar buttons. The next section in this manual
describes how to define the Project, Well and Case you want to analyze.
After the Case is defined, we will examine the window more closely.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Toolbars
Chapter 2: Basics
Projects, Wells, and Cases
What is a Project, Well and Case?

Projects, wells, and cases are used to logically group related well
information.
A project is the highest level of organization. A project can refer to a

field, company (if you do work for several companies), or another type
of grouping you find useful.
A well is the next level of grouping, and is usually used to define a well
that is to be analyzed. You may want to think of a well as the familiar
‘well file’. It may contain data for the entire well including all hole
sections and associated data. However, you are free to use this level of
grouping in way you choose.
Just as a project can have many wells associated with it, a well can have
many associated cases. Cases are used to group within a well. Case data
includes a well definition (wellbore, workstring, fluid, etc.), and
operating parameters for analysis. For example, you may choose to
define a case for each hole section, or for a certain BHA you are
analyzing. A case can also be used for sensitivity analysis. You may
have two cases that are identical except for the coefficients of friction
defined in the wellbore.
Database
All project, well and case data is saved together in a database. The
database file is ‘Wellplan.mdb’ and can be found in the ‘Database’
Chapter 2: Basics
folder of the folder where you installed WELLPLAN. The database, and
storing the information by Project/Well/Case is a major change from
WELLPLAN 5.3x versions.
Because the database contains all the information you have entered, you
should back up your database on a regular basis. If something
unfortunate happens to the database you are using, it is always a relief
to have a current backup of your database to use to restore your data.
Creating a Project, Well and Case

Use File →Project to create a project. You can use this dialog to create
new projects, to edit the project name and descriptions for existing
projects, or to delete existing projects. You can also see the number of
wells that are associated with existing projects. Click on the New button
to create a project. Give the project any description you want. Close the
project dialog.
Existing
Projects Click New
to create a
project.
The next step is to create a well associated with the project. To create a
well, use File →Well. Click on the New button to create a new well.
Chapter 2: Basics
Enter the well name.
Select a project with

Detail Well Information is which to associate the
optional. case.
Enter the name and description of the well. Don’t forget to select the
correct project from the project drop down list. This step will associate
the well with the appropriate project.
Although we will be using an existing case, you could create a new case
by using File →New Case. On the dialog displayed, select the project
and the well you want to associate the case with.
This training course uses a Case titled ‘9 5/8”casing’ in the Project

‘Guided Tour’ and Well ‘Tour #1’. Open this case using File→Open
Case.
Select the project

associated with the case
you want to open. Select the well
associated with the
Double-click the case case you want to
you want to open. open.
Saving and Deleting Cases, Wells, and Projects

When a case is created, it will be assigned a default name. In order to
assign the case a meaningful name you must save the case.
Chapter 2: Basics
There are two ways to save a case. If a case has been saved before, you
can use File →Save to save the case with the same name it was
previously been saved with. Use File →Save As to specify the case
name. Using this method, you must provide a name for the case. If you
try to use File →Save with a case that has not already been saved you
will be prompted to enter a meaningful case name.
Projects, and wells are saved when they are created. To delete a project,
use File →Project. When you delete a project, the associated wells and
cases will not be deleted. You must delete the wells and cases separately.
Select the project Click Edit to edit the

you want to edit or selected project
delete. name or description.
Click Delete to
delete selected
project.
To delete a well, use File →Well. A dialog listing all wells in the
database will be displayed. Highlight the well you want to delete and
click the Delete button. All cases associated with this well will also be
deleted.
Select the well Click Edit to edit the

you want to edit or selected well’s
delete. name or description.
Click Delete to
delete selected well.
You can delete a case by deleting the well it is associated with or you
can use File →Delete →Case. Highlight the case you want to delete and
click the Delete button.
Chapter 2: Basics
Select the case you

want to delete.
Click Delete to
delete selected
case.
Chapter 2: Basics
Main Window Layout
WELLPLAN is designed using a Microsoft Windows MDI (multiple

Document Interface) area. The WELLPLAN Main Window is shown
below. In this window, a well schematic is currently displayed. In many
cases, data entry and reviewing analysis are performed in separate
windows that you can view simultaneously within the Main Window.
There are several distinct areas within the Main Window as shown in the
following figure.
Title Bar Menu Bar Module Toolbar

Standard Toolbar Graphic Toolbar
Wizard Toolbar Window Title Bar
Tabs Status Bar
Title Bar
The Title Bar is located at the top of the Main Window and displays the
name of the current project, well and case. Notice the case name that has
been assigned.
Chapter 2: Basics
To move the application frame to another part on the screen, drag the
title bar using the mouse.
To toggle the application frame between its maximized and restored

states, double-click the title bar.
Individual windows also have Title Bars. They behave much like the
application’s title bar in that they contain similar menus and buttons.
You can use them to move the window to a different location on the
screen.
Menu Bars
After a case has been created or opened, the menu bar has more
selections. We will begin to look at these options more closely.
Chapter 2: Basics
File Menu
Use the File Menu to manage data, create new projects, wells, cases and
catalogs, delete projects, wells, cases and catalogs, access import/export
functions, access print functions, and exit WELLPLAN.
{
{
Display, add, delete or edit projects.
Display, add, delete or edit wells.
Create a new case.
Open an existing case.
Creates a new catalog.
Open an existing catalog.
Access the centralizer editor to add a new centralizer or edit an existing.
Close or save the active case or catalog.
Create and place on your desktop a shortcut file for the current case.
Manage workspace templates.
Delete cases and catalogs.
Import or export using DEX.
Export or import the active project, well, catalog or case data.
Export Metafile graph data.
Print, preview print or set page formats.
View or edit properties of the active case or catalog.
Open the most recently closed case or catalog files.
Chapter 2: Basics
Edit Menu
Use the Edit Menu to modify the currently open Case. Use the Report
Header Setup option to specify the title to use on the output, and to
specify the logo (bitmap) to place on the output.
Auto-Calculation is an option on the Edit Menu. (You can also find the
Auto-Calc and Calculate buttons on the Standard Toolbar. The
Calculation button looks like a calculator.) When auto-calculation is
turned on, WELLPLAN automatically calculates any new values
entered in a dialog after you click OK or Apply. When auto-calculation
is turned off, you will need to click the Calculate button when you want
data calculated so that you can have accurate results in your views.
Remove data or an object you selected
and save it to the Clipboard.
Paste (insert) the contents of the

Clipboard at the location you select
Return to the prior version of data on
a spreadsheet one change at a time.
Add a new row to the active
spreadsheet.
Copy data or an object you selected
and save it to the Clipboard.
Customize the currently active pane.
Select every row in the active

Configure report headings.
spreadsheet or table for cutting or
Toggle on and off pasting.
WELLPLAN’s automatic
calculation feature. Use
Calculate to calculate when Remove one or more rows from the
desired if Auto Calculation is active spreadsheet
not turned on.
Modules Menu
Use the Modules Menu to access the various WELLPLAN modules,
including: Torque Drag, Hydraulics, Well Control, Surge and
Notebook.
Chapter 2: Basics
Select the engineering module

you want to use from the menu.
Case Menu
Use the Case Menu to enter data specific to the currently opened Case.
The contents of the Case Menu will vary depending on the Module
chosen.
The Case Menu has dialogs and spreadsheets for gathering information
pertaining to the case you are defining. Most of the information entered
in this menu’s options will be used for many or possibly all modules and
module analysis modes. Some Case menu options are only available for
gathering information pertaining to specific WELLPLAN modules.
Also, the menu options available may vary by analysis mode. You must
enter information on all dialogs visible in the Case menu for the selected
analysis mode before you can proceed with the analysis.
The contents of the Case Menu

changes depending on the
analysis module selected.
Parameter Menu
Use the Parameter Menu to enter analysis parameters for the chosen
analysis mode. The contents of the Parameter Menu vary depending on
the analysis mode chosen.
Deviation Menu
The Deviation Menu is only available when the Survey Editor is active.
Use this menu to import or export surveys to the library.
Chapter 2: Basics
Use the Deviation menu to import or

export survey data to/from libraries.
Wellbore Menu
The Wellbore Menu is only available when the Wellbore Editor is
active. Use this menu to display catalog details about the highlighted
section of the wellbore, and import or export wellbore data to or from
the libraries.
The Wellbore Menu is only

available when the Wellbore
Editor is active.
String Menu
The String Menu is only available when the String Editor is active. Use
this menu to display catalog details or specific information about a
workstring component, and to import/export string data to/from the
libraries.
The String Menu is only

available when the String
Editor is active.
View Menu
Use the View Menu to view analysis results, including reports, tables,
and plots. Some calculations are also performed using this menu. You
can use this menu to toggle on or off toolbars and tabs. From this menu,
you can control the use of tips and calculation status messages.
Chapter 2: Basics
The Setup section has options used to display and remove toolbars from
view; add, rename, arrange, and delete window tabs; display
engineering analysis errors as tooltips; and display a status message
window. This section is available for all modules and analysis modes.
The Analysis Output section has submenu options used to display plots,
tables, and reports for the current analysis mode. The submenus and the
options available vary by module and its active analysis mode.
The Schematic and Survey Plots section has submenu options used to
display wellbore schematics, fluid plots, and survey plots. This section
is available for most modules and analysis modes.
Setup section
Analysis Output section. The contents of this

section vary depending on analysis module
and mode active.
Schematic and Survey Plots section
Tools Menu
The Tools Menu is used to add, remove, edit, and select unit systems.
You can also use this menu to specify grade, material, and class tubular
properties.
Add, remove, edit, and switch

unit systems
Specify grade, material, and
class tubular properties
Click Halliburton Cementing Tables to access an online
version of the “Redbook”.
Check to turn on sound
effects.
Chapter 2: Basics
Window Menu
Use the Window Menu to select and arrange windows.
Enlarge one of the split window panes so that it fills the entire area.
Return back to the original split window configuration after maximizing one of the split
window panes.
Arrange any windows not minimized in an overlapping fashion.
Arrange any windows not minimized horizontally or vertically in non-overlapping tiles.
Arrange the icons of any minimized windows to their default positions at the lower left of
the window or desktop.
Split the active window into four separate panes.
Switch between well files when you have two or more open. There will be a check mark
beside the active Case or Catalog name.
Help Menu
Use the Help Menu to view tips, access help, or to view information
concerning the version of the WELLPLAN software in use.
Help Menu
Tool Bars
After a case has been created or opened, you can see that the toolbar
choices have also been expanded. Toolbars have buttons you can use to
Chapter 2: Basics
quickly perform common operations, such as file management

commands and engineering functions.
There are several toolbars. Each toolbar is outlined by a single line, so

you can tell what is included in each toolbar. Toolbars are normally
found just below the menu bar, but they can be “undocked” and moved
to other areas within the application window. They can also be removed
from view using View →Toolbars. Toolbar buttons are grayed out
when they are not applicable to what you are currently doing.
The Standard Toolbar provides easy access to common file management

and printing commands.
Save active Auto

Case or Print Priview Cut Calculate
Catalog Calculate
Undo
New Case
Open Case Print Paste Maximize/Restore

Copy
Help
The Module Toolbar provides access to the engineering modules. You

can also access the engineering modules by using the Modules Menu.
Well Control OptiCem - Cementing

Torque Drag Surge
Bottom Hole
Assembly
Hydraulics Notebook Critical Speed
The Graphics Toolbar provides access to graphical functions and is only

available when a plot is active in the current window. If the Graphics
Toolbar is grey, click once on the plot and the toolbar selections will
become available.
Chapter 2: Basics
turns off the

functions enabled Data Reader Legend
by some Graphics Swap Axis
toolbar buttons
Properties
Rescalae Grid View Line Highlighting
Wizard
The Wizard Toolbar provides access to analysis modes, and data entry
forms.
Mode drop-down list

to select desired Wizard Drop-down
analysis mode. list to guide you
through data entry Previous and Next
buttons
Chapter 2: Basics
Helpful Features
Online Help
The Help Menu has several available options. Help can be accessed by
pressing the F1 key, selecting Help from the Menu bar, or by clicking
the Help button available on many dialogs.
Tip of the Day is a series of brief, helpful tips that are displayed when
you start WELLPLAN. If you don’t want to see the tips, turn them off
using this menu option.
Contents displays the online help topics grouped together in a logical

format.
If you choose ‘Search for Help on...’ you can view an index of the help.
For example, to find help on the toolbars, type toolbar in the first line,
and then select toolbars. You can find help on any of the WELLPLAN
toolbars using this help screen.
Use About WELLPLAN 1998.7 to determine what version and build

number you are using. This is very helpful information if you are
contacting WELLPLAN support.
Click to access the

help
Configuring Units
WELLPLAN is distributed with two units systems (API and SI). Each
unit system is on a separate tab. You can not edit or change the API or
SI units systems. However, you can use these unit sets as the basis for a
new unit system you are defining. At any time, you may change the
Chapter 2: Basics
display units, and the value will automatically be converted without lose
of data quality.
Units systems are selected or edited using the Tools→Units System

Editor tabs. On each tab, you can see the unit each parameter will use
in the analysis.
Changing units is easy. Launch the Unit Editor, select a unit system
(API, SI, or custom defined), and then click a Unit Class on the left side
of the tab. Choose from a list of units from that class on the right side of
the tab. Click on the unit you want to use. You can make as many
changes as you need. When you are finished making changes, click OK
to apply the changes.
The name of the active unit system is displayed in the lower right side
of the Status bar. This unit system is currently being used in the analysis.
Holding the cursor over the status bar will display the description of the
selected unit system. Double-clicking the unit system name in the status
bar will activate the unit systems editor, or you can use Tools→Units
System Editor and click on the tab for the desired system and click the
OK button.
In WELLPLAN, only some units are meaningful for expressing unit

types. For this reason, Unit Class (sets of units for a particular unit type)
are defined. Examples of unit classes are: diameters, depth, and dogleg
severity.
Each data entry field in WELLPLAN belongs to a Unit Class and its
value is displayed in the unit defined for that class. Variables that belong
to different classes do not need to be represented in the same type of
units. For example, while Hole Diameter might be represented in inches
(API), Hold Depth might be represented in meters (SI).
Chapter 2: Basics
Click the New

button to create a
Active unit set is the
unit system
tab displayed on top
of other tabs. Click
on the tab to Click the Edit
activate it. button to edit a
unit set you have
created. You can
not edit the API or
SI unit sets.
Click the Delete

button to delete a
unit set that you
have created
Tubular Properties
Tubular properties can be changed using the Tools menu. Tubular
properties include material, grade and class. These properties are used
to describe the well tubulars and other components used in the wellbore
and workstring editors. You can add additional properties, edit existing
properties, or delete entire rows as you can with any spreadsheet in the
system.
Grade
Grade is used to define the strength of the tubular or component.
Chapter 2: Basics
Select the section type from the drop down

list
You must enter data in each column to

define a tubular grade
To delete an item, click on the row number

of the selection that you want to delete,
then click the Delete button
To insert a row, you can add to the bottom

of the existing list. You can also select the
row below where you want to insert a row
and then click the Insert button.
Material
Material is used to define the density of the material, Young’s modulus
and Poisson’s ratio for tubular and other components.
Select the section type from the drop down

list

define a material


Chapter 2: Basics
Class
Class is used to define the wall thickness percentage of tubulars. The
percentage of wall thickness is used to calculate the existing outside
diameter of the tubular.

define a tubular class


Halliburton Cementing Tables

Click on Halliburton Cementing Tables to access an online version of
the traditional Redbook. You can use the Cementing Tables to
determine hole capacities, tubular/casing displacements, tubing/casing
stregth and dimensions, volumes between tubing and casing, etc.
Sound Effects
This menu option lets you toggle (on or off) any sound effects related to
Wellplan program operation. When the menu option is checked, sound
effects are ON. When the menu option is unchecked, sound effects are
OFF.
Chapter 2: Basics
Entering Case Data
The Case menu (a selection on the menu bar) is used to enter data
defining the well including the wellbore, workstring, fluid, etc. The
contents of the Case menu will change depending on the type of analysis
you have selected because analysis types require different information
about the well. Later on we will see the Parameter menu which is used
to enter analysis parameters specific to the analysis type you are
performing.
It is recommended that you begin entering data in the first menu item
available on the case menu and work your way down the menu
selections. You can also use the Wizard Toolbar to enter data in the
proper order.
Two Common Entry Forms

Dialogs and spreadsheets are the two types of data entry forms used in
WELLPLAN. When a dialog is active, you can not enter data anywhere
else in the program until the dialog is closed. Spreadsheets are used for
repeating sets of data. Much of the functionality of these data entry
forms will be intuitive to you because it is similar to other Windows
applications. However, if you have a question concerning the use of
these data entry forms, refer to the online help.
Entering General Well Information

The Case →General dialog contains three tabs. On the first tab, you
specify the well’s total depth, vertical section definition, reference
elevation, and whether the well is offshore or deviated. On the second
tab, you can specify information about the cementing job. This
information is optional. You may enter comments about the well on the
third, but this information is optional.
Chapter 2: Basics
Check box to specify Specify the Well

offshore well Measured Depth
Check box to specify a TVD is calculated

deviated well
Select the well

Specify the Vertical depth reference
Section point from the drop
down list
The Elevation is the height of the reference point above MGL for an onshore well or MSL for an
offshore well. For an offshore well, the RKB elevation along with the water depth entered on
the Offshore dialog will determine the mudline depth. This field will be disabled and assigned
a value of 0 if the reference depth is MGL or MSL.
Note: Depths based on a given elevation are not automatically re-computed if the elevation is
changed. For example, the hanger, shoe, and TOC fields are not automatically changed to
reflect a change in the elevation field.
The Job Information tab is used to

enter additional information about
the job, including pipe size, job
type/description, and date.
This information is optional and

pertains primarily to the OptiCem-
Cementing module.
Designating an Offshore Well

The Case →Offshore dialog is used to specify the water depth and well
type (platform or subsea) for an offshore well. You can not access this
dialog unless you have indicated that the well is an offshore well on the
General Dialog.
Chapter 2: Basics
Click radio button to select Platform or

Subsea well
Defining the Wellbore Geometry

The Case →Wellbore dialog is used to define the wellbore geometry,
including casing, drillpipe, open hole, riser, or tubing sections for the
current case.
Wellbore Menu
Each row
defines a
wellbore section
For cased sections, specify the effective hole diameter of the hole into which the casing
is inserted. (Do NOT enter the casing OD.) This diameter is used for surge calculations
to compute the elastic properties. For open hole sections, the effective hole diameter is
used to represent the actual size of the hole. Volume Excess % is calculated based on
effective hole diameter.
Since a project can have multiple cases, you need to enter data in this
spreadsheet to define the well profile and well depth of a particular case
for analysis. From this data, you can define the components of the
wellbore and the material properties of the components. The wellbore
configuration is common for all modes and is available across all
WELLPLAN modules.
You must enter the wellbore information from the surface down to the
bottom of the well. When you make a selection from a Section Type cell
Chapter 2: Basics
(other then Open Hole), a dialog specific to that section type appears.
You must fill in the data in the dialog in order for that section type to be
recorded in that cell. You also must fill in all editable cells in the
spreadsheet row.
NOTE: For cased sections, specify the effective hole diameter of

the hole into which the casing is inserted. (Do NOT enter the
casing OD.) This diameter is used for surge calculations to
compute the elastic properties. For open hole sections, the
effective hole diameter is used to represent the actual size of the
hole. Volume Excess % is calculated based on effective hole
diameter.
If you import a caliper log into Wellplan, you should double-

check the values for any rows labeled Open Hole. The Import
Caliper Log function takes the number of blocks specified by the
user and creates the same number of rows in the spreadsheet,
averaging the individual measured hole diameters into each
section described in the spreadsheet. Logs that start at the bottom
of the casing may not continue all the way to the top of the well, in
which case the first geometry may need to be added to the top of
the outer geometry table after performing the import. Washed out
portions of a well may cause the caliper to record values such as -
999.0, which represents an unknown value. If any value is blank,
you must enter an appropriate diameter by typing it into the
spreadsheet.
Wellbore Menu
When the Wellbore Editor is visible, the Menu Bar has an additional
menu option available. This menu option titled Wellbore is used to
access the catalog and to import to or export from the library. The
wellbore and survey editors have similar menu items when active.
Using Catalogs
Catalogs contain data that you can use to create a workstring or
wellbore. There is a different catalog for each component type, and
thirteen default catalog types are included with the system that contain
many tubular and tool components. Default catalogs for each type are
distributed with WELLPLAN, but you can create your own catalog to
include a component that may not be available in the default catalogs.
We will create a new catalog later in the course.
Chapter 2: Basics
Catalogs do not belong to a particular case. You can use the same
catalogs for all projects, wells and cases you create. You can export
catalogs to other users of WELLPLAN.
Most catalogs require you to select an item by choosing one descriptive

item from several columns of data. In order to select an item from the
column, you must double click on the item.
Select the catalog type

from the drop down list.
Select one item from each column by double clicking the left
mouse button on the item.
Using a Library
Libraries are used to copy wellbores, workstrings and fluids between
cases. You can create a library by exporting the desired wellbore,
workstring or fluid. A copy is made in the library. To use a library entry
in another case, you must import it into your workstring, wellbore, or
fluid editor. After the library is imported, you can edit it as you need.
A common use of libraries would be to create a library of several

frequently used bottom hole assemblies. BHAs are typically tedious to
enter, and utilizing the library feature can significantly reduce the
required time to enter a BHA into the workstring editor.
Do not confuse libraries with catalogs. A catalog contains a selection of

data that you may use to create a workstring or wellbore. After a
workstring or wellbore is created, you may want to export it to the
library for use in other cases.
Chapter 2: Basics
Defining a Work String

The Case → String spreadsheet is used to define all types of tubular
work strings and their components. Casing, liner, tubing and drill strings
are all defined using this spreadsheet. Strings can be entered from the
top down or from the bottom up. String depth is an important item on
this form, and indicates the bit depth used in many of the analysis
modes.
Workstrings can be entered entirely, or can be based on a string stored

in a library. To import a string from the library, use String →Import
From Library. Select the project and well containing the string you
want to import, and then select the desired string.
String menu
Edit menu
Select string type.
Enter string depth. It

will be used in many
analysis modes.
Select string entry

order
To edit or view information concerning a particular component, click on

any data cell pertaining to the component and then use String →Data.
Chapter 2: Basics
Use Tools →Tubular

Properties to edit the
tubular material types,
material properties,
grades, or class.
You can change much of the information describing the component on

the Data dialog, however these changes are not made to the catalog entry
corresponding to the component. You must use File →Open Catalog to
change the catalog entry. On the component data dialog there are some
material property cells that can not be edited. This information is related
to the grade and material selected for the component from the drop down
lists. Use Tools →Tubular Properties to add or edit component
material types, grades, or class.
Managing Deviation (Survey) Data

The Case →Deviation menu item has a submenu. Use these menu
choices to enter survey data, apply tortuosity to the surveys, define
survey calculation methods, and import survey information from
another source. There are two deviation menus. One is available from
the Case Menu, and the other is available on the Menu Bar when the
Survey Editor is active. The Deviation menu on the Menu Bar contains
import to and export from library functions.
Deviation menu
Chapter 2: Basics
Entering Survey Data

Use Case →Deviation → Survey Editor to enter survey data points.
You must specify measured depth, inclination and azimuth. The rest of
the information displayed in the non-editable cells will be calculated for
you. Survey data is calculated using the minimum curvature method.
Deviation menu
on Menu Bar is
used to import or
export survey
data to/from
libraries.
Enter MD, INC,

and AZ. The
remaining fields
are calculated
Importing Survey Files

You can also import survey data points using Case →Deviation
→Import Survey File. This is useful if you have survey data from a
source other than another Landmark software product.
A survey file must meet the following requirements to be imported using

this option.
• The data must be in ASCII format or reside in the Windows

Clipboard. If you are using the Clipboard to import from Excel,
use ‘Tab’ as the column delimiter.
• The data must be in columns, each separated by a comma, tab,
or blank space.
• Each row must have the same format.
• The measured depth, inclination and azimuth must be in a
supported unit.
If you are importing data from Compass, you would use the Clipboard.
To import data from DIMS or another Landmark product, you should
use DEX import. The DEX import will be discussed later.
Chapter 2: Basics
Specify data order
Specify data units
Import from a file or from the

clipboard
Setting Survey Options

You can add tortuosity to survey data points. Tortuosity is designed to
apply a “rippling” to a planned wellpath to simulate the variations found
in actual wellpath surveys. Tortuosity should never be applied to actual
survey data.
The three tortuosity methods available are sine wave, random

inclination dependent azimuth, and random inclination and azimuth.
The sine wave modifies the inclination and azimuth of the survey based
on the concept of a sine wave shaped ripple running along the wellbore.
The random methods apply random variation to the inclination and
azimuth. This method is based on SPE 19550.
Click one radio The magnitude is

button to select the maximum
tortuosity method variation of angle
that will be applied
to the inclination
For the Sine Wave and azimuth of the
method this is the native (untortured)
wavelength of the survey.
ripple. For the
Random methods,
the Angle Change
Period is used to
normalize the
measured depth Survey data will be calculated at the interval specified.
distance between
survey points.
Chapter 2: Basics
Viewing Surveys w/Interpolation

The survey data displayed using Case →Deviation → Surveys
w/Interpolation is a read-only view of the interpolated survey data set.
If interpolation is not applied in the Survey Options dialog, a default
interval of 30 ft will be used. Interpolated survey data is added to the
surveys specified in the survey editor.
Most cells in this

spreadsheet are
read only.
Viewing Surveys w/Tortuosity

Case →Deviation → Surveys w/Tortuosity data is only available if
tortuosity has been applied using the Survey Options dialog. This
spreadsheet displays a read-only view of the surveys that have had
tortuosity applied.
Chapter 2: Basics
Most cells in this

spreadsheet are
read only.
Define Fluid Properties and Rheological Model
Defining Drilling Fluids

Use the Case→Fluid Editor→Standard Fluids tab to define drilling
fluids. There are three rheological models to choose from, including:
Power Law, Bingham Plastic, and Herschel Bulkley. For each model
you can choose to enter PV/YP data or Fann data. You may also choose
to export a fluid to a library, or input a fluid from the library. However,
the library functions are not accessed via the main menu, but by clicking
buttons directly on the dialog.
Chapter 2: Basics
Click New to define a new fluid. You will be prompted to enter a name for the fluid.
Library import and export buttons
Use the fluid list box to display data defining an existing fluid, remove an existing fluid or to
rename an existing fluid. To display data defining an existing fluid, highlight the fluid name. To
delete a fluid, highlight the fluid name and click the Delete key. To rename an existing fluid, click
the fluid name and then click again. Type over the existing name to provide a new name.
Click the New button to add a test data for a new temperature.
Click on an existing temperature to edit or view test data for that temperature.
Click Plot Rheology Tests to plot rheology tests for all temperatures.
Click Save Fann Defaults to save the Fann defaults when you plot rheology tests.
Tuned spacer is not available in the commercial version of WELLPLAN.
Shear rates and shear stresses are calculated directly from the Fann data specified. Shear rate
and shear stress data.
Company and Field are optional.
Specify the density of the fluid.
Select the fluid type from the drop down list.
Choose the rheology data you want to enter from the drop down list.
Specify whether the fluid is oil or water based.
Select the rheology model.
Type rheology test data.
Chapter 2: Basics
Define Cement Slurries Tab

The Case→Fluid Editor→Cement Slurries tab is only available when
using the Cementing-OptiCem module. This tab is discussed in the
Cementing-OptiCem section of this course.
Select the Fluid You Want to Use in the Analysis

Use the Case→Fluid Editor→Fluid Selector tab to select the fluid you
want to use in a Torque Drag, Hydraulics or Well Control analysis. If
you are performing another type of analysis, this tab is not applicable.
Select the fluid you want to use from the drop down list. Only fluids that
have been defined are listed in the drop down list.
Select the fluid you want

to use in the analysis from
the drop down list.
Specify Circulating System Equipment

Use the two tabs on the Case →Circulating System dialog to specify
surface equipment and mud pumps data. On the Surface Equipment tab,
you may choose one of four pre-defined surface equipment
configurations.
Chapter 2: Basics
Click the Specify

Pressure Loss radio Enter the rated
button to enter the maximum working
expected pressure pressure
loss through the
surface equipment.
Select the category
of surface equipment
Or, you can calculate that you want to use
the surface equipment from the drop down
pressure loss by list. You don’t need
clicking the Calculate to select or specify a
Pressure Loss radio surface equipment
button. configuration if you
specify the pressure
If you want to loss.
calculate the pressure
loss, you must
select/specify the
surface equipment
configuration.
Use the Pumps tab to enter information pertaining to all pumps

available. You may indicate which pump(s) are currently active by
clicking the Active check box.
Check box to specify active pump
Insert a new row by entering data in

the next empty row, or by
highlighting a row and pressing the
Insert key on your keyboard.
Delete a row by highlighting it and

pressing the Delete key on your
keyboard.
Chapter 2: Basics
Enter Pore Pressure Data

Use the Case →Pore Pressure spreadsheet to define the pore pressure
profile as a function of vertical depth. You may enter either pressure or
EMW (ppg) for a vertical depth and the other value will be calculated
based on vertical depth. You may enter several rows of data to define
many pore pressure gradients.
Enter Pore Pressure, and EMW will be calculated, or enter EMW

and Pore Pressure will be calculated
Enter Fracture Gradient Data

Use the Case →Frac Gradient spreadsheet to define the fracture
pressure profile as a function of vertical depth. You may enter either
pressure or EMW (ppg) for a vertical depth and the other value will be
calculated based on vertical depth. You may enter several rows of data
to define many fracture gradients.
Enter Frac Pressure, and EMW will be calculated, or enter EMW

and Frac Pressure will be calculated
Enter Undisturbed Temperature Data

Use the Case →Undisturbed Temperature tabs to define the
undisturbed temperature profile as a function of depth. The Standard tab
Chapter 2: Basics
is used to specify basic formation temperature data. The well

temperature at total depth can be specified, or it can be calculated from
a gradient.
Click here to specify temperature at TD
Click here to specify a gradient to use to

calculate temperature
The Additional tab can be used to add temperatures to characterize a

non-linear formation or seawater profile. These temperatures must be
entered on a true vertical depth basis. Intermediate temperatures are
linearly interpolated between specified points.
Enter temperatures based

on TVD
Chapter 2: Basics
Catalogs
Creating a Catalog
We have used the catalog to design a wellbore and workstring.
However, if a necessary tubular or component is not in the default
catalogs distributed with WELLPLAN you must create a new catalog.
The required component can be added to the new catalog. There are two
ways to create a catalog that you can add components to. You can create
a completely new catalog using File→New Catalog or you can save one
of the default catalogs using a new name. Saving with a new name
creates a new catalog containing all items in the default catalog.
Renaming a default catalog, and then editing that catalog is the most
common method. To rename a catalog, you must first open the catalog
using File→Open Catalog.
Select the catalog type
Select the catalog you

want to open
After the catalog is open, use File→Save As. At this point you can give
the catalog a name, and a short description.
Specify name of
catalog
After the catalog is renamed, all data cells become editable, and you can
add, edit or delete as needed. Don’t forget to save the file again after you
make the necessary changes.
Chapter 2: Basics
To access the new catalog, add a component as you normally would to

the wellbore or the workstring. First select the component type you want
to add. From the dialog that appears, select new catalog from the drop
down list of catalogs.
Select desired
catalog from drop-
down list.
Chapter 2: Basics
Configuring the Workspace
Windows
Each open case occupies one window, and each window belongs to one
case. A window can contain one or more screen layers, which are
selected using the tabs along the bottom edge of the window. Each layer
contains one or more window panes, and each pane can contain different
contents. In addition, each pane may contain scroll bars, which become
active when the contents are too large to fit inside the frame. The frame
governs the amount and location of the screen space taken up by each
window. It is the thin gray border around each pane and around the
window.
Windows always exist in one of three states:
• Maximized: the window takes up all of the available space within

the application frame
• Minimized: an icon within the application frame
• Restored: original size and position
If a window is in its restored state, it will have a Title Bar. The Title Bar
is the thick colored band along the top of the window. The center of the
title bar contains the name of the active spreadsheet, table, plot, or
schematic, and the name of the case to which the window belongs. The
left edge of the title bar contains the Window Control Menu, and the
right edge contains three buttons. The first is the Minimize button, the
second is the Maximize button, and the third is the close button. At any
given time there is one and only one active window, and it belongs to the
active case. A colored title bar denotes the active window; all others are
gray.
Window Panes
Each window contains one or more layers, and each layer can contain
different information. A pane frames information, such as a well
schematic, spreadsheet, table or plot. Light gray dividers denote panes.
By default, each layer contains only one pane, but you can split this into
Chapter 2: Basics
up to four panes using the window splitters located at the ends of the
scroll bars.
To vertically split the screen, the splitter is in the lower left corner of the
windowpane. To horizontally split the screen, the splitter is in the upper
right corner of the windowpane.
Tabs
Each window contains one or more layers (tabs), and each layer can
contain different information. Only one layer is visible at any given
time. To switch between layers, simply select the tab with which it is
associated using the mouse. Tabs are arranged along the lower left edge
of the window, a region that they share with the window’s horizontal
scroll bars. You can control the amount of space allocated to each using
a splitter. As you drag this splitter left and right, the amount of room
available in which to display tabs grows and shrinks. If there is not
enough room to display all of the tabs, you can scroll through them using
the tab scroll buttons.
Note that you can add, delete, rename and re-order tabs using the View
Menu Tabs Option dialog. You can also double click on the tab, and the
Rename Tab dialog will appear.
Tab configuration can be saved using File→Workspace→Save

Template option.
Toolbars
Use View→Toolbars command to enable or disable the Standard,
Module and Graphics toolbars. To enable or disable a toolbar, simply
click on the appropriate check box, which will either add it or remove it
from the screen.
By default, all toolbars are normally displayed directly below the menu
bar. Although the print preview toolbar will not be displayed until you
select File→Print Preview. However, all toolbars are dockable, which
means they can be moved around the screen and adjusted to fit your
needs.
To induct a toolbar, click anywhere on the toolbar’s light grey border

and drag it away from its original position. After you release the mouse
button, the toolbar resides in a palette window which “floats” above the
application frame. After a toolbar has been undecked, it can be moved
Chapter 2: Basics
to another portion of the screen by clicking anywhere in its light gray

border, or title bar and then dragging it. To re-dock an undocked toolbar,
simply drag it to any edge of the application frame. When the toolbar
approaches a valid docking position, its border will suddenly change. At
this point, you can release the mouse button. After you release the
mouse button, the positions of any overlapping toolbars will be adjusted
to accommodate the new toolbar.
Click to turn on the toolbar.
What are Data Status Tooltips and Status Messages

On the View menu, click on this option to toggle the functionality
between active and inactive. If the option is active, a check mark will be
visible beside the option. If this option is active, the last engineering
analysis error (if any) will be displayed as a tooltip when the mouse is
placed over a calculated field in a Quick Look section of a dialog. If the
dialog doesn’t have a Quick Look section, this option does not apply.
When View→Status Messages is active, a message window at the

bottom of the active window indicating any error messages generated
from analysis results.
Chapter 2: Basics
Status messages and

Tool Tips indicate that
Pump Pressure can not
be zero.
Tool Tip
Status Message
Chapter 2: Basics
Viewing Data and Analysis Results
Viewing Well Schematics

The Schematic is a tool to display a graphical image of the active
wellbore and workstring defined using the case menu. On the
Schematic, the workstring components will be defined, and casing shoes
will be indicated. By default the well schematic is displayed when you
open a case.
Riser
Casing
Open hole
section
Viewing Survey Plots

Several different survey plots are available, regardless of the
engineering analysis you are performing. These plots include:
• Vertical section
• Plan view
• Dogleg severity
• Inclination
• Azimuth
• Absolute tortuosity
• Relative tortuosity
• Build-plane curvature
• Walk-plane curvature
Chapter 2: Basics
Printing and Print Preview

Printing or preview printing of output is very similar to other software
you are probably familiar with.
Chapter 2: Basics
Plot Properties
This section describes how to configure, and customize plots. There are
seven property tabs containing many different configuration options.
You may also customize a line or curve on the plot by moving the cursor
over the line, and clicking the right mouse button.
When you click the right mouse button on the plot (but not over a line)
a list of the associated plots, maximize/minimize options, graph/grid
and an option to access plot properties will appear for your selection.
You can access plot properties using Edit→Properties or by clicking

on the plot, and then selecting the properties button on the plot toolbar.
Plot toolbar
Properties button
The properties dialog contains several tabs to categorize the available

options.
Changing Curve Line Properties

To alter the appearance of a curve on the plot, click the right mouse
button when the cursor is on the curve line. Using the menu that appears,
you can hide the line, freeze the line, or change the appearance of the
line. When you hide a line, it disappears from the plot. Freeze line is a
Chapter 2: Basics
useful feature for sensitivity analysis. When you freeze the line, and then
alter some of the analysis data that the plot is based on, the frozen line
will be displayed along with the analysis data.
Use line
properties to
change the color,
line width and
style.
Changing the Scale

This Scale tab is used to define axis limits.
Click this option button to allow the axis range

to be calculated based on the limits of the data
being displayed. This is the default.
Click this option button to specify a fixed

number of units per inch (or cm) on the printed
page for the X and Y axis.
Click this option button to specify range limits.
Mark this check box to choose the largest of the

two specified (X and Y) scales, and use this
scale for both axis.
Chapter 2: Basics
Configuring the Axis

Use the Axis tab to define how and where the axis will be displayed.
Click this option button to keep the axis lines at

the edges of the graph.
Changing the Grid

Use the General/Grid Tab to define the grid, tick marks, and graph
border.
Mark this check box to display a grid on the

plot.
Specify the number of minor tick marks.
Specify the spacing of the major tick marks

when printing the plot.
Mark this check box to include a thin black line

around the outside of the plot area.
Chapter 2: Basics
Changing the Axis Labels

Use to specify axis labels (text).
Type in a label for the X axis and Y axis in their

respective fields.
Changing the Font

Use the Font tab to specify fonts for axis labels, and tick labels.
Click on Axis Label button to specify axis label

font.
Click on Tick Label button to specify tick font.
Click on Data Labels button to specify data

label font.
Chapter 2: Basics
Changing the Line Styles

Use the Line Styles tab to specify color, style and width of lines used for
the axis and the grid.
You can specify a set Click on ... to display

of lines for displaying available colors
on the screen and
another set for printing.
For best results, use
Using Data Markers

Use the Markers tab to specify the use, size and frequency of data point
markers.
Mark this check box to turn on data markers or

symbols. The default setting is unchecked (no
data symbols).
Click this option button to specify the frequency

of the data markers. You must specify a
numeric value to indicate the frequency to
place data markers.
Mark this check box to assure the last point on

the curve always has a marker even if the
frequency specified means the point would not
have a marker.
Chapter 2: Basics
Configuring the Legend

Use the Legend tab to specify whether a legend should be displayed, and
to customize legends, including title, font, and location.
Mark this check box to display a legend.
Specify the number of columns the legend box

should use. This is only relevant if several
curves are represented in the legend.
Use this text box to specify the title displayed in

the legend.
Click this command button to customize the

font used for the legend.
Mark this check box to specify that all lines

should be shown.
Chapter 2: Basics
DEX and File Importing and Exporting
Use File→Data Exchange to access the Data Exchange (DEX) menu.

DEX is a way to transfer data between several Landmark products.
Several Landmark products are built with the DEX Toolkit (Import,
Export, and Browse), such as WELLPLAN, StressCheck, CasingSeat,
DrillModel, DFW, COMPASS, and WellCat.
Use the DEX Import command (File/Data Exchange/Import) to load

pertinent data into your active software product. Once loaded, the data
is merged into the software product’s data set. You can then change the
data, analyze the data and save it.
Using File→Import→Transfer File and File→Export→Transfer

File you can transfer data between WELLPLAN 1998.7, 1998.2, and
1998.5 installations. This is different than the DEX transfer. This
method deals strictly with transferring data between WELLPLAN
versions specified. When you export data, you can export the data for a
project, well or a case only.
Using File→Import→WELLPLAN 5.3 you can import data from a

WELLPLAN 5.3 version of the software. However, you can not import
WELLPLAN 6, or WELLPLAN 1998.7 data into a WELLPLAN 5.3
installation.
Chapter 3
Torque Drag Analysis
Torque Drag Analysis can be used to predict and analyze the torque and axial forces generated by
drill strings, casing strings, or liners while running in, pulling out, backreaming and/or rotating in
a three-dimensional wellbore. The effects of mud properties, wellbore deviation, WOB and other
operational parameters can be studied.
Overview
In this section of the course, you will become familiar with all aspects
of using the Torque Drag Analysis module. You will also become
familiar with the data presented on reports, and plots. To reinforce what
you learn in class, you will complete several exercises designed to
prepare you for using the program outside of class. The information
presented in this chapter can be used as a study guide during the course,
and can also be used as a reference for future torque and drag analysis.
At the end of this chapter you will find the methodology used for each
analysis mode. The methodology is useful for understanding data
requirements, analysis results, as well as the theory used as the basis for
the analysis. Supporting calculations and references for additional
reading are also included in this chapter.
Chapter 3: Torque Drag Analysis
Torque Drag Analysis: An Introduction
The Torque Drag Analysis module can be used to predict the measured
weights and torques to expect while tripping in, tripping out, rotating on
bottom, rotating off bottom, slide drilling, and backreaming. This
information can be used to determine if the well can be drilled, or to
evaluate hole conditions while drilling a well. The module can be used
for analyzing drillstrings, casing strings, and liners.
The Torque Drag Analysis module includes both soft string and stiff
string models. The soft string model is based on Dawson’s cable model.
In this model, the work string is treated as an extendible cable with zero
bending stiffness. Friction is assumed to act in the direction opposing
motion. The forces required to buckle the string are determined, and if
buckling occurs, the mode of buckling (sinusoidal, transitional, helical,
or lockup) is indicated. The stiff string model includes the increased side
forces from stiff tubulars in curved hole, as well as the reduced side
forces from pipe wall clearance.
Starting Torque Drag Analysis

There are two ways to begin the Torque Drag module:
l Select Torque Drag from the Modules menu, and then select the
appropriate analysis mode.
l Click the Torque Drag button and then select the appropriate
analysis mode from the drop-down list.
The contents of the Case and Parameter menu varies depending on the
analysis mode you select.
Choose Torque Drag Analysis from Module menu, or by clicking the
Chapter
Torque Drag 3: Torque
Module Drag Analysis
button.
Select desired Torque Drag Analysis mode

from submenu, or from Mode drop-down list.
Available Analysis Modes

The Torque Drag Module has four available analysis modes. Each
analysis mode will be covered in this course.
• Normal Analysis: Calculate the forces, torques, and stresses

acting on the work string while the bit is at a particular depth in
the wellbore for a number of common drilling load conditions.
This analysis calculates surface loads based on bit forces you
input.
• Calibrate Friction: Calculate the coefficient of friction for

cased and open hole sections using actual load data acquired
while drilling. The calculated coefficient of friction can be used
in another torque and drag analysis.
• Drag Chart: Graph the surface torque and measured weight

from drilling operations while the bit traverses a range of depths
in the wellbore.
• Top-Down Analysis: Calculate string forces from loads and

torque applied at the surface or at the bottom of the work string.
You can also specify if the string is rotating, and reciprocating
during tripping operations. (When loads are applied at the
bottom of the work string, this analysis is very similar to the
Normal Analysis but there is more flexibility over movement
and end conditions.) If the surface loads are input, the bit forces
are calculated and vice versa.
Using Normal Analysis
Purpose and Use

Normal Analysis calculates the torque, drag, normal force, axial force,
buckling force, neutral point, stress and other parameters for a work
string in a three-dimensional wellbore. With a Normal Analysis, all
calculations are performed with the bit at one position in the wellbore,
and with one set of operational parameters. You may choose to perform
the analysis using either the soft or stiff string model. However, for now
use the soft string model.
Normal Analysis mode calculates the forces acting along the string and
at the surface for several operating conditions, including:
l Tripping in (with and without rotating)
l Tripping out (with and without rotating)
l Rotating on bottom
l Rotating off bottom
l Backreaming
l Sliding drilling
Based on the API material specifications of pipe class, material, and

grade, the following special load cases are also calculated.
l Maximum weight on bit to avoid sinusoidal buckling
l Maximum weight on bit to avoid helical buckling
l Maximum overpull to not exceed yield with the utilization factor

while tripping out of hole
Entering Case Data

All Torque Drag analysis modes use the information input on the Case
menu. Depending on the analysis mode selected, additional information
may be required to be input using the Case menu. For Normal Analysis,
additional input on the case menu is required using the Torque Drag
Setup dialog.
For discussion on the Case menu items that are common to all
WELLPLAN modules, please refer to the Basics chapter (2) of this
manual. The common Case menu options include the General, Offshore,
Wellbore Editor, String Editor, Fluid Editor, and Deviation menu.
Case Menu
options for Normal
Analysis mode
Selecting Analysis Models and Options

The Case→Torque Drag Setup dialog is used to configure the analysis
specifications for a torque drag analysis. This dialog is used to specify
the use of either the soft or stiff string model in the analysis. Use this
dialog to indicate inclusion of sheave friction and other calculation
options.
The Mechanical Limitations calculations are a convenient means to

determine the weight on bit to initiate buckling, or the maximum
overpull allowable using a specified percentage of yield.
Check box to include sheave friction in

all measured weight calculations. If you
want to enable this model, you must also
specify the Lines Strung and the
Mechanical Efficiency values.
Check box to use Bending Stress Magnification

corrections.
The Stiff String model computes the additional side force

from stiff tubulars bending in a curved hole as well as the
reduced side forces from pipe straightening due to
pipe/hole clearance.
Check box to select the viscous fluid torque and drag
model. The viscous fluid effects cause differing torque
and drag on the string depending on the pipe rotation and
trip speeds. The magnitude depends strongly on the fluid
rheology model chosen in the fluid editor.
Specify the length that you want the contact forces

reported.
Check boxes for limitations you are

interested in.
Why Use Bending Stress Magnification Factor?

In both tensile and compressive axial load cases, the average curvature
between the tool joints is not changed, but the local changes of curvature
due to straightening effects of tension or the buckling effects of
compression may be many times the average value. Therefore to
accurately calculate the bending stress in the pipe body requires the
determination of these local maximum curvatures.
The quantity bending stress magnification factor (BSMF) is defined as

the ratio of the maximum of the absolute value of the curvature in the
pipe body divided by the curvature of the hole axis. This factor can be
applied as a multiplier on the bending stress calculations to more
accurately calculate the bending stress in a work string that has tool
joints with outside diameters (OD) greater than the pipe body. This
modified bending stress is then used in the calculation of the von Mises
stress of the pipe. BSMF is useful because when a drill string with tool
joint OD greater than the body OD is subjected to either a tensile or
compressive axial load, the maximum curvature of the drillpipe will
exceed that of the hole axis curvature. The drillpipe sections conform to
the wellbore curvature primarily through contact at the tool joints.
BSMF is applied to the calculated bending stresses when you mark the
Use Bending Stress Magnification check box on the Case→Torque
Drag Setup dialog.
Defining Operating Conditions

Use the Mode Data dialog to specify many of the analysis constraints
required to perform a Normal Analysis. You may specify which
operating mode you want to analyze by checking the appropriate box.
The operating modes available include tripping in, tripping out, rotating
on bottom, rotating off bottom, sliding, and backreaming. Depending on
the operating modes selected, you will be required to specify operating
parameters related to that operating mode. The operating parameters
may include WOB or Overpull, torque at bit, tripping speed, or
rotational speed while tripping.
Specify the operating mode you want to analyze by

checking the appropriate box or boxes.
Trip speed is not used unless a non-zero RPM is

entered.
Specify the coefficient of friction you want to use.
Defining Multiple Fluids

The Fluid Columns tabs are used to define the density of the fluids in the
annulus and the string. Data entered on these tabs overrides data entered
on the Case→Fluid Editor. You can also define a surface pressure to
apply to the annulus. If you are not applying pressure at the surface, and
you are using one fluid in the string and annulus, enter the fluid
information on the Fluid Editor.
Use the Fluid Columns tabs if:
l There is more than one fluid in the annulus
l There is surface pressure applied to the annulus
l The fluid density in the annulus and string are different
Tabs for entry of fluid

columns in string and
annulus.
Define a surface pressure to be applied

to the annulus.
Define a flow rate. This flow rate will be
applied to all analysis modes.
How does Fluid Flow Change the Forces and Stresses on the Workstring?
Fluid flow changes the forces and stresses on the work string in three
ways.
l The calculated Pump Off Force is an additional compressive force

at the end of the string caused by the acceleration of fluid through
the bit jets. The calculations for bit impact force are used to
determine this force.
l Forces and stresses in the drill string are caused by the differential
pressure between the pipe and annulus fluid pressures as a result of
motor pressure losses.
l Fluid and shear forces act on the work string as a result of shear
stresses caused by the frictional flow in the pipe and annulus.
Using Friction Reduction Devices

Use the Friction Reduction Devices dialog to describe friction reduction
devices. You must check the box indicating the use of friction reduction
devices, even if you have device(s) entered into the table. You can
model both rotating and non-rotating devices. The model assumes that
accurate placement of the devices has been determined so that the
drillstring does not contact the wellbore in the interval where the friction
reduction devices are used.
Wellbore to string friction in sections where friction reduction devices

are used is relative. For example, assume the wellbore friction (input
using Case→Wellbore Editor) is 0.2. If the friction reduction device
friction is 0.5, then the friction factor used in the calculations would be
0.2 X 0.5 = 0.1. This approach allows for accurate friction
determination when using drag charts and moving the string between
cased and open hole sections with different wellbore friction factors.
Enter data regarding friction reduction device placement and operating

parameters in the table. Each row of the table refers to a single type of
friction reduction device placed on consecutive sections of pipe. If more
than one type of device is used, define each type on a separate row in the
table.
Use Frequency columns to specify

the number of devices per joint.
(A unit is a joint.)
Check box if you want to use

friction reduction devices.
Each row of the table refers to

a single type of friction
reduction device placed on
consecutive sections of pipe.
If more than one type of device
is used, define each type on a
separate row in the table.
The unit weight is added to
the string weight for analysis
purposes.
Analyzing Results
Results for a Normal Analysis are presented in tables, plots, and reports.
All results are available using the View Menu. In many cases, the same
analysis results are presented in more than one form. For example, string
tension data can be found in reports, plots, and tables. In general, the
plots or tables present the data in a clearer, more concise format than the
reports do. Depending on the number of operating modes selected, the
reports can get very long and difficult to read unless you print them.
Because of time restraints, this course does not discuss every available
report, table and plot. If you have specific questions about a plot, table
or report, refer to the online help for more detail.
View Menu contents

for Normal Analysis
Plots
There are several plots containing analysis results for a normal analysis.
These include:
• Effective tension
• True tension
• Torque
• Side Force
• Fatigue Graph
• Stress
• Position (only available if using stiff string model)
Effective and True Tension Plot
Effective tension plot True tension plot
Effective Tension Plot

The Effective Tension plot displays the tension in all sections of the
work string for the operating modes specified on the Normal Analysis
Mode Data dialog as calculated using the buoyancy method. The graph
includes data for measured depths from the surface to the string depth
specified on the String Editor. The effective tension can be used to
determine when buckling may occur. On the plot are curves indicating
the loads required to buckle (helical or sinusoidal) the work string.
When the effective tension load line for a particular operation mode
crosses a buckling load line, the string will begin to buckle in the
buckling mode corresponding to the buckling load line.
The plot also indicates the tension limit for the work string component
at the corresponding measured depth. If the effective tension curve for a
particular operating mode exceeds the tension limit curve, the work
string is in danger of parting at that point.
True Tension Plot

The True Tension plot displays the tension in all sections of the work
string for the operating modes specified on the Normal Analysis Mode
Data Dialog as calculated using the pressure area method. The graph
includes data for measured depths from the surface to the string depth
specified on the String Editor. This data should only be used for stress
analysis. If you want to determine when a worksting will fail due to
tension, refer to the Effective Tension Graph.
Torque Graph
Component with zero torque limit should be edited using the String Editor to represent
the actual component torque limit.
Fatigue Plot
The View→Fatigue plot presents the bending or buckling stress as a
ratio of the fatigue limit.
High level of
bending or
buckling
stresses
Tables
Tables are a very useful form of viewing analysis results. Tabular results
are organized in a way that makes it easy to quickly find the information
you are looking for.
Summary Loads Table

The View→Table→Summary Loads table contains information
pertaining to all sections of the work string. The Summary Loads table
is a good place to begin your analysis. This table contains a load
summary for the operating modes specified on the Normal Analysis
Mode Data dialog. For similar information, view the Summary Report.
For each operating mode, the following information is provided: stress
mode indicator, buckling mode indicator, torque at rotary table, windup,
surface measured weight, total stretch, and neutral point.
Stress Column. An S indicates Buckling Column. An H

VonMises stress failure, a T indicates indicate helical buckling and an
exceeding make-up torque and an F S indicates sinusoidal
indicate fatigue. buckling.
What are the Loads For a Particular Operating Mode?

Use View→Table→Load Data and select a particular operating mode
for information for an individual operating mode. For similar
information, view the Detail Report. Information presented on the table
includes measured depth, component type, distance from bit, internal
pressure, external pressure, axial force (pressure area and buoyancy
method), drag, torque, twist, stretch, sinusoidal buckling force, helical
buckling force, buckling mode flag, and stress mode flag.
What are the Stresses For a Particular Operating Mode?

Use View→Table→Stress Data and select a particular operating mode
for information for an individual operating mode.This table contains
information pertaining to all sections of the work string. Data for each
operating mode is specified on a separate table. This table contains
information similar to the Stress Graph, including measured depth,
component type, distance from bit, hoop stress, radial stress, torsional
stress, shear stress, axial stress, buckling stress, bending stress, BSMF,
von Mises stress, von Mises stress ratio, and fatigue ratio.
Reports
Reports are another form of presenting normal analysis results.
However, if you will be analyzing more than one operating mode, using
plots or tables is an easier way to view the results.
Report Options
The Report Options dialog is used to specify what additional
information will be included on the report. Using this dialog, you can
specify to include or exclude much of the information defining the case
you are analyzing.
Check boxes pertaining to the

information you want to include
Detailed Report
Most of the information presented on the Detailed report is available on
tables, or in graphical form on plots. However, the Detailed Report also
includes the operating parameters and case data (as specified on the
report options dialog) used in the analysis. Plots and tables do not
include this information.
When you are generating a report for an analysis of several operating

modes, the information for each operating mode is separate from all
other operating modes. For example, all tripping in analysis is kept

separate from the tripping out analysis. Because there is a lot of data
presented on the Detailed Report, it is recommended that reports be
limited to analysis of one or two operating modes at a time. Otherwise
the reports can get very long and difficult to read.
Calibrating Coefficients of Friction from Field Data
Purpose and Use

You can calculate the coefficient of friction along the wellbore from
actual data collected while drilling. This provides a means of calibrating
the model against actual field results. In order to use this analysis mode,
you must collect a series of weights and torques at the wellsite. Some of
this data is obtained with the string inside the casing shoe, and other
information is obtained in the open hole section. When gathering actual
field data, it is best if friction reduction devices are not being used. Over
the sections where the devices are used, the effects of the friction
devices must included in the calibrated friction factors.
You must calculate the coefficient of friction in the casing section first,
then the open hole. This is required because data recorded in the open
hole section includes the combined effects of friction between the string
and the casing as well as the friction between the string and the open
hole. Therefore, the coefficient of friction for the cased hole must be
determined before that of the open hole.
The reliability of the data collected is important. Spurious values for

any weight may prevent calculating a solution, or may result in an
inaccurate solution. It is important that the drillstring is completely
inside the casing shoe when you are recording weights for calculating
the coefficient of friction inside the casing. It is also important that the
string is not reciprocated while recording rotating weights, and vice
versa. You may not want to rely on one set of data, but make a decision
based on a number of weight readings taken at different depths inside
the casing and in the open hole section.
It is important to realize that hole conditions may also effect the

coefficient of friction calculated. If the actual weights recorded include
the effects of a build up of cuttings, the BHA hanging up downhole, or
other hole conditions. Because the recorded weights include these
effects, the calculated coefficient of friction will also.
Starting the Calibrate Friction Analysis Mode
Select Calibrate Friction

from Mode drop-down
list.
Entering Actual Loads

Use the Actual Loads dialog to record actual load data encountered at
certain depths. This information can be used to calculate coefficients of
friction using the Calibrate Friction analysis or it can be displayed in the
Drag Chart analysis graphs to compare actual values with calculated
values.
The actual load data consists of rows or information with one row per
measured depth. You can record data for any measured depth. It may be
useful to record this information just inside the casing shoe, or at total
depth just prior to setting casing. It is not necessary to specify all values
for each row. However, the measured depth must always be specified,
and must always increase. The trip in, trip out measured weights, and
rotating off bottom torque values are required to calibrate the coefficient
of friction. Other values are input for plotting actual load data on
applicable plots.
Required input for calibrating coefficient of friction
Calibrating Coefficients of Friction

Use the Calibration Data dialog to specify parameters required to
calibrate the coefficients of friction.
You may calculate the coefficient of friction by two methods:
l Be sure the use actual load check box is not checked, and enter a bit
MD. You must also enter at least one of the following: tripping out
measured weight, tripping in measured weight, or rotating off
bottom torque. The calculated coefficient of friction is based on the
selected measured weights and/or torque values you entered for the
specified bit MD.
l Be sure the Use Actual Load check box is marked, and select an
actual load. You can select, deselect, or alter any of the measured
weight or torque values recorded for this actual load. The calculated
coefficient of friction is based on the selected measured weights
and/or torque values.
The average coefficient of friction is calculated for

the cased, open hole, or combined hole section
selected.
When selecting from actual loads (entered on
actual loads editor), be sure box is checked.
View the calculated average coefficient of friction

used in analysis.
Using Drag Charts
Purpose and Use

You can use Drag Chart Analysis to predict the measured weights and
torques that will be experienced while operating the work string at a
range of depths in the wellbore. The calculations performed for this
analysis are similar to those used in the Normal Analysis except the
calculations are performed over a range of depths. (A Normal Analysis
calculates results for a single bit depth.) As in the Normal Analysis, you
may select the operational modes by checking appropriate boxes on the
Run Parameters dialog.
You can use coefficients of friction that you calculated using Calibrate
Friction, the coefficients specified on the Wellbore Editor, or those
entered on the Run Parameters dialog.
Start Drag Chart Analysis
Select Drag Chart

from drop-down list.
Defining Operating Conditions and Analysis Interval

The Run Parameters dialog is used to specify the analysis parameters for
a Drag Chart Analysis. On this dialog you indicate the depth interval that
you want to analyze. You also select the operational modes you want to
analyze, and the forces acting at the bottom of the work string for each
of the operational modes. You must also indicate the coefficient of
friction that you want to use.
Typically the depth range chosen would correspond to the expected run
of a given string, or to a complete hole section if the drill string
configuration was to remain unchanged throughout the hole section.
Keep in mind that the drag chart analysis assumes that only one string,
and only one set of operating parameters (fluid, WOB, and so forth) are
used through the entire analysis depth range.
Be sure to enter interval to

analyze.
Use torque point distance to
bit to specify where you want
to calculate torque
magnitude.
Displaying Actual Loads

Actual loads entered on the Actual Loads dialog can be displayed in the
Drag Chart analysis graphs to compare actual values with calculated
values.
Analyzing Results
There are not any reports available for a drag chart analysis. All output
is in graphical form.
Measured Weight Chart

The Measured Weight chart shows measured weights for all operating
modes selected on the Run Parameters dialog. This analysis covers only
the measured depth interval specified on the run parameters dialog.
For the measured weight analysis, a drag chart indicates the tensile and
compressive yield limits for each of the string depths analyzed. In the
tension analysis, you are able to determine how much overpull you can
place on the string before the string will fail. Similarly, for the
compression analysis, you can determine how much compressive force
can be applied to the string before the string will yield as a result of
buckling. From the graph, you can tell the load that will fail the work
string, but you will not be able to determine where the failure occurred.
Buckling occurs
in sliding and
rotating on
bottom operating
modes at the
corresponding
bit depths.
Minimum measured weight to avoid buckling
Torque Point Chart

The Torque Point chart displays the maximum torque found at the
surface, or at a user specified point in the work string for all rotary
operating modes selected on the Run Parameters dialog. The Torque
Point chart covers only the measured depth interval specified on the Run
Parameters dialog. For reference, the makeup torque limit is displayed
on the graph. The torque limit is derated for tension.
Makeup torque as input on Workstring Editor for each component.
Using Top Down Analysis
Purpose and Use

Top Down Analysis allows the specification of string forces at the
surface or bottom hole. You can use this analysis mode to determine
downhole forces acting on the work string when you know the surface
forces, or you can use this analysis to determine the surface forces when
the bit forces are know. Normal analysis also calculates the forces at the
surface based on known forces acting at the bit.
You may want to use this analysis mode to analyze coiled tubing
operations. In the case of coiled tubing, you are driving tubing into the
hole with known injector forces at the surface. This analysis mode
provides a means of determining the tension or compression forces
acting on the tubing downhole. You can specify a tension (positive) or
compressive (negative) injector force at the surface.
You can also use the Top Down Analysis mode to analyze stuck pipe
situations. When a pipe is stuck downhole, you know the forces at the
surface, but the downhole loads must be estimated. You may want to
know the required surface forces to achieve a specific force to trip a jar.
Or you may want to apply a tension or torque at the surface, and from
the resulting pipe stretch or twist, you can calculate the stuck point.
Selecting Top Down Analysis
Select Top Down Analysis

from mode drop-down list.
Defining Operating Conditions

The Mode Data dialog is used to specify the operating parameters for the
Top Down analysis. You may specify whether the forces are acting at
the top (top down) or at the bottom (bottom up) of the work string. Enter
the magnitude of the load and the torque acting on the string. Indicate
axial or rotational string movement on the dialog. If you specify speed,

you don’t have to specify RPM and vice versa.
Weight on bit input is assumed to be

compressive, so do not enter a negative
number.
Specify the friction factor you want to use.
Analyzing Results
There are several plots, tables, and one report available for reviewing
results. Many of the available output are similar to the output for the
normal analysis.
Tables
The two tables available for the top down analysis are the load data table
and the stress data table.
Load Data Table

The Load Data table contains information pertaining to all sections of
the work string for the load conditions specified on the top down
analysis mode data dialog. The table includes data for measured depths
from the surface to the string depth specified on the string editor. For
similar information, view the detail report or the stress graph. The data
presented on the table includes measured depth, component type,
distance from bit, internal pressure, external pressure, axial force –
pressure area method, axial force – buoyancy method, drag, torque,
twist, stretch, sinusoidal buckling force, helical buckling force, buckling

mode flag, and the stress mode flag.
Stress Data Table

The Stress Data table contains information pertaining to all sections of
the work string for the load conditions specified on the top down
analysis mode data dialog. The graph includes data for measured depths
from the surface to the string depth specified on the string editor. This is
a table form output of the data presented graphically on the Single Stress
graph, or on the Detailed Report. The table includes the following
information: measured depth, component type, distance from bit, hoop
stress, radial stress, torsional stress, shear stress, axial stress, buckling
stress, bending stress, BSMF, Von Mises stress, Von Mises stress ratio,
and fatigue ratio.
Reports
Report Options
The same report options that are available for other torque drag analysis
modes are also available with the Top Down Analysis. The report
options control the content of the report to some degree. Several sections
of the report can be eliminated or included based on selections made
using the report options. If you are concerned about report length, using
the Report Options dialog is a means to shorten the report.
Detail Report
The Detail Report displays well information, operating parameters,
loads and forces acting on the string, as well as additional information,
but only for the operating load specified on the Top Down Analysis
Mode Data dialog. For the specified operating load, the Detail report
displays: torque at the rotary table, total string windup with and without
bit torque, measured weight, total stretch of the string, the distance from
the bit and from the surface to the neutral point, the distance from the bit
and from the surface to the point where the axial stress is zero, buckling
mode indicators, stress limit indicators, internal work string pressure,
external work string pressure, and contact force.
Much of this information is displayed in the various graphs or in the

Load Data table.
Plots
There are several plots available for a Top Down analysis. The
following is a window containing the Stress Plot in one pane and the
Position Plot in the other pane. The stress plot indicates the stresses in
all sections of the work string based on the load information specified
on the Top Down analysis mode data dialog. The graph includes data for
measured depths from the surface to the string depth specified on the
string editor. For similar information, view the Stress Data Table or the
Detail Report. Stresses included on the graph include hoop, radial,
torsion, shear, axial, buckling, bending, Von Mises stress, and the stress
limit.
All stresses are calculated, except for the stress limit which is the pipe
yield stress specified on the string editor.
The Position Plot indicates the position of the work string in the
wellbore for the operating loads specified on the Top Down Analysis
Mode Data dialog. The graph includes data for measured depths from
the surface to the string depth specified on the string editor. Use this
graph to determine where the pipe lies in the wellbore. The Position Plot
is really only useful when using the stiff string model. Since the soft
string model assumes the string is lying along the center of the wellbore,
the Position Plot offers no usable information for soft string analysis.
Stress limit is input on the Position of string in center of

String Editor. wellbore
Using Stiff String Analysis
Purpose
WELLPLAN Torque Drag analysis contains two calculation models. As
discussed earlier, the soft string model assumes the string lies along the
center of the wellbore. The soft string model is based on Dawson’s soft
string model. The stiff string model uses a finite element analysis
approach to determine the downhole forces acting on the string. The stiff
string model is more computation intensive, and will take more time to
calculate the results than the soft string model does. Depending on the
speed of your computer, the calculation time difference may be
significant.
The stiff string model accounts for the following: tubular stiffness in
bending, tubular joint to hole wall clearance, stiffness modified for
compressive force, single point weight concentrations. The stiff string
analysis impacts the analysis torque drag results for side force, torque,
drag, bending stress, and string position in the wellbore.
When to Use the Stiff String Model

In general, stiff string analysis should be used in the following
situations:
• To evaluate stiff tubulars run in a well with a build rate of

15 deg/100ft or more
• To analyze running stiff casing in a well
• To observe buckling using the Position Plot
• To analyze a work string containing upsets found on stabilizers or
friction reduction devices
Activating Stiff String Model

The Stiff String Analysis is activated by checking the Stiff String box on
the Torque Drag Setup Data dialog.
Check box to use stiff

string analysis.
Analyzing Results
Plots
High position indicates the pipe position relative to the highside or low
side (-ve) of the hole (that is, when toolface is 0-180 degrees). Normally
in a straight inclined hole, with pipe in tension, the pipe will be on the
low side of the hole due to gravity. At the kick off point of a build the
pipe will be on the high side of the hole due to tension. Helically buckled
pipe will zig-zag between high side and low side.
Right position indicates the pipe position relative to the left (-ve) or right
(+ve) of the hole (i.e. toolface 90-270). Normally in a straight inclined
hole the pipe lies in the middle. Only when there is azimuth turn or
sinusoidal buckling does the pipe move left or right of the center. In
sinusoidal buckling the pipe snakes left and right of the center but does
not reach the clearance limit. The clearance limit is only reached in
helical buckling.
Clearance limit = 0.5 " (Hole Inside diameter - Pipe Tool Joint
Diameter). This is the maximum radial movement of the pipe in any
direction. None of the position lines should exceed this red line. The
pipe body diameter is not considered because it rarely influences
movement. Only in 3 1/2" pipe or smaller does the pipe body touch the
hole wall due to both weight and buckling.

String is not in the center of the wellbore

using stiff string analysis.
Separate curve
for each stress
type
Clearance limit based on Wellbore

Editor information.

Analysis Mode Methodology
Each of the next four sections covers one of the analysis modes available
in the Torque Drag module. In each section, the major analysis steps for
the analysis mode are discussed. Within the analysis steps there may be
a reference to a calculation. The name of the calculations are presented
in italic for recognition. Many calculations apply to more than one
analysis mode. To avoid duplicating information, the calculations are
presented alphabetically in the section titled Supporting Information
and Calculations. If you require more information about a particular
calculation, please refer to “Supporting Information and Calculations”
on page 110.
Normal Analysis
In a Normal Analysis the calculations are performed for a work string,
in a three-dimensional wellbore, at one bit depth, and with one set of
operational parameters. If any of these items change (different bit depth,
different work string, different mud weight, and so forth) then the
Normal Analysis must be re-run.
A Normal Analysis can investigate six load cases or operating

conditions. These six load cases consist of tripping out, tripping in,
rotating on bottom, rotating off bottom, sliding, and backreaming.
During the analysis the following steps are performed.
1. The first step is to initialize all load cases with the loads at the bit,
including torques and axial force. These parameters are input on the
Normal Analysis Mode Data dialog. For a Normal Analysis, the
loads at the bit must be input, so the surface loads can be calculated.
2. For both soft and stiff string models, the work string is broken into
segments (elements) with a length equal to either a minimum of 30
feet or to the component length. This defines the segment to be
analyzed. After the analysis of a segment is complete, the segment
above is analyzed. This procedure is repeated until the entire string
has been analyzed.
For each segment, the following steps are performed:

a) Interpolate the survey data at start and end of segment using the
surveys entered in the Survey Editor (on the Case menu).
Calculate the build rate, turn rate and dogleg severity. The

minimum curvature method is used for all survey calculations. If

the surveys had tortuosity applied, the “tortured” surveys are
used.
b) Determine the wellbore at this depth, and modify the tubular

wall thickness based on the Pipe Wall Thickness Modification
Due to Pipe Class calculations (page 126).
c) Compute the weight per foot of the segment in fluid and at the
wellbore angle using the Buoyed Weight calculations (page 114).
Because the work string is lying in a wellbore surrounded by
fluids, there are resultant hydrostatic pressures acting on all
interior and exterior surfaces of the pipe. The Buoyed Weight
calculations determine the resultant weight of the segment
considering the hydrostatic pressures acting on it.
d) Determine the force required to buckle the segment in the

wellbore using the Critical Buckling Force calculations
(page 116). The critical buckling force is the axial force required
to be exerted on a work string to initiate buckling. Buckling first
occurs when compressive axial forces exceed a critical buckling
force. The axial force computed using the Buoyancy Method
(Axial Force calculations, page 111) is used to compare with the
critical buckling force to determine the onset of buckling. This is
because the critical buckling force calculations are based on the
same assumptions regarding hydrostatic pressure.
e) Calculate the normal (side) force using the Side Force

calculations for the Soft String Model (page 128), or for the Stiff
String Model (page 130). The side force or normal force is a
measurement of the force exerted by the wellbore onto the work
string.
f) Calculate the drag acting on the segment using the Drag Force
calculations (page 119). The magnitude of the drag force is
influenced by the selection of Friction Factor.
g) Determine the axial forces acting on the segment using the Axial
Force calculations (page 111). Axial forces act along the axis of
the work string.
h) If buckling occurs, determine the additional side force due to

buckling by using the Additional Side Force calculations
(page 110).

i) Calculate string torque using the Torque calculations (page 137).

Any input bit torque will be added to calculated torque.
j) Determine stresses using the Stress calculations (page 132).
k) Perform Fatigue calculations (page 121).
l) Perform Twist calculations (page 139) and Stretch calculations

(page 135).
3. Apply Sheave Friction Correction calculations (page 127) to

tension at the surface. This correction is only made if specified on
the Torque Drag Setup dialog.
4. Compute pick up and slack off for tripping load cases.
5. Calculate maximum weight on bit to buckle (sinusoidal and helical)

the work string, and maximum allowable overpull.
Calibrate Friction Analysis

Calibrate Friction Analysis calculates the coefficient of friction along
the wellbore using actual (field) data collected while drilling. This
provides a means of calibrating the program model against actual field
results. The following are an overview of the calculations performed.
1. The work string is broken into the minimum of 30 feet, or the

component length. This is the segment to be analyzed. After the
analysis of a segment is complete, the segment above it will be
analyzed. This procedure is repeated until the entire string has been
analyzed.
a) Interpolate survey at start and end of segment. Calculate build

rate, turn rates and dogleg severity. The minimum curvature
method is used for all survey calculations. If the surveys had
Tortuosity (page 137) applied, the “tortured” surveys are used.
b) Determine the wellbore at this depth, and apply Pipe Wall

Thickness Modification Due to Pipe Class calculations
(page 126).


d) Estimate the coefficient of friction for either the cased hole, or

the open hole, or both. For each of the load cases, the following
steps (1 through 5) are performed until the calculated torque and
hookloads match the input or field values. If the values don’t
match, another coefficient of friction is estimated, and the
following steps are performed again.
1. Calculate the normal (side) force using the Side

Forcepage 128 calculations for the soft string model or for
the stiff string model. The side force or normal force is a
measurement of the force exerted by the wellbore onto the
work string.
2. Calculate the drag acting on the segment using the Drag

Force calculations (page 119). The magnitude of the drag
force is influenced by the selection of the Friction Factor.
3. Determine the axial forces acting on the segment using the

Axial Force calculations (page 111). Axial forces act along
the axis of the work string.
4. Calculate string torque using the Torque calculations

(page 137).
5. Apply Sheave Friction Correction calculations (page 127)

to tension at the surface. This correction is only made if
specified on the Torque Drag Setup dialog.
Drag Chart Analysis

Drag Chart Analysis performs essentially the same analysis steps as
performed in the Normal Analysis. However, in a Drag Chart analysis,
you can specify a range of bit depths. (A Normal Analysis is performed
at a single bit depth.) For each bit depth in the Drag Chart Analysis, the
largest torque or measured weight occurring anywhere in the work
string is recorded. This information is then available in graphical output.
The following is a brief overview of the calculations.

1. Begin with the first bit depth. The first step is to initialize all load
cases with the loads at the bit, including torques and axial force.
These parameters are input on the Run Parameters Data dialog.
2. Next, the work string is broken into the minimum of 30 feet, or the
component length. This is the segment that will be analyzed. After
the analysis of a segment is complete, the segment above it will be
analyzed.
a) Interpolate survey at start and end of segment. Calculate build,

turn rates, and dogleg severity. The minimum curvature method
is used for all survey calculations. If the surveys had tortuosity
applied, the “tortured” surveys are used.

(page 126).

force. The axial force computed using the Buoyancy Method is
used to compare with the critical buckling force to determine the
onset of buckling. This is because the Critical Buckling Force
calculations are based on the same assumptions regarding
hydrostatic pressure.

string.

governed by the selection of Friction Factor (page 125).
the work string.

(page 110).

4. Determine the measured weight at the surface, and the maximum

torque at any point in the work string with the bit at the specified
depth. Repeat the calculations with the next bit depth.
Top Down Analysis

Top Down Analysis allows the specification of string forces from the
surface. You can use this mode to determine downhole forces acting on
the work string when you know the surface forces. This analysis mode
is in many ways the opposite of the Normal Analysis. A Normal
Analysis calculates the forces at the surface based on known forces
acting at the bit.
You may want to use this analysis mode to analyze coiled tubing
operations. In the case of coiled tubing, you are driving tubing into the
hole with known injector forces at the surface. This analysis mode
provides a means of determining the tension or compression forces
acting on the tubing downhole. You can specify a tension (positive) or
compressive (negative) injector force at the surface.
You can also use this analysis mode to analyze stuck pipe situations.
When a pipe is stuck downhole, you know the forces at the surface, but
the downhole loads must be estimated. You may want to know the
required surface forces to achieve a specific force to trip a jar. You may
want to apply a tension or torque at the surface, and from the resulting
pipe stretch or twist, you can calculate the stuck point.

1. The first step is to initialize with the loads at the surface, including
torques and axial force. These parameter are input on the Top Down
Analysis Mode Data dialog.
2. Next, the work string is broken into the minimum of 30 feet, or the
component length. This is the segment that will be analyzed. After
the analysis of a segment is complete, the segment below it will be
analyzed (from the surface down the string).
a) Interpolate survey at start and end of segment. Calculate build

and turn rates, and the dogleg severity. The minimum curvature
method is used for all survey calculations. If the surveys had
tortuosity applied, the “tortured” surveys are used.

(page 126).

force. The axial force computed using the Buoyancy Method is
used to compare with the critical buckling force to determine the
onset of buckling. This is because the critical buckling force
calculations are based on the same assumptions regarding
hydrostatic pressure.

string.

governed by the selection of Friction Factor (page 125).
the work string.

(page 110).

Any input bit torque will be added to the calculated torque.
j) Determine stresses using the Stress calculations (page 132).
k) Perform Fatigue calculations (page 121).
l) Perform Twist calculations (page 139) and Stretch calculations

(page 135).

4. Compute the pick up and slack off.
5. Calculate maximum weight on bit required to buckle (sinusoidal

and helical) the work string, and maximum allowable overpull.

Supporting Information and Calculations
The calculations and information in this section are presented in

alphabetical order using the calculation or topic name. The material
contained in this section is intended to provide you more detailed
information and calculations pertaining to many of the steps presented
during the descriptions of the analysis mode methodologies.
If the information in this section does not provide you the detail you
require, please refer to “References” on page 143 for additional sources
of information pertaining to the topic you are interested in.
Additional Side Force Due to Buckling

Once buckling has occurred, there is an additional side force due to
increased contact between the wellbore and the work string. For the soft
string model, the following calculations are used to compute the
additional side force. These calculations are not included in a stiff string
analysis because the stiff string model considers the additional force due
to buckling in the derivation of the side force.
Sinusoidal Buckling Mode

No additional side force due to buckling is added.
Helical Buckling Mode
2
rFaxial
Fadd =
4 EI

Where:
Fadd = Additional side force
Faxial = Axial compression force calculated

using the buoyancy method
E = Young’s modulus of elasticity
I = Moment of Inertia
r = Radial clearance between wellbore and work string
Axial Force
There are two calculation methods to determine the axial force: the
buoyancy method and the pressure area method. In checking for the
onset of buckling, the buoyancy method is used. This is because the
Critical Buckling Force calculations (page 116) are based on the same
assumptions regarding hydrostatic pressure. For stress calculations, the
pressure area method is used.
Both methods predict the same measured weight at the surface because
there is no hydrostatic force acting at the surface. Below the surface, the
axial force calculated using each method will be different.
Consider a work string “hanging in air,” or more specifically, in a

vacuum. Some of the string weight is supported at the bottom by a force
(specifically, the weight on bit). In this situation, the upper portion of the
string is in axial tension, and the lower portion of the string is in axial
compression. Somewhere along the string there is a point where the
axial force changes from tension to compression, and the axial stress is
zero. This is the neutral point.
In this simple case, the distance from the bottom of the string up to the
neutral point can be calculated by dividing the supporting force at the
bottom (specifically, the weight on bit) by the weight of the string per
unit length. In other words, the weight of the string below the neutral
point is equal to the supporting force.
In a normal drilling environment, the string is submerged in a fluid. The

fluid creates hydrostatic pressure acting on the string. Two different
neutral points can be calculated as a result of the handling of the
hydrostatic forces. The buoyancy method includes the effects of
buoyancy, while the pressure area method does not.

The pressure area method computes the axial forces in the work string
by calculating all the forces acting on the work string, and solving for
the neutral point using the principle of equilibrium. Using this method,
the axial force and axial stress is exactly zero at the neutral point.
Using the buoyancy method, the axial force at the neutral point is not
zero. The axial force and stress is equal to the hydrostatic pressure at the
depth of the neutral point. Because hydrostatic pressure alone will never
cause a pipe to buckle, the buoyancy method is used to determine if and
when buckling occurs.
Buoyancy Method
The buoyancy method is used to determine if buckling occurs.
[ ]
Faxial = ∑ LWair Cos (Inc ) + Fdrag + ∆Farea − Fbottom − WWOB + FBS
Pressure Area Method

The pressure area method is used to calculated stress.
[ ]
Faxial = ∑ LWair Cos (Inc ) + Fdrag + ∆Farea − Fbottom − WWOB

L = Length of drillstring hanging below point (ft)

W air = W eight per foot of the drillstring in air (lb/ft)
Inc = Inclination (deg)

Fbottom = Bottom pressure force, a compression force due to
fluid pressure applied over the cross sectional
area of the bottom component
Farea = Change in force due to a change in area at junction
between two components of different cross sectional
areas, such as the junction between drill pipe and
heavy weight or heavy weight and drill collars.
If the area of the bottom component is larger the
force is a tension, if the top component is larger
the force is compression.
WWOB = W eight on bit (lb) (0 for tripping in & out)
Fdrag = Drag force (lb)
FBS = Buckling Stability Force = PressExternal*AreaExternal –

PressInternal*AreaInternal
Pipe: Area External =
π/4*(0.95*BOD*BOD + 0.05*JOD*JOD)
AreaInternal =
π/4*(0.95*BID*BID + 0.05*JID*JID)
Collar: AreaExternal = π/4*(BOD*BOD)
AreaInternal = π/4*(BID*BID)
PressExternal = AnnulusSurfacePress +
Σ (AnnulusPressGrad * TVD)
PressInternal = StringSurfacePress +
Σ (StringPressGrad * TVD)
Bending Stress Magnification (BSM)

Bending stress magnification (BSM) will be applied to the calculated
bending stresses if you have checked the BSM box on the Torque Drag
Setup Data dialog. The magnitude of the BSM is reported in the stress
data table of the Normal Analysis Detail Report, and in the Top Down
Analysis Detail Report.

When a drill string is subjected to either tensile or compressive axial

loads, the maximum curvature of the drillpipe body exceeds that of the
hole axis curvature. The drillpipe sections conform to the wellbore
curvature primarily through contact at the tool joints. In both tensile and
compressive axial load cases the average curvature between the tool
joints is not changed, but the local changes of curvature due to
straightening effects of tension or the buckling effects of compression
may be many times the average value. Therefore, to accurately calculate
the bending stress in the pipe body requires the determination of these
local maximum curvatures.
The bending stress magnification factor (BSM) is defined as the ratio of

the maximum of the absolute value of the curvature in the drillpipe body
divided by the curvature of the hole axis. The BSM is applied as a
multiplier on the bending stress calculation. This modified bending
stress is then used in the calculation of the von Mises stress of the
drillpipe.
Buoyed Weight
The surface pressure and mud densities input on the Fluids Column tabs,
or the mud weight input on the Fluid Editor are used to determine the
pressure inside and outside of the work string. Using the equations listed
below, these pressures are used to determine the buoyed weight of the
work string. The buoyed weight is then used to determine the forces and
stresses acting on the work string in the analysis.

WBuoy = WAir − WFluid

WFluid = (MWAnnular ∗ AExternal) − (MWInternal ∗ AInternal )
For components with tool joints
= π 4 ∗ [0.95 ∗ (OD Body ) + 0.05 ∗ (OD Jo int )2 ]

2
A External
A Internal = π 4 ∗ [ 0 .95 ∗ (ID Body ) + 0 . 05 ∗ (ID Jo int )2 ]
2
Note: The constants 0.95 and 0.5 are used to assume that 95% of the
component length is pipe body, and 5% is tool joint.
For components without tool joints
A Internal = π 4 ∗ (ID Body )2
AExternal = π 4 ∗ (OD Body )

2
Where:
OD Body = Outside diameter of component body

OD Jo int = Outside diameter of tool joint
ID Body = Inside diameter of component body
ID Jo int = Inside diameter of tool joint
AExternal = External area of the component
AInternal = Internal area of the component
WFluid = Weight per foot of displaced fluid
W Buoy = Buoyed weight per foot of component
MW Annular = Annular mud weight at component depth in the wellbore
MWInternal = Internal mud weight at component depth inside the component

Critical Buckling Forces

The critical buckling force is the axial force required to be exerted on a
work string to initiate buckling. Buckling first occurs when
compressive axial forces exceed a critical buckling force. The axial
force computed using the Buoyancy Method is used to compare with the
critical buckling force to determine the onset of buckling. This is
because the critical buckling force calculations are based on the same
assumptions regarding hydrostatic pressure.
The critical buckling forces can be found listed by component type and
measured depth in the sinusoidal buckling and helical buckling columns
of the Normal Analysis Detail Report or the Top Down Analysis Detail
Report. The values in these two columns can be compared to the Drill
String Axial Force - Buoyancy column to determine if the component is
bucked at that depth. If the compressive force indicated in the Buoyancy
column exceeds that of either the sinusoidal buckling or helical buckling
column, the component is buckled. If buckling occurs, an S indicating
sinusoidal buckling, an H indicating helical buckling, or an L indicating
lockup will be listed in the B column.
Different critical buckling forces are required to initiate the sinusoidal

and helical buckling phases. Calculations for the critical buckling force
also vary depending on the analysis options selected on the Torque Drag
Setup Data dialog.
Straight Model Calculations

The Straight Model was the model used in WELLPLAN 5.3 Torque
Drag analysis. This model divides the work string into 30 foot sections.
The inclination and azimuth of these sections change along the well as
described by the survey data and the approximate 3D well shape.
However, each 30 foot section is assumed to be “straight” or of constant
inclination. By contrast, the curvilinear model takes into account the
inclination (build or drop) change within each 30 foot section.

Critical Inclination to Select Buckling Model
[
Θ c = Sin −1 (1 . 94 2 ) ∗ r ∗ (W EI )
2 13
]
If (Inc > Θ C ) , then:
F S = 2[Sin (Inc )EIW / r ]
12
If (Inc < Θ C ) , then:
(
F S = 1 .94 EIW )
2 13
Curvilinear Model
For a torque drag analysis, the work string is divided into 30 foot
sections. The straight model assumes each section is of constant
inclination. The curvilinear model takes into account the inclination
(build or drop) change within each 30 foot section.
In hole sections where there is an angle change, compression in the pipe

through the doglegs causes extra side force. The additional side force
acts to stabilize the pipe against buckling. An exception is when the
pipe is dropping angle.
In a build section of the well:
 2 EI κ   EI κ  EIW Sin (Inc )

2
FS =  +2   +
 r   r  r
In a drop section of the well:

rW Sin (Inc )
κ test =
EI
if (κ ≥ κ test ) then,
 2 EI κ   EI κ  EIW Sin ( Inc )

2
FS =  −2   −
 r   r  r
if (κ < κ test ) then,
 2 EI κ   EI κ  EIW Sin (Inc )

2
FS = −  +2   +
 r   r  r

Loading and Unloading Models

In SPE 36761, Mitchell derives the loading method. The idea presented
is that for compressive axial loads between 1.4 and 2.8 times the
sinusoidal buckling force, there is enough strain energy in the pipe to
sustain helical buckling, but not enough energy to spontaneously change
from sinusoidal buckling to helical buckling.
If you could reach in and lift the pipe up into a helix, it would stay in the
helix when you let go. In an ideal situation without external disturbances
the pipe would stay in a sinusoidal buckling mode until the axial force
reached 2.8 times the sinusoidal buckling force. At this point, the pipe
would transition to the helical buckling mode. This is the “loading”
scenario.
Once the pipe is in the helical buckling mode, the axial force can be
reduced to 1.4 times the sinusoidal buckling force, and the helical mode
will be maintained. If the axial force falls below 1.4 times the sinusoidal
buckling force, the pipe will fall out of the helix into a sinusoidal
buckling mode. This is the “unloading” scenario.
In the figure above, in stage 1 the compressive load is increased from the
force required for sinusoidal buckling to the threshold force where the
pipe snaps into a helically buckled state. This is the “loading” force.
Stages 2 and 3 represent the reduction of the compressive load to
another threshold force to snap out from helically buckled into a
sinusoidal buckled state. This is the “unloading” force.
Taking friction into consideration, we can imagine buckling friction acts

a bit like glue. It gives resistance when the pipe is pushed into buckling
(loading) and it also provides resistance to release the pipe from
buckling (unloading). But when the pipe is rotating the “glue” bond is
broken, and gives no resistance. Where friction is effective, the
transitions from sinusoidal to helical and vice versa are more explosive
because the pipe picks up more spring energy because the friction

prevents free pipe movement until the stored energy is enough to break
the friction bond.
Loading Model
FH = 2.828427 FS
Unloading Model
FH = 1.414FS
Where:
FS = C om pression force to induce onset of sinusoidal buckling
FH = C om pression force to induce onset of helical buckling

I = M om ent of inertial for com ponent
E = Y oung’s m odulus of elasticity
W = T ubular weight in m ud
Inc = W ellbore inclination
r = R adial clearance between wellbore and com ponent
κ = C urv ature in the v ertical plane (build or drop)
Drag Force Calculations

The drag force acts opposite to the direction of motion. The direction of
the drag force is governed by the type of analysis being performed. The
drag force may be acting up the axis of the pipe, down the axis of the
pipe, or acting in a tangential direction resisting the rotation of the pipe.
The drag force is calculated using the following equation.
T
FD = FN ∗ µ ∗
V
Where:

T = Trip speed
RPM
A = Angular speed = diameter ∗ π ∗
60
V = Resultant speed = (T 2
+ A2 )
FN = Side or norm al force
µ = Coefficient of friction (friction factor)
FD = Drag force
The side force or normal force is a measurement of the force exerted by

the wellbore onto the work string. In the diagram below, the forces
acting on a small segment of work string lying in an inclined hole are
shown. In this simple diagram, the segment is not moving. From this
diagram we can see that the normal force acts in a direction
perpendicular to the inclined surface. The weight of the work string acts
downward in the direction of gravity. Another force, the drag force, is
also acting on the segment. The drag force always acts in the opposite
direction of motion. The segment does not slide down the inclined plane
because of the drag force. The magnitude of the drag force depends on
the normal force, and the coefficient of friction between the inclined
plane and the segment. The coefficient of friction is a means to define
the friction between the wellbore wall and the work string.

Where:
FN = Normal Force
FD = Drag Force
W = Weight of segment
Fatigue Calculations
WELLPLAN torque drag includes fatigue analysis because it is a
primary cause of drilling tubular failure. A fatigue failure is caused by
cyclic bending stresses when the pipe is run in holes with doglegs. The
source of fatigue failure is micro fractures between the crystal structures
of the material caused in the construction of the material. These cracks
are widened by successive stress reversals (tensile/compressive) in the
body of the cylinder. The following five steps are applied in the
Torque/Drag analysis of fatigue loading and prediction.
Cyclic stresses are those components of stress that change and reverse
every time the pipe is rotated. In Torque Drag, only bending and
buckling stresses go through this reversal. In the stiff string model the
buckling stresses are integrated with the pipe curvature and hence
included in bending; the soft string model treats buckling stress
independent to bending stress and adds the two together for fatigue
analysis. Bending stresses are caused by pipe running through a curved
hole. On one side of the pipe is bent into tension and the other side of the
pipe is bent into compression (see diagram following). Bending stresses
are a maximum at the outside of the pipe body and undergo a simple
harmonic motion as the pipe rotates.

Apply Bending Stress Magnification Factor calculations (page 113).

Bending stress concentrates close to the tool joints in externally upset
pipe when the pipe is in tension. This magnifies the bending radius in
the section of pipe close to the tool joints.
Establish A Fatigue Endurance Limit For The Pipe

Fatigue endurance limit is not a constant value that is related to the yield
strength of the pipe. It cannot be associated with the material grade of
the pipe. There are also bending stress concentrations in the tubular due
to the design of tool-joints and the shape of upsets in the body of the pipe
apart from those considered in the bending stress magnification factor.
Drillpipe 25-35 Kpsi This is a general value for

continuous tubular steel.
Heavy 18-25 Kpsi More stress concentration in tool
Weight joint
Drill Collars 12-15 Kpsi Includes drill collars and other non
upset BHA components, like jars,
stabilizers, MWD, and so forth.
Casings 5-20 Kpsi Depends on connectors:
5 for 8 round, 20 for premium
Non externally upset tubulars like collars and casing will have
maximum concentration of bending stress at the tool joint.

The fatigue endurance limit needs to be reduced if the steel is used in a

corrosive environment like saline (high chloride) or hydrogen sulfide
environment.
Derate The Fatigue Endurance Limit For Tension

The crack widening mechanism that causes fatigue is strongly
influenced by tension in the pipe. A simple empirical mechanism is used
to reduce the fatigue endurance limit for tensile stress as a ratio of the
tensile yield stress. This is known as the Goodman relation.
F AY = σ MY AE
If F AB > 0.0 then,
 F 
σ FL = σ FEL 1 − AB  (Tension)
 FAY 
Else,
σ FL = σ FEL (Compression)
R F = (σ BEND + σ BUCK )σ FL
AINTC =
π
4
(
ID B
2
)
AE = AEXT − AINT
AEXTP =
π
4
(0.95OD B
2
+ 0.05OD J
2
)
AINTP =
π
4
(0.95 ID B
2
+ 0.05 ID J
2
)
AEXTC =
π
4
(OD ) B
2
AINTC =
π
4
(ID )
B
2

Where:
F AY = Axial force required to generate the yield stress, (lb)

F AB = Axial force (Buoyancy M ethod), (lb)
σ FL = Fatigue lim it, (psi)
σ MY = M inim um yield stress specified by G rade , (psi)
σ FEL = Fatigue endurance lim it, (psi) (For pipe and heav y weight,
this is input. All other com ponents assum e = 35,000 psi
σ BEND = Bending stress, (psi) (Corrected by BSM F)
σ BUCK = Buckling stress, (psi) (only if buckling occurs)
RF = Fatigue Ratio
AE = Effectiv e sectional area, in ( )
2
A EXT ( )
= External area of pipe, heav y weight or collar com ponent, in
2
= Internal area of pipe, heav y weight, or collar com ponent, (in )

2
A INT
= Pipe and heav y weight external area, (in )
2
A EXTP
= Pipe and heav y weight internal area, (in )
2
A INTP
= Collar external area, (in )
2
A EXTC
= Collar external area, (in )
2
A INTC
OD B = Body outside diam eter, (in)
OD J = Joint outside diam eter, (in)
ID B = Body inside diam eter, (in)
ID J = Joint inside diam eter, (in)

Compare The Cyclic Stress Against The Derated Fatigue

Endurance Limit
The fatigue ratio is the combined bending and buckling stress divided by
the fatigue endurance limit.
Some judgment is required in using the fatigue endurance limit (FEL),

because the limit is normally determined for a number of cycles of pipe
rotation. The number of cycles for the fatigue endurance limits is
approximately taken at 107 rotations; this is the level of cyclic stress
beyond which the material is immune to fatigue failure. This is normally
equivalent to the pipe drilling for 100000’ at 60ft/hr at 100 rpm. The
relationship between fatigue stress (S) and number of cycles to failure
(N) is known as the S-N curve. The following chart is an idealized S-N
curve for G105 pipe that has a yield of 105 Kpsi and a fatigue endurance
limit of 30 Kpsi.
Using the chart you can see that a pipe may yield at a lower number of
cycles at an intermediate stress between the fatigue endurance limit and
the tensile stress limit.
Friction Factors
A friction factor is sometimes referred to as the coefficient of friction.
The friction factor represents the prevailing friction between the
wellbore or casing and the work string. Higher coefficients of friction

result in greater resistance to the movement of the work string as it is run

in, pulled out, or rotated in the wellbore. A friction factor of zero implies
there is no friction in the well, which is an impossible situation. A
friction factor of one suggests all of the normal (contact) force has been
translated into drag force. Refer to the Drag Force calculations
(page 119) for related information.
Friction depends on the two surfaces in contact, as well as the

lubrication properties of the drilling fluid. In addition to friction, the
results of physical mechanisms acting on the work string are reflected in
the selection of the friction factor. There are a number of physical
mechanisms, including stabilizer gouging, key seats, and swelling
formations, that contribute to the torque and drag of the work string.
These mechanisms can cause the hook loads and torques to be higher or
lower than expected. The wellbore path (doglegs or tortuosity) can also
contribute to the loading forces on a work string. Refer to Tortuosity in
this section (page 137) for more information.
Models
The Torque Drag module offers you the choice of two methods to use to
model the string in the wellbore. The soft string model has been the basis
of the WELLPLAN Torque Drag analysis for years. This model is
commonly used throughout the industry for this type of analysis. The
stiff string model was added to the module with the latest release of the
software.
Both models analyze the string in 30-foot sections. The primary

difference between the models is the method of calculating the normal
force acting on the string as a result of the string placement in the
wellbore. Each of the models are described in the following sections.
Pipe Wall Thickness Modification Due to Pipe Class

Drill pipe wall thickness is modified according to the class specified for
the pipe on the String Editor. The class specified indicates the wall
thickness modification as a percentage of the drillpipe outside diameter.
Drill pipe classes can be entered or edited on the Class option of the
Tubular Properties submenu of the Tools Menu.
The outside diameter is modified as follows:

ODnew = c ∗ ODold + IDold (1 − c )
Where:
OD new = Calculated outside diam eter based on pipe class

%WallThickn ess
c = and is based on pipe class specified
100
OD old = O utside diam eter as specified on the String Editor
ID old = Inside diam eter as specified on the String Editor
Sheave Friction
Sheave friction corrections are applied to all measured weight
calculations when you have indicated on the Torque Drag Setup Data
dialog that you want to apply this correction.
n(e − 1)(H r + Wtb )

Lr =
 1 
e1 − n 
 e 
n(1 − e )( H l + Wtb )
Ll =
(
1 − en )
Where:

Lr = Weight indicator reading while raising

Ll = Weight indicator reading while lowering
Hr = Hook load while raising, calculated in analysis

Hl = Hook load while lowering, calculated in analysis
Wtb = Weight of travelling block, user input

n = Number of lines between the blocks
e = Individual sheave efficiency
Side Force for Soft String Model



FN = (FT ∆α Sin(Φ )) + (FT ∆Θ + WL Sin(Φ ))

2 2
Where:
FN = Normal or side force
FT = Axial force at bottom of section calculated using

Buoyancy Method
∆α = Change in azimuth over section length
Φ = Average inclination over the section
∆Θ = Change in inclination over section length
L = Section length
W = Buoyed weight of the section
Where:
FN= Normal Force

FD = Drag Force

Soft String Model

The soft string model is based on Dawson’s cable model, or soft string
model. As the name implies, in this model the work string (such as
drillstring or casing, and so forth) is considered to be a flexible cable or
string with no associated bending stiffness. Since there is no bending
stiffness, there is no standoff between the BHA and the wellbore wall
due to stabilizers or other upsets.
When determining contact forces, the work string is assumed to lie

against the side of the wellbore. However, within the soft string analysis
it is actually considered to follow the center line of the wellbore. When
determining the contact or normal force, the contact between the string
and the wellbore is assumed to occur at the midpoint of each string
segment.
Stiff String Model

The stiff string model uses the mathematical finite element analysis to
determine the forces acting on the string. This model considers the
tubular stiffness and the tubular joint-to-hole wall clearance. The model
modifies the stiffness for compressive forces. Like the soft string model,
it calculates single point weight concentrations so determining the
contact force per unit area is not possible.
Stiff String analysis should be used to complete the following tasks:
• Evaluate a work string containing stiff tubulars run in a well with an

build rate of at least 15 deg/100 ft.
• Analyze running stiff casing in a well.
• Observe buckling using the Position Plot.
• Analyze work string containing upsets found on stabilizers or
friction reduction devices.
The stiff string model analyzes the string by dividing it into sections
(elements) equal to the lesser of the component length or 30 feet. The
model computes the side force at the center point of each element. The
side force is used to compute the torque and drag change from one
element to the next element.
The analysis of each element involves analyzing the nodes defining the
end points of each element. The detailed analysis of each node involves
creating a local mesh of 10 to 20 elements around the node. Each

element is given the same dimensions and properties as the

corresponding full drill string portion.
If the node length exceeds the maximum column-buckling load for the
section, the node is further broken into fractional lengths to keep each
section below the buckling threshold. This is why the analysis may take
considerably longer when large compressive loads are applied.
This short section is solved by solving each individual junction node for
moments and forces, then displacing it to a point of zero force. If this
position is beyond the hole wall, a restorative force is applied to keep it
in the hole. This process is repeated for each node in the short beam until
they reach their “relaxed” state.
The stiff string produces slightly different results when run “top down”
or “bottom up.” The difference is explained because the direction of
analysis is reversed. The length of beam selected for each stiff analysis
has been selected to optimize speed while maintaining reliable
consistent results.
The following illustrations depict an inclined beam section with length

L. P is the axial force, and Fv, F1, and F2 are the calculated ends or
contact forces caused by weight W.
M = End Moment
Fv = End Force
I
P
Fv
M1 M2
W
F1 F2
L

Stress
In the analysis, many stress calculations are performed using the
following equations. These calculations include the effects of:
l Axial stress due to hydrostatic and mechanical loading
l Bending stress approximated from wellbore curvature
l Bending stress due to buckling
l Torsional stress from twist
l Transverse shear stress from contact
l Hoop stress due to internal and external pressure
l Radial stress due to internal and external pressure
Calculated stress data is available on the Stress Graph, Summary Report

or Stress Data table.
σ ij = stress i = stress type j = location
Stress types: Location:

r = Radial 1 = outside pipe wall
s = Transverse shear 2 = inside pipe wall
h = Hoop
t = Torsion
a = Axial
Von Mises Stress
(σ − σ hj ) + (σ aj − σ rj ) + (σ hj − σ aj ) + 6σ sj + 6σ tj
2 2 2 2 2
σ VM =
rj
Note: The von Mises stress is calculated on the inside and outside of the
pipe wall. The maximum stress calculated for these two locations is
presented in the reports, graphs, and tables.

Radial Stress
σ r1 = − Pe
σ r 2 = − Pi
Transverse Shear Stress
2 Fn
σ s1 = σ s 2 =
A
Hoop Stress
[
σ h1 = 2 ri Pi − ri + ro Pe
2
( 2 2
) ] (r o
2
− ri
2
)
σ h2 = [(r + ro )P − 2 r P (r − ri )]
2 2 2 2 2
i i o e o
Torsional Stress
σ t 1 = 12 ro T J
σ t 2 = 12 ri T J
Bending Stress
σ bend 1 = ro EκM 68754.9

σ bend 2 = ri EκM 68754.9
Buckling Stress
(only calculated if buckling occurs)

σ buck 1 = ro R c Fa 2 I
σ buck 2 = − ri R c Fa 2 I
Axial Stress
(tension + bending + buckling)
σ a 1 = F a A + σ bend 1 + σ buck 1
σ a 2 = F a A + σ bend 2 + σ buck 2
Where:
ri = Inside pipe radius (in)
ro = O utside pipe radius (in), as m odified by the pipe class
Fn = Norm al (side) force, (lb)
Fa = Axial force (lb) as calculated with pressure area m ethod

T = Torque (ft-lb)
E = M odulus of elasticity (psi)
Pi = Pipe internal pressure (psi)
Pe = Pipe external pressure (psi)
κ = W ellbore curv ature as dogleg sev erity (deg/100ft) for
soft string m odel. Stiff string m odel calculates local
string curv ature.
J = Polar m om ent of inertia

W here:
(
J body = π 32 B od − B id
4 4
)
=π 32 (J − J id )
4 4
J jo int od
B od = body outside diam eter, in

B id = body inside diam eter, in
J od = joint outside diam eter, in
J id = joint inside diam eter, in

A = Cross sectional area of component

I = Moment of inertia
Rc = Maximum distance from workstring to wellbore wall (in)
M = Bending Stress Magnification Factor
Stretch
Total stretch in the work string is computed as the sum of three
components. These three components consider the stretch due to axial
load, buckling, and ballooning. Ballooning is caused by differential
pressure inside and outside of the work string.
Total Stretch = ∆LHL + ∆LBuck + ∆LBalloon
Stretch due to axial load

This term is based on Hooke’s Law. The first term reflects the constant
load in the string, while the second term reflects the linear change in the
load.
F ∗L ∆F ∗ L
∆LHL = +
A∗ E 2∗ A∗ E
Where:
∆LHL = Change in length due to the Hooke’s Law mechanism

F = Axial force as determined by the pressure area method
∆F = Change in pressure area axial force over component length
A = Cross sectional area of component
E = Young’s Modulus of component
Stretch due to buckling

If buckling occurs, the additional stretch in the buckled section of the
work string is calculated using the following equation.

r 2 ∗ F ∗ L r 2 ∗ ∆F ∗ L
∆LBuck = +
4∗ E ∗ I 8∗ E ∗ I
Where:
∆L Buck = Change in length due to buckling

F = Axial force as determined by the pressure area metho
∆F = Change in pressure area axial force over component
I = Moment of Inertia
r = Clearance between the wellbore wall and the
work string component
Stretch due to ballooning

Stretch due to ballooning is caused by differential pressure inside and
outside of the work string, and is defined by the following equation.
∆LBalloon =
−v∗L
(
E ∗ R −1
2
[( ) (
∗ ρ s − R 2 ∗ ρ a ∗ L + 2 ∗ Ps − R 2 ∗ Pa
)
)]
Where:
∆LBalloon = Change in length due to ballooning mechanism

L = Length of work string component element
R = Ration of component outside diameter/inside diameter
ν = Poisson’s Ratio of component
ρs = Mud density inside work string component
ρa = Mud density in annulus at depth of work string component
Ps = Surface pressure, work string side
Pa = Surface pressure, annulus side

Tortuosity
Wellbore tortuosity is a measure of the random meandering that occur
in a well during drilling operations.
In designing a well, tortuosity or rippling is not normally modeled

during directional well path planning. Typically, a survey file is
generated based on “ideal” trajectories which follow smooth paths
governed by the survey calculation method. WELLPLAN uses the
minimum curvature method.
Similarly, during actual drilling operations, “wiggle” may occur

between consecutive survey stations, even though the actual well path
appears to match the “ideal” plan at the survey station measurement
point. The recording of the well’s precise tortuosity can be captured only
through the use of closer and closer survey stations, although this may
be impractical.
In both the design case and the operational case, the degree of tortuosity
is a factor on the overall loading (both torque and drag) on a particular
work string. The “smoother” the well, the less the frictional effects.
Modelling of wellbore tortuosity has been recognized as especially

significant at the planning stage, enabling more realistic load predictions
to be established.
Torque
Torque is calculated using the following equation.
A
τ = FN ∗ r ∗ µ ∗
V
Where:

T = Trip speed
RPM
A = Angular speed = diameter ∗ π ∗
60
V = Resultant speed = (T 2
+ A2 )
FN = Side or normal force
µ = Coefficient of friction
r = Radius of component (for collars the OD of the collar
is used for drill pipe, heavy weight and casing, the
OD of the tool joint is used for stabilizers the OD
of the blade is used)
FD = Drag force
τ = Torque


Where:
FN = Normal Force
FD = Drag Force
Twist
Twist in the work string is calculated along the string for each segment,
and is accumulated along the length of the work string. Twist is reported
as “windup” on the reports.
TL
Θ=
JG
Where:

Θ = Angle of twist (radians)

L = Length of com ponent
T = Torque (ft-lb)
E = M odulus of elasticity (psi)
E
G = M odulus of rigidity =
2 + 2ν
ν = Poisson’s ratio
J = Polar m om ent of inertia
W here:
Pipe:
(
J body = π 32 B od − B id
4 4
)
=π 32 (J − J id )
4 4
J jo int od
B od = Body outside diam eter, in

B id = Body inside diam eter, in
J od = Joint outside diam eter, in
J id = Joint inside diam eter, in
(J ∗J )
J =
body jo int
(.95 J jo int + . 05 J body )

Collar:
π
J =
32
(B OD4 − B ID4 )
Viscous Drag
Viscous drag is additional drag force acting on the work string due to
hydraulic effects while tripping or rotating. The fluid forces are
determined for “steady” pipe movement, and not for fluid acceleration
effects. You can elect to include viscous drag on the Torque Drag Setup
Data dialog.
The additional force due to viscous drag is calculated as follows. Note

that this drag force is added to the drag force calculated in Drag Force
Calculations.
∆P.π .( Dh2 − D p2 ).D p

∆Force =
4.( Dh − D p ).

There are no direct computations of fluid drag due to pipe rotation. The
method shown here derives from the analysis of the Fann Viscometer
given in Applied Drilling Engineering.
Compute the Shear Rate in the Annulus due to pipe rotation.
4.π .RPM / 60
SR =
(
D . 1 / D p2 − 1 / Dh2
2
p )
Given the shear rate, the shear stress is computed directly from the
viscosity equations for the fluid type. The 479 in the equations below is
a conversion from Centipoise to equivalent lb/100 ft2.
Bingham Plastic
τ t = YP + PV .SR / 479
Power Law
τ t = K .SR n / 479 if K is Cp or 4.79 if K is dyn/cm
Herschel Bulkley
τ t = ZG + K .SR n / 479 if K is Cp or 4.79 if K is dyn/cm
No consideration is made to laminar or turbulent flow in this derivation.

Additionally the combined hydraulic effects of trip movement and
rotation are ignored, which would accelerate the onset of turbulent flow.
Given the shear stress at the pipe wall (in lb/100ft2), the torque on the
pipe is computed from the surface area of the pipe and the torsional
radius.

∆Torque = τ t .2.π .L.( D p / 24) 2 / 100
In the case of rotational torque the forces are equal and opposite between
the pipe and the hole, although we are interested in the torque on the pipe
and not the reaction from the hole.
Where:
Dh = H ole D iam eter (in)
Dh = P ipe D iam eter (in)

∆P = A nnular pressure loss calculated according to
rheological m odel selected
Vp = Linear S peed of P ipe (ft/m in)
RPM = R otational S peed of P ipe (rev olutions/m in)
YP = Y ield P oint (lbs/100ft2)
PV = P lastic V iscosity (cp)
ZG = Z ero G el Y ield (lbs/100ft2)

References
General
“The Neutral Zones in Drill Pipe and Casing and Their Significance in
Relation to Buckling and Collapse”, Klinkenberg, A., Royal Dutch
Shell Group, South Western Division of Production, Beaumont, Texas,
March 1951.
“Drillstring Design for Directional Wells, Corbett, K.T., and Dawson,

R., IADC Drilling Technology Conference, Dallas, March 1984.
“Uses and Limitations of Drillstring Tension and Torque Model to

Monitor Hole Conditions”, Brett, J.F., Bechett, A.D., Holt, C.A., and
Smith, D.L., SPE 16664.
“Developing a Platform Strategy and Predicting Torque Losses for

Modelled Directional Wells in the Amauligak Field of the Beaufort Sea,
Canada”, Lesso Jr., W.G., Mullens, E., and Daudey, J., SPE 19550.
Bending Stress Magnification Factor

“Bending Stress Magnification in Constant Curvature Doglegs With
Impact on Drillstring and Casing”, Paslay, P.R., and Cernocky, E.P.,
SPE 22547.
Buckling
“A Buckling Criterion for Constant Curvature Wellbores”, Mitchell, R.,
Landmark Graphics, SPE 52901.
“A Study of the Buckling of Rotary Drilling Strings, Lubinski, A., API

Drilling and Production Practice, 1950.
“Drillpipe Buckling in Inclined Holes”, Dawson,R., and Paslay, P.R.,

SPE 11167, September 1982.
“Buckling Behavior of Well Tubing: The Packer Effect, by Mitchell,

R.F., SPE Journal, October 1982.

“Frictional Forces in Helical Buckling of Tubing”, Mitchell, R.F., SPE

13064.
“New Design Considerations for Tubing and Casing Buckling in

Inclined Wells”, Cheatham, J.B., and Chen, Y.C., OTC 5826, May
1988.
“Tubing and Casing Buckling in Horizontal Wells”, Chen, Y.C., Lin,

Y.H., and Cheatham, J.B., JPT, February 1989.
“Buckling of Pipe and Tubing Constrained Inside Inclined Wells”,

Chen, Y.C., Adnan, S., OTC 7323.
“Effects of Well Deviation on Helical Buckling”, Mitchell, R.F., SPE

Drilling & Completions, SPE 29462, March 1997.
“Buckling Analysis in Deviated Wells: A Practical Method,” SPE

Drilling & Completions, SPE 36761, March 1999.
Fatigue
“Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials”, by
Richard W.Herzberg, 3rd Edition 1989, Wiley.
Sheave Friction
“The Determination of True Hook and Line Tension Under Dynamic
Conditions”, by Luke & Juvkam-Wold, IADC/SPE 23859.
“Analysis Improves Accuracy of Weight Indicator Reading”, by

Dangerfield, Oil and Gas Journal, August 10, 1987.
Side Force Calculations

“Torque and Drag in Directional Wells – Prediction and Measurement”,
Johancsik, C.A., Friesen, D.B., and Dawson, Rapier, Journal of
Petroleum Technology, June 1984, pages 987-992.
“Drilling and Completing Horizontal Wells With Coiled Tubing”, Wu,

Jiang, and Juvkam-Wold, H.C., SPE 26336.

Stiff String Model

“Background to Buckling”, Brown & Poulson, University of Swansea,
Section 3.4 Analysis of Elastic Rigid Jointed Frameworks (with sway).
“Engineering Formulas”, Gieck, Kurt, Fourth Ed. McGraw Hill 1983,

Section P13, Deflection of Beams in Bending.


Chapter 4
Hydraulics Analysis
Hydraulics can be used to simulate the dynamic pressure losses in the rig’s circulating system,
and to provide analytical tools to optimize hydraulics.
Overview
of using the Hydraulics module. You will also become familiar with the
data presented on reports, and plots. To reinforce what you learn in the
class lecture, you will have the opportunity to complete several
exercises designed to prepare you for using the module outside of class.
The information presented in this chapter can be used as a study guide
during the course, and can also be used as a reference for future analysis.

Chapter 4: Hydraulics Analysis
Hydraulics Analysis: An Introduction
The Hydraulics module can be used to simulate the dynamic pressure

losses in the rig’s circulating system, and to provide analytical tools to
optimize hydraulics. The module provides several rheological models,
including Bingham Plastic, Power Law, and Herschel Bulkley. The
chosen rheological model provides the basis for the pressure loss
calculations.
You may chose to optimize hydraulics based on maximum hydraulic

horsepower, maximum impact force, maximum nozzle velocity, or
percent pressure loss at bit. Or you may optimize hydraulics based on
recorded pressure loss and flow rate data using Scott’s Method.
A hole cleaning model is also provided that can assist with evaluation
cuttings build up in an actual well, or as a tool to help evaluate mud
systems.
Starting Hydraulics Analysis

There are two ways to begin the Hydraulics Module. You can select
Hydraulics from the Modules Menu, and then select the appropriate
analysis mode. You can also click the Hydraulics Button and then
select the appropriate analysis mode from the drop down list.

l Pressure: Pump Rate Range: Calculate pressure losses for each
section in the workstring, annulus, the surface equipment and bit,
and ECDs for a specified range of flowrates.
l Pressure: Pump Rate Fixed: Calculate pressure losses for each

section in the workstring, annulus, the surface equipment and bit
for one pump rate.
l Annular Velocity Analysis: Calculate annular velocities at

specified flowrates and the critical flowrates for each section in the
work string.
l Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule: Calculate a tripping schedule that

will not exceed a specified pressure change while moving the work
string in or out of the hole.

l Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD: Calculate the actual pressure and

ECD that will occur when the work string is tripped in or out of the
hole.
l Graphical Analysis: Examine the effects of changing flowrate and

TFA on a number of hydraulics parameters.
l Optimization Planning: Calculate the flowrate and nozzle

configuration to optimize bit hydraulics based on several common
criteria.
l Optimization Well Site: Determine nozzle configuration for

optimal hydraulics using recorded rig circulating pressures. These
calculations are based on Scott’s method, and uses only data
specified on the input dialog.
l Weight Up: Calculate the amount of weight up or dilution material

required to adjust mud weight to a specific value.
l Hole Cleaning Operational: Determine the cutting concentration

percentage, bed height, and critical transport velocity flow rate in
the wellbore using the current string, wellbore, fluid and survey.
l Hole Cleaning Parametric: Determine the cuttings concentration

percentage, bed height, and critical transport velocity flow rate for a
range of pump rates for all inclinations from 0 to 90 degrees (in five
degree increments). This mode uses data specified on the input
dialog, and does not use the current string, wellbore, or survey.

Using Pressure: Pump Rate Range Analysis Mode
The system pressure losses can be calculated for a range of flowrates.

All pressure losses are calculated using the Rheological Model selected
on the Fluid Editor. The calculations will be performed at the Minimum
and Maximum Flowrate you specify, as well as at each Increment
Flowrate specified, for a maximum of five flowrates on the reports. On
the ECD Depths dialog, you can specify up to five depths at which to
calculate ECD.
For each flowrate iteration, the following calculations will be

performed.
l bit hydraulic power
l ratio of bit hydraulic power to total cross-sectional area of the bit
l bit impact force
l bit nozzle velocity
l ECDs at user defined depths
Select Pressure Pump Rate Range Analysis Mode
Select desired
mode from drop
down list.
Entering Case Data

The Pump Rate Range analysis used the well data entered on the Case
menu, and the analysis data entered on the Parameter menu.

WELLPLAN modules, please refer to the Basics chapter of this manual.
The common Case menu options include: the General, Offshore,
Wellbore Editor, String Editor, and Deviation menu.
Case menu options for

Pump Rate Range
analysis

Use the Case →Fluid Editor tabs to specify the rheological model and
specify other basic characteristics about simple drilling muds, standard
drilling muds, or cement slurries. These tabs were discussed in the
Basics chapter of this manual.
The Fluid Editor dialog has three tabs:
l Standard Muds Tab - Use this tab to specify the basic characteristics
of simple or standard drilling muds.
l Cement Slurries Tab - Use this tab to specify basic cement slurry
characteristics.
l Fluid Selector Tab - Use this tab to select the fluid you want to use
in the analysis from a list of previously defined fluids.
Fluid Selector Tab

Use the Case→Fluid Editor→Fluid Selector tab to select the fluid you
want to use in the analysis. This list contains all fluids that were defined
for the case through the Standard Muds or Cement Slurries tabs.

Select the fluid you want to use

in the analysis from the drop
down list. This list will include all
fluids define on the Standard
Muds or Cement Slurries tabs.
This tab contains some of the

information defining the
selected fluid. For more details,
refer to the other tabs on the
Fluid Editor.
Specify the Undisturbed Temperature Profile

The effects of temperature on fluid rheology can be modelled within the
Hydraulics module. Entering data into the Case→Undisturbed
Temperature dialog is explained in the Basics Chapter of this manual.
Eccentricity
Use Case →Eccentricity spreadsheet to specify the eccentricity ratio of
the annuli at different depths. Eccentricity reduces the pressure drop for
annular flow.
The Hydraulics module will automatically calculate eccentricity using

the tool joint diameter regardless of what is entered in the eccentricity
spreadsheet. If you specify eccentricity in the spreadsheet, and the
calculated tool joint eccentricity is less than the specified eccentricity,
the internally calculated tool joint eccentricity will be used for the
engineering calculations. If you check the Concentric Annulus box, the
string will be centered in the wellbore regardless of the wellbore
deviation or the calculated tool joint eccentricity.

An eccentric annulus ratio is defined by specifying the displacement

from the centerline divided by the radial clearance outside the moving
pipe. You need to define the eccentricity for each annular section and
then its eccentric value. Define the annular section by specifying a depth
in the Depth cell for the row, and then specify an eccentric value for the
section. A value of zero is concentric and a value of 1 is fully eccentric.
You can use the WELLPLAN Torque Drag module Position Plot to
determine the position of the string in the wellbore. The position in the
wellbore can be used to determine the eccentricity. Remember, you
must use a stiff string analysis to be able to generate a Position plot.
Check the Concentric Annulus box to indicate the entire

string is concentric in the annulus. If this box is checked,
data in the spreadsheet will not be used.
Enter eccentricity =
1 to indicate string
positioned against
the wellbore
The Eccentriciy spreadsheet is only available when you are using the Herschel Bulkley
rheology model. Select the rheology model on the Case →Fluid Editor→Standard
Muds tab. If you are using the Herschel Bulkley rheology model, and the Eccentricity
spreadsheet is still not availble, try opening the Wellbore Editor and then reopening the
Eccentricity spreadsheet.

You can use the Case →Circulating System tabs to specify the surface
equipment configuration, maximum working pressure, and mud pump
information.
The Surface Equipment tab is designed to specify what surface

equipment is used, and what the rated maximum working pressure is.
You can use a predefined configuration, or define your own.

It is necessary to specify the surface equipment configuration because

this information is used to account for pressure losses incurred in the
pumps and the piping between the pumps and the workstring. If you
don’t specify a surface equipment configuration, you must specify the
pressure loss anticipated through the surface equipment.
Click the Specify

Pressure Loss radio Enter the rated
button to enter the maximum working
expected pressure pressure
loss through the
surface equipment.
Select the category
of surface equipment
Or, you can calculate that you want to use
the surface equipment from the drop down
pressure loss by list. You don’t need
clicking the Calculate to select or specify a
Pressure Loss radio surface equipment
button. configuration if you
specify the pressure
If you want to loss.
calculate the pressure
loss, you must select/
specify the surface
equipment
configuration.
The Case →Circulating System→Mud Pumps tab is used to define

working parameters of the available pumps. You can specify whether
the pump is active or inactive.

Check box to specify active pump
Insert a new row by entering data in

the next empty row, or by
highlighting a row and pressing the
Insert key on your keyboard.
Delete a row by highlighting it and

pressing the Delete key on your
keyboard.
Define Pump Rate Range

The Parameter →Rates dialog is used to specify pump information
that will be used to calculate system pressures losses for a range of pump
rates. The range of pump rates are determined by the Minimum,
Maximum, and Increment Pump Rate specified in the Pump Rate
section of the dialog. The Minimum Pump Rate specifies where the
pressure loss analysis calculations will begin. This rate will be increased
by the Increment Pump Rate until the Maximum Pump Rate is reached
or five rates (including the Minimum and Maximum Rates) have been
analyzed.
In the Pumping Constraints section of the dialog, enter the maximum

pump discharge pressure that the pump is capable of. If you are using
more than one pump, enter the minimum pump pressure of all active
pump’s maximum pump pressures. You must also enter the Maximum
Pump Power the pump can produce. Refer to the Pump Power
Calculations for more information.
Press the Default from Pump Data Button to use the Maximum Pump
Pressure, and Maximum Pump Power calculated from the information
entered on the Circulating System→Mud Pumps Tab. Refer to the Pump
Pressure Calculations or Pump Power Calculations for more
information. The Default from Pump Data button will not be available
if you have not specified a surface equipment configuration on the

Circulating System→Surface Equipment Tab, and indicated at least one

active pump on the Circulating System→Mud Pumps Tab.
Check the Include Tool Joint Pressure Losses box to include tool joint
pressure losses in the calculations. Tool joint pressure losses are
sometimes referred to as minor pressure losses. Pressure losses due to
tool joint upset in the annulus are accounted for in the calculations by
considering the cross-sectional area change in the annulus regardless of
whether or not this box is checked. However, in these calculations the
length of the tool joint is not considered.
Check the Use String Editor box to use the nozzle configuration
entered for the bit component on the String Editor. Click the Nozzles
button to gain access to the Nozzles Dialog. On this dialog, you may
view the nozzle configuration currently on the String Editor or you may
enter a different nozzle configuration for use in this analysis
Specify the range of pump rates to analyze
Enter pump data
Roughness affects friction pressure losses in turbulent flow

only. The nominal value of surface roughness for new steel
pipe is 0.0018 inches. Old or corroded pipe can have values
up to .0072 inches. This factor is more important in deep wells
using old tubulars.
Check box to include tool joint pressure losses
Mark this check box to update the fluid rheology using the
formation temperature defined in the Undisturbed
Temperature dialog.
Check box to use String Editor nozzles, or click the Nozzles

button to use other nozzles
Specify Nozzle Configuration

The Nozzles dialog is accessible via the Nozzles button. The Nozzles
dialog consists of two tabs. One tab displays the current nozzle
configuration specified on the String Editor, and the other tab allows
specification of different nozzle configurations for analysis. If a tested

nozzle configuration results are favorable, you may copy this

configuration to the bit specified in the String Editor.
The String tab displays the nozzle configuration specified on the String
Editor. You can change the String Editor nozzles using this tab.
Four nozzles sizes can be

specified and the Total Flow Area
will be calculated
Specify the Total Flow Area if you

want to use a certain TFA rather
than nozzles sizes.
The Local tab can be used to specify any nozzle configuration you want
to analyze. If you determine this configuration is optimal, then you may
copy the nozzle configuration to the String Editor. The advantage to
changing the nozzles using this tab rather than the String Tab is that the
String Editor nozzles will not be altered unless you click the Copy to
String Button.

Four nozzles sizes can be

specified and the Total Flow Area
will be calculated
Specify the Total Flow Area if you

want to use a certain TFA rather
than nozzles sizes.
Click to copy nozzles to String

Editor
Set ECD Calculation Depths

On the Parameter →ECD Depths dialog, enter up to five measured
depths you would like ECD (equivalent circulating density) calculated.
ECD may be calculated at any depth. Commonly ECD is calculated at
the last casing shoe. The ECD of the mud is the mud weight that would
exert the circulating pressures under static conditions at the specified
depth.
Enter up to five depths to calculated

ECD for
Analyzing Results
Results for the Pressure: Pump Rate Range analysis are presented in a
plot and a report. All results are available using the View Menu.

Plot
The Pressure Loss Plot displays the system pressure loss, as well as bit,
string and annulus pressure losses for the range of flowrates specified on
the Rates Dialog. Each curve on the graph represents one type of
pressure loss.
Pressure loss calculation are based on the rheological selected on the

Fluid Editor. Annular volumes are calculated based on information
entered on the String Editor and the Wellbore Editor.
Maximum pump pressure is

indicated on plot. The
maximum pump pressure is
input on the Case
→Circulating
System→Mud Pumps
tab.
Separate curves for bit,

string, annulus, and system
pressure losses
Report Options
The Report Options Dialog is used to specify what additional
include or exclude much of the information defining the case you are
analyzing.
Check boxes to include desired

information on the Pressure
Loss Report

Report
The Pressure Loss report will sum the total pressure loss and the
hydraulic power across each work string section, both inside the string
and in the annulus. For example, inside the work string, it calculates the
total pressure loss across the entire drill pipe section, then the HWDP
section, then the drill collar section. Similarly, in the annulus, it
calculates the pressure drop across the entire drill pipe section, the
HWDP section, etc. The pressure losses through the surface equipment
are shown along with the total system pressure loss at the specified flow
rate.
Finally, the report splits the annulus into separate sections based on a
change in either the wellbore effective diameter and/or a change in the
outside diameter of the work string. For each annular section, the report
displays the following information:
• Hole OD
• Pipe OD
• Pressure loss
• Average velocity
• Reynolds number
• Critical flowrate
l Flow regime (laminar, transitional, or turbulent)
This information is presented for each of the flow rates you specify.

Using Pressure: Pump Rate Fixed Analysis Mode
The pressures in the circulating system will be calculated at the flowrate

specified on the Rate Dialog using the rheological model selected on the
Fluid Editor. You can analyze the pressure (dynamic and static pressures
combined) at any depth from surface to TD in the work string, annulus
or the bit pressure. The static pressure losses are those due to the
hydrostatic pressure of the mud. The dynamic pressure losses are the
frictional pressure losses that occur during circulation of the mud at a
specified flow rate. You can analyze these pressure losses in the
Pressure Pump Rate Range report also. You can also analyze the ECD
(Equivalent Circulating Density) at any depth.
Starting Pressure Pump Rate Fixed Analysis Mode
Select Pump
Rate Fixed from
drop down list.
Entering Case Data

The Pump Rate Fixed analysis used the well data entered on the Case
menu, and the analysis data entered on the Parameter menu.
Refer to the Pressure: Pump Rate Range analysis mode for a detailed
description of the Fluid Editor, Undisturbed Temperature dialog,
Eccentricity spreadsheet, and the Circulating System Tabs.


The Case →Pore Pressure spreadsheet is used to define the pore
pressure profile as a function of depth. To specify a pore pressure point,
you must specify a TVD in the vertical depth cell, and a value in either
the pore pressure cell or the equivalent mud weight (EMW) cell. If you
set or change the value in the pore pressure cell, the EMW will be
automatically calculated and vice versa.
Each row defines

a separate pore
pressure region.

The Case →Frac Gradient spreadsheet is used to define the fracture
gradient profile as a function of depth. To specify a fracture pressure,
you must specify a TVD in the vertical depth cell, and a value in either
the fracture pressure cell or the equivalent mud weight (EMW) cell. If
you set or change the value in the fracture pressure cell, the EMW will
be automatically calculated and vice versa.
Each row defines

a separate
fracture gradient
region.
Define Pump Rate to Analyze

Pump Rate is the only input required, and is the only flowrate that will
be used to calculate the pressure losses. Pressure loss information can be
used to optimize hydraulics based on several optimization criteria.
A summary of the analysis results is displayed in the Quick Look

section. For more detail on the information presented in the Quick Look
section, refer to the online help.

Enter flowrate to analyze
Use String Editor nozzles, or specify

your own using the Nozzles Button
The Quick Look section displays a

summary of the analysis
Use this slider control to specify the

pump rate instead of entering a value
in the Pump Rate field located at the
top of this dialog. You can specify any
value between 1 and 2,500 gpm. The
value you define with this control is
displayed in the Pump Rate field.
Analyzing Results
In addition to the information in the Quick Look section, there are two
plots available. These plots are available via the View menu. One plot is
Pressure Loss vs. Measured Depth, and the other is ECD vs. Depth.
Plots
Pressure vs. Depth Plot

You can use this plot to display the combined (hydrostatic and
frictional) pressure losses through the workstring, annulus, or through
the bit at any depth in the wellbore. From this graph you will not be able
to determine what portion of the pressure loss results from static or
dynamic losses.
The plot also indicates the casing shoe setting depth, as well as the pore
pressure and fracture gradients for all measured depths in the wellbore.
The information presented on the plot pertains to the flowrate you

specified on the Rate Dialog. The pressure losses are calculated based
on the rheological method specified on the Fluid Editor. The shoe

setting depth is retrieved from the Wellbore Editor, and the pore
pressure and fracture gradient information is found on the Pore Pressure
and Fracture Gradient Editors.
Annular pressure
is between the
pore and fracture
pressures.
Casing shoe
Bit pressure loss
Use the slider to

change flowrate if
you want to
analyze another
rate.
ECD vs. Depth Plot

Use this plot to determine the equivalent circulating density (ECD) in
the annulus at any measured depth in the wellbore. The plot will display
the pore pressure and fracture gradient expressed as a density for all
measured depths. The shoe setting measured depth will also be
indicated.
The ECD is the density that would exert the circulating pressure under
static conditions. The pore pressure and fracture gradients are displayed
as density to facilitate comparison.
The pressure losses are calculated based on the rheological method

specified on the Fluid Editor. The shoe setting depth is retrieved from
the Wellbore Editor, and the pore pressure and fracture gradient
information is found on the Pore Pressure and Fracture Gradient Editors

ECD in the annulus for

the current flowrate
Pore pressure
Casing shoe

Using Annular Velocity Analysis Mode
Annular Velocity can be used to determine the flow regime and critical
velocity for each section in the annulus for a range of flow rates. Critical
velocity is the velocity resulting from the critical flow rate. For the
Power Law and Bingham Plastic rheology models the critical flow rate
is the flow rate required to produce a Reynold’s number greater than the
critical Reynold’s number for laminar flow. The Reynold’s number is
dependent on mud properties, the velocity the mud is traveling, and on
the effective diameter of the work string, or annulus the mud is flowing
through. Based on the calculated Reynold’s number and the rheological
model you are using, it is possible to determine the flow regime of the
mud. For regimes where the Reynold’s number lies between the critical
values for laminar and turbulent flow, a state of transitional flow exists.
For the Herschel-Bulkley rheology model the critical flow rate is the
flow rate required to exceed the Ga number corresponding to laminar
flow. The Ga number is dependent on mud properties, the velocity the
mud is traveling, and on the effective diameter of the work string, or
annulus the mud is flowing through. Based on the calculated Ga number
and the rheological model you are using, it is possible to determine the
flow regime of the mud. For regimes where the Ga number lies between
the critical values for laminar and turbulent flow, a state of transitional
flow exists.
Select Annular Velocity Analysis Mode
Select Annular
Velocity from drop
down list.
Entering Case Data

The Annular Velocity analysis uses the well data entered on the Case
Menu, and the analysis data entered on the Parameter Menu.

Since all options on the Case Menu items are common to all
description of the Fluid Editor.
Define Pump Rates to Analyze

The Rates Dialog is used to enter the range of flowrates to analyze.
Up to 15 flow rates can be

analyzed.
Analyzing Results
The analysis results are available via the View Menu.
Plots
Annular Velocity Plot

Use this plot to determine the velocity of the fluid in the annulus for any
measured depth in the wellbore for the range of flow rates you specified
on the Rates Dialog. This graphical analysis calculates the annular
velocity across each annulus section and compares the profile with the
critical velocity. Note that when an annular velocity curve crosses the
critical velocity curve, then the flow regime for that annulus section
moves from laminar to either transitional or turbulent flow.
The fluid velocity is calculated based on the rheological model selected

on the Fluid Editor. Cross-sectional flow areas are determined from
information input on the String Editor, and the Wellbore Editor.

Annular Velocity vs
Measured Depth for
each flowrate
analyzed
Annular velocity exceeding laminar flow
Annular Pump Rate Plot

Use this plot to determine the pump rate that will result in fluid flow
outside of the laminar flow regime for any depth in the wellbore. Pump
rates greater than the critical flow rate curve at any depth indicate that
the flow regime moves out of laminar flow and into transitional or
turbulent flow. You will not be able to determine from the graph
whether the flow is transitional or turbulent.
The calculations are based on the rheological model selected on the

Fluid Editor. Cross-sectional flow areas are determined from
information input on the String Editor, and the Wellbore Editor.

Pump rates (at a given

measured depth)
greater than the
Critical Pump Rate will
result in transitional or
turbulent flow
Table
Annulus Information Table

This table contains pressure loss, and critical flow rates for a range of
specified flowrates. You can use this table to determine the flow regime,
critical pump rate, annular velocity, and pressure loss for all annular
cross-sectional areas.
This table presents information calculated based on the range of

flowrates specified on the Rates Dialog, Fluid Editor, String Editor,
Survey Editor and the Wellbore Editor.

Flow rates are specified

Calculated using the Flow regimes can be
on the Rates dialog.
rheology model specified turbulent, laminar, or
on Fluid Editor. transition.

Using Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule
The Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule analysis assists with determining

the rate to trip in or out of the hole without exceeding a pressure change
(Allowable Trip Margin) you specify. The surge or swab pressure
changes in the well can be calculated with or without flow through an
open-ended workstring, or without flow through a closed-ended
workstring. You must specify the length of a stand of drill pipe or
casing, and the Allowable Trip Margin. The Allowable Trip Margin is
the maximum change in ECD at the bit, or casing shoe that you are
willing to accept. Specifying a large value will allow large tripping
speeds, whereas a low value will only allow low tripping speeds.
Moving a work string is accompanied by a displacement of the mud in

the hole that can result in pressure changes. Depending on the direction
of the string movement, and the resulting mud displacement, these
changes may add to the pressure exerted by the mud. If the pipe
movement is downward, this may result in a surge pressure. If the pipe
movement is upward, the changes may act in the opposite direction and
produce a swab effect. These pressure changes may impair the stability
of the hole through removal of the filter cake, or may even result in a
blowout by dropping below the pore pressure, or lost circulation by
exceeding the fracture pressure and fracturing the formation.
Starting Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule Analysis
Select Swab/Surge Tripping

Schedule from drop down list.
Entering Case Data

The Swab/Surge Tripping Schedule analysis used the well data entered
on the Case Menu, and the analysis data entered on the Parameter Menu.

For discussion on the Case Menu items that are common to all
The common Case Menu options include: the General, Offshore,
Wellbore Editor, String Editor, Fluid Editor, and Deviation Menu.

information.
description of the Circulating System Tabs.
Define Analysis Constraints

Enter data in the Parameter →Operations Data dialog box to specify
the conditions you want to use to calculate a Surge/Swab Tripping
Schedule. For both swab and surge analysis, you can use a closed or
open ended string by checking the appropriate boxes. You may perform
an analysis with the end open and closed at the same time. If you are
using an open ended string, you may also specify a flowrate. The stand
length is used to used to calculate the tripping schedule as time per
stand.
Check the Use String Editor Box to use the nozzle configuration entered
for the bit component on the String Editor. Press the Nozzles Button to
gain access to the Nozzles Dialog. On this dialog, you may view the
nozzle configuration currently on the String Editor or you may enter a
different nozzle configuration for use in this analysis.

Enter the maximum pressure change

that you will allow during tripping out
of the hole.
Enter the length of a stand of

drillpipe.

Analyzing Results
Report Options
analyzing. Refer to the Pressure: Pump Rate Range analysis mode
discussion for more detail.
Report
Swab/Surge Report
This report indicates the minimum allowable trip time per stand of pipe
based on an allowable trip margin specified in ppg or psi. Depending on
the situation, there could be one value for all stands or there could be a
number of values for different sets of stands.
If you specify a high value for the allowable trip margin, it is possible
that the minimum time per stand (10 seconds) will not reach the
allowable trip margin. In that case, the trip schedule produced will
indicate that all stands can be tripped at the minimum time per stand.
Conversely, if you specify a very small value for the allowable trip
margin, it is possible that even at the maximum time per stand (200
seconds), the allowable trip margin will still be exceeded. In that case,

the trip schedule will show that all stands should be tripped at the
maximum time per stand (200 seconds).

Using Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD Analysis

Mode
The Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD analysis assists with determining

the pressures and ECD at the bit, casing shoe and bottom of the hole as
the pipe is tripped in or out of the hole at speeds ranging from 10 seconds
per stand to 200 seconds per stand. The pressure and ECD calculations
can be performed with or without flow through an open ended
workstring, or without flow through a closed ended workstring. You
must specify the length of a stand of drill pipe.
Moving a work string is accompanied by a displacement of the mud in

the hole that can result in pressure changes. Depending on the direction
of the string movement, and the resulting mud displacement, these
changes may add to the pressure exerted by the mud. If the pipe
movement is downward, this may result in a surge pressure. If the pipe
movement is upward, the changes may act in the opposite direction and
produce a swab effect. These pressure changes may impair the stability
of the hole through removal of the filter cake, or may even result in a
blowout by dropping below the pore pressure or lost circulation by
exceeding the fracture pressure and fracturing the formation.
Starting Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD Analysis Mode
Select Swab/Surge
Pressure and ECD from
mode data drop down
list.
Entering Case Data

The Swab/Surge Pressure and ECD analysis used the well data entered
on the Case menu, and the analysis data entered on the Parameter menu.

Wellbore Editor, String Editor, Fluid Editor, and Deviation menu.

information.
Defining Operations Constraints

Enter data in the Parameter →Operations Data dialog box to specify
the conditions you want to use to calculate a Surge/Swab Tripping
Schedule. For both swab and surge analysis, you can use a closed or
open ended string by checking the appropriate boxes. You may perform
an analysis with the end open and closed at the same time. If you are
using an open ended string, you may also specify a flowrate. The stand
length is used to used to calculate the tripping schedule as time per
stand.
Check the Use String Editor Box to use the nozzle configuration
entered for the bit component on the String Editor. Press the Nozzles
Button to gain access to the Nozzles Dialog. On this dialog, you may
view the nozzle configuration currently on the String Editor or you may
enter a different nozzle configuration for use in this analysis.
Check closed if you don’t want fluid

flow through the pipe.
Enter the length of a stand of

drillpipe.


Analyzing Results
Plots
There are four available plots: Swab Open End, Swab Closed End Surge
Open End and Surge Closed End. Use these plots to determine the
pressures and ECD (equivalent circulating density) to expect for trip
speeds ranging from zero to 200 seconds per stand while tripping in or
out. These plots pertains to swabbing or surging with an open or closed
ended workstring. If the workstring is open ended, you may specify a
flow rate through the string on the Operations Data Dialog. If you
specified a flow rate greater than zero, the calculated pressure and ECD
will include the effects of this flow rate.
These plots will display the pressure and ECD at the bit, at the casing
shoe (as the bit passes the shoe) and at total depth (TD).
If the bit is at total depth (TD), the curves will overlay, and it may appear
that the curves are missing from the plot.
The bit depth is obtained from the String Editor, and the stand length is
specified on the Operations Data Dialog. The casing shoe depth is
retrieved from the Wellbore Editor.
You may want to review the Swab/Surge report for additional

information.
ECD values read

on this scale
X-axis is time
per stand
Pressure read on this scale

Report Options
Report
Swab/Surge Report
This report indicates the minimum allowable trip time per stand of pipe.
Depending on the situation, there could be one value for all stands or
there could be a number of values for different sets of stands.
If you specify a high value for the allowable trip margin, it is possible
that the minimum time per stand (10 seconds) will not reach the
allowable trip margin. In that case, the trip schedule produced will
indicate that all stands can be tripped at the minimum time per stand.
Conversely, if you specify a very small value for the allowable trip
margin, it is possible that even at the maximum time per stand (200
seconds), the allowable trip margin will still be exceeded. In that case,
the trip schedule will show that all stands should be tripped at the
maximum time per stand (200 seconds).

Using Graphical Analysis Mode
Using the Graphical Analysis mode, you can determine the optimum
flow rate and TFA resulting from specified criteria by examining a
series of available graphs. The range of flowrates over which to perform
the analysis begins at a very low flowrate, and is limited on the high end
by the specified pump limits. Bit TFA (total flow area) is determined by
using a calculated pressure loss at the bit, and the flowrate. The impact
force, nozzle velocity and the hydraulic horsepower at the bit are
calculated once the TFA, pressure loss at the bit and the flowrate are
determined.
Starting Graphical Analysis Mode
Select Graphical Analysis

from drop down list.
Entering Case Data

The Graphical Analysis mode uses the well data entered on the Case
Menu, and the analysis data entered on the Parameter Menu.

information.

Enter Pump Specifications

Enter data in the Parameter →Pump Limits dialog box to specify the
pump constraints that will be used as a basis for the Graphical Analysis.
The Maximum Pump Pressure is the total system pressure loss. This
pressure loss will be used to determine the flowrate based on the
pressure loss calculations that pertain to the rheological model you have
selected.
The Maximum Pump Power establishes a boundary condition that will

be displayed as a line on the graphical output from this analysis.
Click the Default from Pump Data button to use the Maximum Pump
Pressure, and Maximum Pump Power calculated from the information
entered on the Circulating System, Mud Pumps Tab. Refer to the Mud
Pump Calculations or Pump Power Calculations for more information.
The Default from Pump Data button will not be available if you have
not specified a surface equipment configuration on the Circulating
System, Surface Equipment Tab, and indicated at least one active pump
on the Circulating System, Mud Pumps Tab.
Click Default from Pump

Data button to default from
active pumps
Analyzing Results
Plots
All results are displayed in plots.

Velocity at Bit Plot

Use this plot to determine the velocity of the fluid through the bit for a
range of flow rates and varied total flow area (TFA). The following steps
can be used to determine the TFA for a specified flowrate or vice versa.
1. Look at the plot and determine the pump rate (x axis) and
corresponding TFA (right side Y axis). Keep in mind the pump rate
your pump(s) can produce.
2. Determine the velocity (left side Y axis) that corresponds to the

pump rate and TFA determined in Step 1.
The pump rate begins at zero and increases until the flow rate results in
parasitic pressure losses equal to 100% of the total system pressure loss.
(Essentially this case results in zero pressure loss at the bit.)
The bit velocity is calculated by first determining the pressure loss

through the bit. Pressure loss calculations are based on the rheological
model selected on the Fluid Editor, and assume the total system pressure
loss is equal to the maximum pump pressure entered on the Pump Limits
Dialog. Based on the total system pressure loss, as well as the
workstring, fluid, and wellbore information entered into the String
Editor, Fluid Editor, and Wellbore Editor, we can determine the pressure
loss at the bit. Knowing the pressure loss at the bit, and the flow rate the
TFA can be calculated. From this, the velocity at the bit can be
determined.
This plot is used to

determine the bit
velocity and
required flowrate or
TFA given a
flowrate or TFA.
The bit velocity is 490 ft/s for a flowrate of

411 gpm and a TFA of .270 sq. inches.

Power Per Area Plot

Use this plot to determine the power per area through the bit for a range
of flow rates and varied total flow area (TFA). The following steps can
be used to determine the TFA, and pump rate required to maximize bit
power per area.
1. Look at the plot and determine the pump rate (x axis) corresponding
to the TFA in the legend.
2. Determine the Power/Area (right side Y axis) that corresponds to

the pump rate determined in Step 1. If the pumps you are using are
not capable of producing this pump rate, use the maximum pump
rate the pumps can produce.
The power per area is calculated by first determining the pressure loss
TFA can be calculated. From this, the power per area of the bit can be
determined.

Read maximum
power per area and
corresponding
pump rate from plot
Read the TFA for the maximum power/area in the legend. Using this TFA,
read the pump rate. Use this pump rate to read the power/area.
Impact Force Plot

Use this plot to determine the impact force of the fluid through the bit
for a range of flow rates and varied total flow area (TFA). The following
steps can be used to determine the TFA, and pump rate required to
maximize the impact force at the bit.
2. Determine the Power/Area (right side Y axis) that corresponds to

the pump rate determined in Step 1. If the pumps you are using are
not capable of producing this pump rate, use the maximum pump
rate the pumps can produce.
The impact force is calculated by first determining the pressure loss



TFA can be calculated. From this, the impact force at the bit can be
determined.
Read maximum
impact force and
corresponding
pump rate from
plot using the
TFA in the
legend.
Read the TFA for the maximum power/area in the legend. Using this TFA,
read the pump rate. Use this pump rate to read the power/area.
Power Plot
Use this plot to determine the power of the fluid through the bit for a
range of flow rates and varied total flow area (TFA). The following steps
can be used to determine the TFA, and pump rate required to maximize
power at the bit.
2. Determine the Power (right side Y axis) that corresponds to the

pump rate determined in Step 1. If the pumps you are using are not
capable of producing this pump rate, use the maximum pump rate
the pumps can produce.

The power at the bit is calculated by first determining the pressure loss
TFA can be calculated. From this, the power at the bit can be
determined.
For any given

flowrate, the parasitic
pressure loss plus the
bit pressure loss is
equal to total system
pressure loss.
Using the TFA in the

legend, read the
flowrate. Use this
flowrate to determine
the maximum bit
power.
Pressure Loss Plot

Use this plot to determine the pressure loss through the bit for a range of
flow rates and varied total flow area (TFA). The following steps can be
used to determine the TFA, and pump rate required to achieve a certain
pressure loss at the bit.
to the desired pressure loss at the bit (left side Y axis).
2. Determine the TFA (right side Y axis) that corresponds to the pump
rate determined in Step 1.

(Essentially this case results in zero pressure loss at the bit.) On this
particular plot, the combined pressure loss through the bit plus the
parasitic pressure loss should equal the total system pressure loss.
The first step in this analysis is determining the pressure loss through the
bit. Pressure loss calculations are based on the rheological model
selected on the Fluid Editor, and assume the total system pressure loss
is equal to the maximum pump pressure entered on the Pump Limits
TFA can be calculated.
For any flowrate the

parasitic pressure loss
plus bit pressure
losses equal the total
system pressure loss
Using the desired bit

pressure loss, read
the required flowrate
and TFA. Or, use the
TFA and read the
required flowrate and
pressure loss.
Power vs. Impact Force Plot

Use this plot to determine the maximum impact force, or bit power per
area for a range of flow rates.
to the maximum impact force, or bit power per area.
2. Read the corresponding impact force or bit power per area from the
other curve on the plot.

The first step in this analysis is determining the pressure loss through the
bit. Pressure loss calculations are based on the rheological model
selected on the Fluid Editor, and assume the total system pressure loss
is equal to the maximum pump pressure entered on the Pump Limits
TFA can be calculated. From this information, the impact force or bit
power per are can be calculated.
Read maximum impact force and

corresponding bit power/area and pump rate
Read maximum
bit power/area
and
corresponding
impact force and
pump rate

Using Optimization Planning Analysis Mode
The Hydraulics module offers three different methods for optimizing

hydraulics. Optimization Planning is one of these methods, and
Graphical Analysis and Optimization Well Site are the other two. The
optimization methods available in Optimization Planning include:
maximum nozzle velocity, maximum impact force, maximum hydraulic
horsepower, and percent pressure loss at the bit.
Using this analysis mode, the flowrate and nozzle configuration will be
determined to achieve optimization with respect to one of the following
methods:
• maximum hydraulic horsepower

• maximum jet impact force
• maximum nozzle velocity
• percent system pressure loss at the bit
The flowrate and nozzles are calculated to fully use the available pump
pressure. Pump pressure is considered to be the sum of parasitic losses
(losses in the work string, annulus and in the surface lines) and the
pressure drop over the bit and is equal to the maximum pump pressure.
After the true optimum flowrate is determined, it may be increased
slightly to utilize all of the available pump pressure.
You can specify a Minimum Annular Velocity that will serve as a lower
boundary for the flowrate. At no point in the annulus will the flowrate
be lower than the specified minimum flowrate. The minimum annular
velocity will occur in the widest annulus section. Imposing this rule on
the optimization may result in a flowrate that does not generate the
optimum bit hydraulics.
You can also specify that turbulence in the annulus is not allowed, thus
putting a limit on the maximum flowrate. Specifying that turbulence is
not allowed always limits the calculated flowrate. Even if the flowrate
is less than the true optimum or if it forces a velocity that is less than the
specified Minimum Annular Velocity.. Imposing this rule on the
optimization may result in a flowrate that does not generate the optimum
bit hydraulics.
The calculation determines the nozzle sizes based on the number of

nozzles specified that will as closely as possible provide the required
TFA. You can restrict the freedom in nozzle selection by specifying a

non-zero value for Minimum Nozzle Size or by specifying another

number of nozzles. The final TFA may not be the exact optimal TFA
after the nozzle configuration is determined.
As discussed, the result of the calculations (flowrate and nozzles) may

not necessarily match the optimum solution, but may be restricted by the
imposed limitations. To remove all restrictions that you have control
over, you may:
• Check the Allow Turbulence in the Annulus box.

• Specify the Minimum Annular Velocity to be zero.
• Specify the Minimum Nozzle Size to be zero.
Selecting Optimization Planning Analysis
Select Optimization Planning

Entering Case Data

The Optimization Planning analysis mode uses the well data entered on
the Case Menu, and the analysis data entered on the Parameter Menu.

information.

Specify Solution Constraints

Enter data in the Input section of the Parameter →Solution
Constraints dialog box, and a summary of the results will be displayed
in the Quick Look section. Results displayed in the Quick Look section
indicate the pump rate and nozzle configuration required to optimize
hydraulics based on several optimization methods, including: Impact
Force, Hydraulic Horsepower, Nozzle Velocity and Percent Pressure
Loss at Bit.
The Minimum Annular Velocity is used as a lower boundary for the

flowrate. At no point in the annulus will the flowrate be lower than the
specified minimum annular velocity. The minimum annular velocity
will occur in the widest annulus section.
You can specify the number and minimum size of nozzles (maximum of
four nozzles sizes) that you want to use during the hydraulics
optimization. The calculations attempt to determine a combination of
nozzle sizes that match as closely as possible the calculated required
TFA. To minimize the restrictions on nozzle selection, specify zero for
the Minimum Nozzle Size.

Input section
Minimum annular velocity

occurs in widest annular
section
Click to default pump data

from Circulating System-
Mud Pumps Tab
Check to include tool joint

pressure losses
Check to allow turbulent

flow
Quick Look (results)

section
Use this slider control to specify the minimum annular velocity instead of
entering a value in the Minimum Annular Velocity field located above this slider
and at the top of this dialog. The value you define with this control is displayed
in both fields.
Set ECD Calculation Depths

In the Parameter →ECD Depths dialog, enter up to five measured
depths you would like ECD (equivalent circulating density) calculated.
ECD may be calculated at any depth. Commonly ECD is calculated at
the last casing shoe. The ECD of the mud is the mud weight that would
exert the circulating pressures under static conditions at the specified
depth. For more detail, refer to the on-line help or to the Pressure:Pump
Rate Range analysis mode discussion in this chapter.
Analyzing Results
Report Options

Reports
There are several analysis reports available, including:
l Maximum Nozzle Velocity Report
l Maximum HHP Report
l Maximum Impact Force Report
l % Pressure Loss at Bit Report
Use these reports for a detailed view of the Quick Look results. These
reports contain the results of optimizing hydraulics based on maximum
nozzle velocity. Each report contains:
• The flowrate to maximize nozzle velocity, HHP, impact force, or

the flowrate to achieve the specified pressure loss at the bit.
• The nozzle configuration to result in the required flowrate.
• Calculations using the optimal flowrate for Hydraulic Horsepower/
bit area, Hydraulic Horsepower, Impact Force, and Nozzle Velocity.
• ECD’s at the depths specified on the ECD Depths Dialog.
• Calculated pressure losses for the system, workstring, annulus and
bit.
l Tabular information for a range of bit depths including: workstring
OD, hole ID, fluid velocity, critical velocity, and flow regime.
The calculations use the mud information input on the Fluid Editor and
determines annular volumes based on data input on the String Editor and
the Wellbore Editor. Analysis constraints are specified on the Solution
Constraints Dialog.

Using Optimization Well Site Analysis Mode
The Hydraulics module offers three different methods for optimizing

hydraulics. Optimization Well Site is one of these methods, and
Graphical Analysis and Optimization Planning are the other two.
Optimization Well Site is based on Scott’s method for determining bit

nozzle size using actual recorded rig circulating pressures. Refer to the
References section in this chapter for more information about Scott’s
method. All calculations are performed using only the input parameters
from the Well Site Data Dialog. The work string, wellbore, survey or
fluid data entered through the Case Menu is not used. Therefore, the
results will be different than the results calculated using one of the other
methods.
The model requires the flow rate and pressure results from a low
flowrate and high flowrate system pressure test. From these results, the
optimum flowrate and total flow area are determined, and maximum
impact force and hydraulic horsepower are calculated.
Starting Optimization Well Site Analysis
Select Optimization Well Site

Enter Case Data

The Optimization Well Site analysis mode does not use the well data
entered on the Case Menu. All analysis date is entered on the Parameter
→Well Site Data dialog box.

General Dialog is
only option
Enter Analysis Dialog

Enter data in the Input section of the Parameter →Well Site Data
dialog box, and the results will be displayed in the Quick Look section.
Results displayed in the Quick Look section indicate the pump rate and
nozzle configuration required to optimize hydraulics based on Impact
Force, or Hydraulic Horsepower.
All analysis results are displayed in Quick

Look Section.
All analysis date is

input on this dialog.

Using Weight Up Analysis Mode
The weight up calculation will determine the amount of material

required to increase or to lower your mud weight to a desired weight.
You must specify the desired mud weight, the specific gravity of the
weight adjusting additive, and the surface volume. Internal pipe and
annulus volumes will be calculated based on information input for the
work string, and wellbore through the Case Menu.
Starting Weight Up Analysis
Select Weight
Up from the
drop down list.
Enter Case Data

The Weight Up analysis mode uses the well data entered on the Case
menu, and the analysis data entered on the Parameter menu. The
analysis assumes that the current mud weight is specified in the Fluid
Editor dialog. This analysis uses the existing workstring entered in the
String Editor spreadsheet and the wellbore entered in the Wellbore
Editor spreadsheet to determine volumes.
Enter Analysis Data and Calculate Data

You can use the Parameter →Weight Up Data dialog to calculate the
amount of weight up or dilution material required to increase or to
decrease your existing mud weight to another weight. This analysis
assumes that the current mud weight is specified on the Fluid Editor.

This analysis uses the existing workstring entered on the String Editor,
and the wellbore entered on the Wellbore Editor to determine volumes.
You must specify the surface volume, as this information is not entered
elsewhere in the module.
This volume will be added to the

calculated volumes for the internal
workstring, annulus, and any open hole
volume below the bit to get the total
system volume

Using Hole Cleaning Operational Analysis Mode
The Hydraulics module offers two hole cleaning analysis modes. These
modes are Hole Cleaning Parametric and Hole Cleaning Operational.
Both modes. Although both modes are based on the same theory, the
results and usage of the modes are different. You should use the
Operational analysis first to analyze your current Case. After
performing the Operational analysis, you may want to study the effects
of varying parameters using the Hole Cleaning Parametric analysis
mode.
The following discussion pertains to the Operational mode. For more

information on the Parametric mode, refer to the section in this manual
titled Using Hole Cleaning Parametric Analysis Mode.
The operational analysis determines the percentage of cuttings in the

annulus of the current active case. The cuttings concentration
percentage, bed height, and minimum flow rate to avoid bed formation
is determined from the current inclination, annular diameters and other
Case data.
Information entered on the Fluid Editor, String Editor, Survey Editor,

and Wellbore Editor will be used to calculate annular volumes and hole
inclination.
Starting Hole Cleaning Operational Analysis
Select Hole Cleaning

Operational from the drop
down list.
Enter Case Data

The Hole Cleaning Operational analysis mode uses the well data entered
on the Case Menu, and the analysis data entered on the Parameter Menu.

Enter Analysis Data

The Parameter →Transport Analysis Data dialog is used to specify
the analysis parameters that will be used in the Hole Cleaning
Operational analysis.
Normal range is 0.1 to .25 inches
Enter the specific gravity of the

formation being drilled
A typical estimate of the porosity of

the cuttings bed is 36%
Analyzing Results
Plot
Operational Plot
This plot presents the following for each measured depth in the
wellbore:
• Inclination
• Minimum flowrate to avoid cuttings formation
• Suspended cuttings volume
• Bed height

The bed height and cuttings volume portions of the plot are calculated
using the flowrate specified on the Transport Analysis Data Dialog
(Operational). The minimum flowrate, and inclinations portions of the
plot are independent of the specified flowrate.
If there is a bed height forming, the total cuttings volume will begin to
become greater than the suspended cuttings volume in that portion of the
wellbore. Also, you will notice that the bed height begins to form when
the minimum flowrate to avoid bed formation for a section of the well is
greater than the flowrate specified on the Transport Analysis Data
Dialog (Operational). In order to avoid the formation of a cuttings bed
in that portion of the well, you must increase the specified flowrate to a
rate greater than the minimum flowrate to avoid bed formation.
Use the Rate of Penetration slider control to specify the rate at which
the formation is being drilled. This value is used to determine the
amount of cuttings produced per time increment — in effect a cuttings
flow rate. When you specify a value here it has the same effect as
specifying a value in the Rate of Penetration field in the Transport
Analysis Data dialog. The new value you specify with the slider will
appear in the Rate of Penetration field the next time you open the
Transport Data dialog.
This analysis uses the data input on the Fluid Editor, String Editor,
Survey Editor, Wellbore Editor and the Transport Analysis
(Operational) Data Dialog.

Read each plot

using the same Y
axis.
Rate of Penetration slider can be used to change the ROP and immediately
view the results in the plots. The ROP used in the plots is specified here.
Report
Report Options

Operational Report
The report is a tabular representation of the information available on the
Operational Plot, as well as some additional information. From the
report, you can determine the minimum pump rate (flow rate when a
cuttings bed will begin to form). For the flow rate specified on the
Transport Analysis Data Dialog (Operational), you can also determine
the cuttings volume, bed height, and equivalent mud weight over the
entire wellbore using the MD Calculation Interval you specify on the
Transport Analysis Data Dialog (Operational).

Using Hole Cleaning Parametric Analysis Mode
The Hydraulics module offers two hole cleaning analysis modes. These
modes are Hole Cleaning Parametric and Hole Cleaning Operational.
Although both modes are based on the same theory, the results and
usage of the modes are different. You should use the Operational
analysis first to analyze your current Case. After performing the
Operational analysis, you may want to study the effects of varying
parameters using the Hole Cleaning Parametric analysis mode.
The following discussion pertains to the Parametric analysis mode. For

more information on the Operational mode, refer to the section in this
manual titled Using Hole Cleaning Operational Analysis Mode.
The Parametric analysis mode does not use the information entered into
the wellbore, survey or workstring editors. This mode does use the PV,
YP and fluid density entered in the Fluid Editor. All other required
information is entered on the Transport Analysis (Parametric) Data
Dialog.
This analysis mode can be used to evaluate a proposed mud scheme (PV,
YP and density) for a range of flow rates and hole angles. This mode can
be used to illustrate the relationship of mud carrying capacity with hole
angle and flow rate. The parametric mode assumes the well has constant
wellbore and string geometry (constant annulus diameter, pipe diameter,
and joint diameter) and performs the hole cleaning analysis for the range
of flow rates specified over the inclination range from 0 to 90 degrees.
Starting Hole Cleaning Parametric Analysis
Select Hole Cleaning

Parametric from the drop
down list.

Enter Case Data

The Hole Cleaning Parametric analysis mode uses only the Fluid Editor
data entered on the Case Menu, and the analysis data entered on the
Parameter→Transport Analysis Data dialog. Data entered on the
General Dialog is for information only.
For discussion on the Fluid Editor, please refer to the Basics chapter of
this manual.
Entering Transport Analysis Data

The Parameter →Transport Analysis Data dialog is used to specify
the analysis parameters that will be used in the Hole Cleaning
Parametric analysis. Although this analysis uses the fluid entered on the
Fluid Editor, it does not use the information entered on the String Editor
or on the Wellbore Editor.
Normal range is 0.1 to .25 inches
Enter the porosity of the cuttings bed

on the lowside of the hole. A typical
estimate is 36%
Defines the range of pump rates that

will be analyzed

Analyzing Results
Plots
Total Volume % Plot

Use this plot to estimate the percentage of the annular volume that will
be filled with cuttings for a range of wellbore inclinations from zero to
90 degrees. Total volume includes cuttings suspended in the drilling
fluid, and cuttings forming a bed.
The parametric analysis uses only the data input on the Transport
Analysis (Parametric) Data Dialog, and the fluid information input on
the Fluid Editor.
Separate curve for

each pump rate
analyzed
Suspended Volume % Plot

Use this plot to determine the percentage of the annular volume filled
with cuttings suspended in the drilling fluid. The suspended volume
does not include cuttings lying in the hole and forming a bed.
This plot analyzes a range of wellbore inclination from zero to 90

degrees. The parametric analysis uses only the data input on the

Transport Analysis (Parametric) Data Dialog, and the fluid information

input on the Fluid Editor.
Separate curve for

each pump rate
analyzed
Min. Flowrate Plot

The critical flowrate is the flowrate at which a cuttings bed will begin to
form. In order to prevent cuttings from forming a bed, you should
maintain a flowrate greater than the critical flowrate.
This graph analyzes wellbore inclinations ranging from zero to 90

degrees. The parametric analysis uses only the data input on the
Transport Analysis (Parametric) Data Dialog, and the fluid information
input on the Fluid Editor.

Minimum pump
rate to avoid
cuttings bed
formation for
range of hole
angles
Bed Height Plot

From this graph, you can determine the cuttings bed height in the
annulus for any wellbore inclination ranging from 0 to 90 degrees.
The parametric analysis uses only the data input on the Transport
Analysis (Parametric) Data Dialog, and the fluid information input on
the Fluid Editor.
Use this plot to

determine the bed
height for various
flowrates and hole
inclinations. For
example, a bed
height of 1.997
inches is expected
with a flowrate of
200gpm and a
hole inclination of
20 degrees.

The calculations and information in this section are presented in

alphabetical order using the calculation or topic name. The material
contained in this section is intended to provide you more detailed
information and calculations pertaining to many of the steps presented
during the descriptions of the analysis mode methodologies.
require, please refer to the section titled References for additional
sources of information pertaining to the topic you are interested in.
Backreaming Rate (Maximum) Calculation
 Qcrit | DP 
BR max = ROP max 
 (Qcrit | DP − Qmud ) 
Where:
BR max = Maximum backreaming rate (ft/hr)
ROP max = Maximum rate of penetration (ft/hr)
Qcrit = Critical flow rate (gpm)
Qmud = Mud flow rate (gpm)
DC = Drill collar ID (in)
DP = Drill pipe ID (in)
Bingham Plastic Rheology Model
Shear Stress – Shear Rate Model
τ = τ y + Kγ

Average Velocity in Pipe
 4  Q 
V p =   2 
 π  D 
Average Velocity in Annulus
 4  Q 
Va =   
2 
π
  DH − DP 
2
Apparent Viscosity for Annulus
 DH 2 − DP 2 
PVaa = PV + 62.674773(YP )(DH − DP ) 

 Q 
Apparent Viscosity for Pipe
 D3 
PVap = PV + 62.674773(YP ) 
 Q 
Modified Reynolds Number for Annulus
 
Ra = 1895.2796( ρ )(DH − DP )
Q 
 aa H (
 PV D 2 − D 2
P ) 


Modified Reynolds Number for Pipe
 Q 
R p = 1895.2796( ρ ) 
 PV D 
 ap 
Pressure Loss in Annulus

If Ra > 2000 , then
Pa =
( )(
.0012084581 ρ .75 PV .25 Q1.75 L )( )
(DH − DP )
1.25
(D H
2
− DP )
2 1.75
If laminar flow, then
  YP   .0008488263(PV )Q 
Pa = (.053333333)  +   L
  DH − DP
 2 2
(
  (D H − D P ) D H − D P
2
) 

Pressure Loss in Pipe

If R p > 2000 , then
Pp =
( )(
.0012084581 ρ .75 PV .25 Q 1.75 L )( )
D 4.75
If laminar flow, then
  YP   .0008488263(PV )Q 
Pp = (.053333333)  +   L
 D  D4 

Critical Velocity and Flow in Annulus
 ρ  ( D H − D P )2
(2000 + PVx ) + Rc PV x + 1.066(YPx )
2

 gc  2 Rc
Vca =
ρ
2(DH − DP )
gc
π 
Qca = Vca  (DH − DP )
2
4
Critical Velocity and Flow in Pipe
 ρ  D2
(2000 + PV x ) + Rc PV x + 1.066 (YPx )
2

 gc  2 Rc
Vca =
ρ
2D
gc
π 
Qca = Vca   D 2
4
Where:
D = Pipe inside diameter (ft)
DP = Pipe outside diameter (ft)
DH = Annulus diameter (ft)
K (
= Consistency factor lb ft sec
2 n
)
Vp = Average fluid velocity for pipe (ft/sec)
Va = Average fluid velocity for annulus (ft/sec)
Vca = Critical velocity in annulus (ft/sec)
Vcp = Critical velocity in pipe (ft/sec)

L = Section length of pipe or annulus (ft)

P = Pressure loss in pipe or annulus lb ft 2 ( )
Q = Fluid flow rate ( ft 3 sec )
Qca = Critical flow rate in annulus ft 3 sec ( )
Qcp = Critical flow rate in pipe ft 3 sec( )
γ = Shear rate (1/sec)
τ (
= Shear stress lb ft
2
)
ρ = Weight density of fluid (lbm ft 3 )
Rp = Reynolds number for pipe
Ra = Reynolds number for annulus
PVaa = Apparent viscosity for annulus

PVap = Apparent viscosity for pipe (cp )
PV = Plastic viscosity (cp )
( )
PV x = Plastic viscosity lb sec ft 2 = (PV 47880.26)
(
YP = Yield point lb 100 ft 2 )
YPx = Yield point (lb ft 2 )
Bit Hydraulic Power

Bit Hydraulic Power is calculated using the flowrate entered in the input
section of the Rate Dialog.
Bit Hydraulic Power is a parameter that can be used to select nozzle

sizes for optimal hydraulics. Bit Hydraulic Power is not necessarily
maximized when operating the pump at the maximum pump
horsepower. Bit Hydraulic Power is calculated using the following
equation.
QPb
Bit Hydraulic Power (hp) = .
1714

Where:
Q = Circulation rate, gpm

Pb = Pressure loss across bit nozzles, psi
Bit Pressure Loss Calculations

Bit Pressure Loss represents the pressure loss through the bit, and is
calculated as follows.
ρV 2
∆Pbit =
2C d2 g c
Where:
ρ = Fluid density, (lb ft 3 )

V = Fluid velocity, (ft/sec)
Cd = Nozzle coefficient, .95
gc = 32.17 ( ft / sec 2 )
P = Pressure (lb ft 2 )
Derivations for PV, YP, 0-Sec Gel and Fann Data
Derive PV, YP, and 0-Sec Gel from Fann Data
PV = Θ 600 − Θ 300
YP = 2Θ 300 − Θ 600
0 − SecGel = Θ 3

Derive Fann Data from PV, YP, and 0-Sec Gel
Θ 300 = PV + YP
Θ 600 = 2 PV + YP
Θ 3 = 0 − SecGel
ECD Calculations
Ph + Pf
ECD =
.052( Dtvd )
Ph = Wmud Dtvd (.052 )
∆P
Pf = ∑ (∆Dmd )
∆L
Where:
ECD = Equivalent circulating density, (ppg)
Wmud = Fluid weight, (ppg)
Ph = Hydrostatic pressure change to ECD point. (psi)
Pf = Frictional pressure change to ECD point (psi)
∆P
= Change in pressure per length along the annulus section (psi/ft).
∆L
This is a function of the pressure loss model chosen.
Dtvd = True vertical depth of point of interest, (ft)
∆Dmd = Annulus section length (ft)

0.052 = conversion constant from (ppg)(ft) to psi

Graphical Analysis Calculations

Although the Graphical Analysis and Optimization Planning analysis
modes both optimize bit hydraulics, the methods used are different.
Because the methods are different, the results may also be different.
Click why for more information concerning what causes the differences.
The following steps outline the general procedure used to perform a

Graphical Analysis.
1. A total system pressures loss is specified on the Pump Limits

Dialog.
2. A maximum flow rate is determined that will cause the parasitic

pressure loss to equal the total system pressure loss. (This will
represent zero pressure loss through the bit, or infinite bit TFA.)
3. The increment flow rate is established as the maximum flow rate

divided by 100.
4. The initial analysis flow rate is set to 0.1 gpm.
5. At the analysis flow rate, the pressure loss through the drillstring,
annulus and surface equipment is calculated. These combined
pressure losses are the parasitic pressure losses at this flow rate.
6. The parasitic pressure loss is subtracted from the maximum pump

pressure to determine the pressure loss at the bit.
7. The pressure loss through the bit and the flow rate are used to
calculate the bit TFA (total flow area).
8. The Impact Force, Nozzle Velocity, and Bit Hydraulic Power are
calculated from the bit TFA, pressure loss at the bit, and the flow
rate.
9. The next analysis flow rate is determined by adding the increment

flow rate to the existing analysis flow rate and then steps five
through nine are repeated.
10. The results are presented in several graphical formats via the
Hydraulics Analysis View Menu.

Hole Cleaning Methodology and Calculations

The Hole Cleaning model is based on a mathematical model that
predicts the critical (minimum) annular velocities/flow rates required to
remove or prevent a formation of cuttings beds during a directional
drilling operation. This is based on the analysis of forces acting on the
cuttings and its associated dimensional groups. The model can be used
to predict the critical (minimum) flow rate required to remove or prevent
the formation of stationary cuttings. This model has been validated with
extensive experimental data and field data.
By using this model, the effects of all the major drilling variables on
hole cleaning have been evaluated and the results show excellent
agreement between the model predictions and all experimental and field
results.
The variables considered for hole cleaning analysis include
• Cuttings density
• Cuttings load (ROP)
• Cuttings shape
• Cuttings size
• Deviation
• Drill pipe rotation rate
• Drill pipe size
• Flow regime
• Hole size
• Mud density
• Mud rheology
• Mud velocity (flow rate)
• Pipe eccentricity
Calculations and equation coefficients to describe the inter-relationship

of these variables were derived from extensive experimental testing.

Calculate n, K,τ y , and Reynold’s Number
n=
(3.32)(log10)(YP + 2 PV )
(YP + PV )
K=
(PV + YP )
511
τ y = (5.11K )n
ρVa ( 2−n ) (DH − DP )
n
RA =
(2 3)G fa K
Concentration Based on ROP in Flow Channel
Co =
(V D 2
1471 )
(V D )
r B
1471 + Qm
2
r B
Fluid Velocity Based on Open Flow Channel
24.5Qm
Va =
DH − DP
2 2
Coefficient of Drag around Sphere

If Re < 225 then,
22
CD =
Ra
else,
C D = 1.5

Mud carrying capacity
D 
4 g  c ( ρ c − ρ )
= 
12 
CM
3 ρC D
Settling Velocity in the Plug in a Mud with a Yield Stress
1
 4 gDc1+ bn ( ρ c − ρ  2 − b ( 2 − n )
U sp = 1− b 
 3 aK b ρ c 
Where:
a = 42 .9 − 23 . 9 n
b = 1 − 0 . 33 n
Angle of Inclination Correction Factor
0.66
 5 
C a = (sin (1.33α ))  
1.33
 DH 
Cuttings Size Correction Factor
C s = 1.286 − 1.04 Dc
Mud Weight Correction Factor

If ( ρ < 7.7 ) then
C m = 1.0

else
C m = 1.0 − 0.0333( ρ − 7.7 )
Critical Wall Shear Stress
2n
τwc = [ag sin(∝)( ρc − ρ ) Dc ρ b / 2 ]
1+ b
2n − 2b + bn
Where:
a = 1.732
b = -0.744
Critical Pressure Gradient
Pgc = 2τwc
ro 2
rh [1− ( ) ]
rh
Total Cross Sectional Area of the Annulus without Cuttings Bed
AA =
(
π DH − DP
2 2
)
4 144
Dimensionless Flow Rate
n
1 b
2(1 + 2n) 2−( 2−n ) b rp 2 rp 2 − ( 2 − n ) b
∏ g c = ∏[8 × ] × (1 − ( ) )(1 − ( ) ]
1 rh rh
(a)
b

Where:
a = 16
b =1
Critical Flow Rate (CFR)
1 c
ρgc1 / c rh
( )
c + n 2−c( 2− n)
Qcrit = r h [ ∏ gc
2
1
]
( )
Kρ c −1
Correction Factor for Cuttings Concentration
C BED = 0.97 − (0.00231µ a )
Cuttings Concentration for a Stationary Bed by Volume
 Q 
C bonc = C BED 1.0 − m (1.0 − φ B )(100)
 Qcrit 
Where:

DB = Bit diameter
DH = Annulus diameter
DP = Pipe diameter
DTJ = Tool joint diameter
DC = Cuttings diameter
τy = Mud yield stress
G fa = Power law geometry factor
RA = Reynolds number
ρ = Fluid density
ρc = Cuttings density
Va = Average fluid velocity for annulus
VR = Rate of penetration, ROP
VCTV = Cuttings travel velocity

Vso = Original slip velocity
VSV = Slip velocity
VCTFV = Critical transport fluid velocity
VTC = Total cuttings velocity

K = Consistency factor
n = Flow behavior index
a, b, c = Coefficients
YP = Yield point
PV = Plastic viscosity
QC = Volumetric cuttings flow rate
Qm = Volumetric mud flow rate
Qcrit = Critical flow rate for bed to develop

Co = Cuttings feed concentration
CD = Drag coefficient
Cm = Mud carrying capacity

CA = Angle of inclination correction factor

CS = Cuttings size correction factor
C mud = Mud weight correction factor
C BED = Correction factor for cuttings concentration
C bonc = Cuttings concentration for a stationary bed by volume
U sp = Settling velocity
Us = Average settling velocity in axial direction
U mix = Average mixture velocity in the area open to flow
α = Wellbore angle
φB = Bed porosity
µa = Apparent viscosity
λp = Plug diameter ratio
g = Gravitational coefficient
r0 = Radius of which shear stress is zero
rp = Radius of drill pipe
rh = Radius of wellbore or casing
Pgc = Critical frictional pressure gradient
τ wc = Critical wall shear stress
Bit Impact Force

Impact force is calculated using the flow rate entered in the input section
of the Rate dialog.
Impact force is a parameter that can be used to select nozzle sizes for
optimal hydraulics. Impact force is calculated using the following
equation:
 ρ 
Im pact Force (lbf) = 
 g VQ
 c
Where:

ρ (
= Density of fluid lb ft
3
)
3
Q = Circulation rate ( ft / s )
2
gc = Gravitational constant, 32.17 ft sec
V = Velocity through the bit (ft/sec)
Nozzle Velocity
Velocity is calculated using the flowrate entered in the input section of
the Rate Dialog. This is not necessarily the maximum velocity that can
be achieved through the bits.
Nozzle velocity is a parameter that can be used to select nozzle sizes for
optimal hydraulics. Velocity is calculated using the following equation.
Q
Nozzle Velocity (ft/sec) =
2.96A
Where:
Q = Circulation rate, gpm

2
A = Total flow area of bit, in
Optimization Planning Calculations

Although the Graphical Analysis and Optimization Planning analysis
modes both optimize bit hydraulics, the methods used are different.
Because the methods are different, the results may also be different.
Click why for more information concerning what causes the differences.
The following steps outline the general procedure used to perform a

Optimization Planning.
1. Determine the optimum flow rate.
2. If the optimum flow rate is below the minimum annular velocity

specified on the Solution Constraints Dialog, increase it until all

annulus sections have a velocity greater than, or equal to, the

minimum allowed.
3. If turbulent flow is not allowed (as specified on the Solution

Constraints Dialog), and any annulus section is in turbulent flow,
decrease the optimum flow so that no annulus sections are in
turbulent flow. This may place the optimum flow rate below the
minimum annular velocity. If there is a conflict between the
minimum velocity and the flow regime, the controlling factor is the
flow regime.
4. Select the actual bit jets from the optimum TFA (total flow area),
and the number of nozzles and minimum nozzle diameter specified
on the Solution Constraints Dialog.This will almost always result in
a TFA greater than the optimum.
5. If the total system pressure drop is less than the maximum pump
pressure specified on the Solution Constraints Dialog, increase the
flow rate to use 100% of the allowed pump pressure. If the increase
will violate the annular flow regime, it is ruled that the increase is
not allowed. (The flow regime is controlling.)
Optimization Well Site Calculations
∆PparaL = ∆PsysL − ∆PbitL
∆PparaH = ∆PsysH − ∆PbitH
ρQ H 2
∆PbitH =
2g cC 2 A2
ρQ L 2
∆PbitL =
2 g cC 2 A2

log(∆PparaH ∆PparaL )
S=
log(QH QL )
∆PparaH ∆PparaL
K= s
= s
QH QL
∆P = KQ s
1
 ∆Pmax  S
QHP =  
 K (S + 1) 
1
 2∆Pmax  S
QIF =  
 K (S + 2 ) 
Calculate parasitic pressure loss for optimum power
∆PparaHP @ QHP
Calculate parasitic pressure loss for impact force
∆PparaIF @ QIF
Calculate pressure loss allowed for bit @ optimum flow rates
∆PbitoptHP = ∆Pmax − ∆PparaHP

∆PbitoptIF = ∆Pmax − ∆PparaIF
Calculate bit total flow area (TFA) for each bit pressure loss at
optimum flow rates
ρQHP 2
AHP =
2 g c C 2 ∆PbitopHP
ρQIF 2
AIF =
2 g c C 2 ∆PbitopIF
Using the maximum number of nozzles and the minimum Nozzle size,
determine the number and size of the nozzles to equal the two total flow
area values.
Where:
QL = Low flow rate, ( ft 3

sec)
= High flow rate, ( ft sec )
3
QH
Q HP = Flow rate at optim um horsepower, ( ft 3
sec)
= Flow rate at optim um im pact force, ( ft sec )
3
Q IF
A = Bit TFA used for the pressure tests, ( ft )2
A HP = Bit TFA for optim um power, ( ft ) 2
= Bit TFA for im pact force, ( ft )

2
A IF
ρ = Fluid weight, (lbm ft )
3
C = Shape factor, .95 for bit

gc = Gravitational constant, ( ft sec 2 )

S = Power law exponent for parasitic pressure loss
K = Power law coefficient for parasitic pressure loss,
(lbf )(
ft 2 sec ft 3 )
S
∆ Pmax = Maximum allowed total system pressure loss, lbf ( ft 2 )

∆ Ppara = Parasitic pressure loss at specific flow rate, lbf( ft 2 )
∆ Psys (
= Total system pressure loss at specific flow rate, lbf ft 2)
∆ PbitH = Bit pressure loss at pressure test high flow rate, (lbf ft )
2
∆ PbitL = Bit pressure loss at pressure test low flow rate, (lbf ft )2
∆ PparaH = Parasitic pressure loss at pressure test high flow rate,

(lbf ft 2 )
∆ PparaL = Parasitic pressure loss at pressure test low flow rate,
(lbf ft 2 )
∆ PparaHP = Parasitic pressure loss at flow rate Q HP , (lbf ft 2 )
∆ PparaIF = Parasitic pressure loss at flow rate Q IF , (lbf ft 2 )
Power Law Rheology Model
Rheological Equation
τ = Kγ n
Flow Behavior Index
 YP + 2 PV 
n = 3.32192809 log 
 YP + PV 

Consistency Factor
YP + 2 PV
K=
(
(100) 1022 n )
Average Velocity in Pipe
 4  Q 
V p =   2 
 π  D 
Average Velocity in Annulus
 4  Q 
Va =   
2 
 π  DH − DP 
2
Geometry Factor for Annulus
 (2n + 1) 
n
 (8)
n −1
G fa = 
 2n 
Geometry Factor for Pipe
 (3n + 1) 
n
 (8)
n −1
G fp = 
 4n 
Reynolds Number for Pipe
ρV p (2−n ) (D n )
Rp =
g c G fp K

Reynolds Number for the Annulus
ρV a ( 2 − n ) ( D H − D P )
n
RA =
g c (2 3)G fa K
Critical Reynolds Number for Pipe

Laminar Boundary = 3470 – 1370n
Turbulent Boundary = 4270 – 1370n
Critical Reynolds Number for Annulus

Laminar Boundary = 3470 – 1370n
Turbulent Boundary = 4270 – 1370n
Friction Factor for Pipe
Laminar
16
Fp =
Rp
Transition
log(n ) + 3.93
a=
50
1.75 − log(n )
b=
7
RL = 3470 − 1370n

 16   ( RP − RL )   a   16  
F p =   +    b − 
  R 
 RL   800   RT   L 
Turbulent
log(n ) + 3.93
a=
50
1.75 − log(n )
b=
7
a
Fp = b
RP
Friction Factor for Annulus
Laminar
24
Fa =
RA
Transition
log(n ) + 3.93
a=
50
1.75 − log(n )
b=
7

RL = 3470 − 1370n
 24   ( R A − RL )   a   24  
Fa =   +    b − 
  R 
 RL   800   RT   L 
Turbulent
log(n ) + 3.93
a=
50
1.75 − log(n )
b=
7
a
Fa = b
RA
Pressure Loss in Pipe
ρ 2 2
P= V p F p L 
gc D
Pressure Loss in Annulus
ρ 2  2 
P= Va Fa L 
gc  DH − DP 
Where:

D = Pipe inside diameter (ft)

DP = Pipe outside diameter (ft)
DH = Annulus diameter (ft)
Vp = Average fluid velocity for pipe (ft/sec)
Va = Average fluid velocity for annulus (ft/sec)
L = Pipe or annulus section length (ft)

P = Pipe or annulus pressure loss lb ft ( 2
)
Q = Fluid flow rate ( ft 3
sec )
τ = Shear stress on walls lb ft ( 2
)
n = Flow behavior index
 lb 
= Consistency factor  2 sec 
n
K
 ft 
ρ = Fluid density (lbm ft 3 )
RP = Reynolds number for pipe

RA = Reynolds number for annulus
RL = Reynolds number at Laminar flow boundary
Fp = Friction factor for pipe
Fa = Friction factor for annulus
Gp = Geometry factor for pipe
Ga = Geometry factor for annulus

PV = Plastic viscosity
YP = Yield point
gc = Acceleration due to gravity, 32.174 (ft/sec)
Pressure Loss Analysis Calculations

The following general analysis steps are used to determine pressure
losses in the various segments of the circulating system. The annular
velocity or critical velocity calculations are performed within the
pressure loss calculations.
1. The first step is to Calculate PV, YP, 0-Gel and Fann Data as
required. The Bingham Plastic and Power Law pressure loss

calculations require PV/YP data. If Fann data is input, PV/YP/0-Sec

Gel can be calculated. Herschel-Bulkley requires Fann data. If Fann
data not is input on the Fluid Editor, it can be calculated from PV/
YP/0-Sec Gel data.
2. Calculate work string and annular pressure losses are based on the
rheological model selected using the Bingham Plastic rheology
model calculations, Power Law rheology model calculations or
Herschel-Bulkley rheology model calculations.
3. Calculate the bit pressure loss.
4. Calculate tool joint pressure losses, if required as specified on the

Rate Dialog or the Rates Dialog.
5. Determine mud motor, or MWD pressure losses as input on the

Mud Motor Catalog or the MWD Catalog.
6. Calculate the pressure losses in the surface equipment using the

pipe pressure loss equations for the selected rheological model.
7. Calculate the total pressure loss by adding all pressure losses

together.
8. Calculate ECD if required.
Pump Power Calculations

If you are using more than one pump, the maximum pump power should
be calculated as follows.
(HPN )(Pmin )
HPs = ∑
Pmax
Where:

N = 1 to num ber of pum ps

Pmin = M inim um pum p pressure of all m axim um pum p
discharge pressure ratings for pum ps activ e in the
system and the surface equipm ent.
Pmax = M axim um pum p pressure rating for each pum p, 1 thru n
HP s = M axim um pum p horse power for the system
Pump Pressure Calculations

If you have more than one active pump specified on the Circulating
System, Mud Pumps Tab, the Maximum Pump Pressure will be set
equal to the minimum value entered for Maximum Discharge Pressure
for any of the active pumps.
Shear Rate and Shear Stress Calculations
Shear Stress
τ .. = (0.01065)Θ
Shear Rate
γ = (1.70333)RPM
Where:
 lbf 
τ =  2 
 ft 
 1 
γ = 
 sec 
Θ = Fann dial reading, (deg)

RPM = Fann Speed, (rpm )

Swab/Surge Calculations
The WELLPLAN Swab/Surge model calculates the annulus pressures
caused by the annular drilling fluid flow induced due to the movement
of the string. During tripping operations, the pressures throughout the
well will increase or decrease depending on whether the work string is
being lowered or raised.
A pressure increase due to a downward pipe movement is called a surge

pressure, whereas the pressure increase due to an upward pipe
movement is called the swab pressure.
The swab/surge calculations do not model fluid wave propagation or

consider gel strength of the mud.
Ls tan d
Vtrip =
Ttrip
If the pipe closed, then Q pipe = 0.0
If the pipe is open and the pumps off, then
Aopen
Aratio =
(A
open + Aann )
Q pipe = (Vtrip )( Aclosed − Aopen )( Aratio )
If there is a surge situation, then Q pipe is negative (up the string).
If there is a swab situation, then Q pipe is positive (down the string).
If the pipe is open, and the pumps are on then,
Q pipe = Qrate
The flow rate induced by the pipe movement is:

Qinduce = Vtrip Aclosed
If there is a surge situation, then Qinduce is positive (up the annulus).
If there is a swab situation, then Q is negative (down the

induce
annulus).
Qann = Qinduce + Q pipe
The annular flow rate, Qann , is then used to perform frictional pressure
loss calculations to determine the annulus pressure profile.
If the first component is a bit then,
Aopen = ATFA
2
π 
Aclosed =  ODbit 
4 
If the first component is not a bit then,
2
π 
Aopen =  ID pipe 
4 
2
π 
Aclosed =  OD pipe 
4 
Where:

V trip = Trip v elocity
L s tan d = Stand length

V trip = Trip tim e per stand
Q pipe = Pipe flow rate

Q induce = Flow rate induced by pipe m ov em ent
Q rate = Pum p flow rate
Q ann = Annular flow rate
A closed = Pipe closed area

A open = Pipe open area
A ratio = Ratio of pipe open area to com bined pipe and annulus op
ATFA = Bit total flow area, TFA
Tool Joint Pressure Loss Calculations
ρKV 2
∆P =
2
Where:
ρ = F luid density
V = F luid v elocity in the pipe
K = T ool-joint loss coefficient as a function of
the R eynolds num ber (R ) in the pipe body
R = R eynold’s num ber for the pipe
If R < 1000;
K = 0.0
If 1000 < R <= 3000;

K = (1.91) log( R ) − 5.64

If 3000 < R <= 13,000;

K = 4.66 − (1.05 log( R ))
If R > 13,000;
K = 0.33
Weight Up Calculations
D f − Di
Va = Vi
Da − D f
Where:
Va = Additive volume
Vi = Initial volume
Di = Initial density
Df = Final density
Da = Additive density

References
General
Lubinski, A., et. al., “Transient Pressure Surges Due to Pipe Movement
in an Oil Well”, Revue de L’Institut Francais du Petrole, May – June
1977.
White, F. M., “Fluid Mechanics”, McGraw Hill, Inc., 1979.
Wilkinson, W.L., “Non-Newtonian Fluids”, Pergamon Press, 1960.
Bingham Plastic Model

Bourgoyne, A. T., Chenevert, M. E., Millheim, K. K., Young Jr., F. S.
“Applied Drilling Engineering”, SPE Textbook Series: Volume 2.
Coiled Tubing
McCann, R. C., and Islas, C. G. “Frictional Pressure Loss during
Turbulent Flow in Coiled Tubing.” SPE 36345.
Hole Cleaning
Clark, R. K., Bickham, K. L. “A Mechanistic Model for Cuttings
Transport.” SPE paper 28306 presented at the SPE 69th Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition, New Orleans, September 25–28.
Luo, Yuejin and P. A. Bern, BP Research Centre; and D. B.Chambers,

BP Exploration Co. Ltd. “Flow-Rate Predictions for Cleaning Deviated
Wells.” IADC/SPE 23884.
Luo, Yuejin, P. A. Bern, D. B.Chambers, BP Exploration. “Simple

Charts to Determine Hole Cleaning Requirements in Deviated Wells.”
IADC/SPE 27486.
Peden, J. M., Heriot-Watt U., Yuejin Luo. “Settling Velocity of Various

Shaped Particles in Drilling and Fracturing Fluids.” SPE/IADC 16243.

Rabia, H. Rig Hydraulics. Entrac Software: Newcastle, England (1989):

Chapter 5.
Herschel Bulkley Model

“The YPL Rheology Model.” BPA Research Note PRN9303,
93085ART0027.
“Improved Hydraulic Models or Flow in Pipe and Annuli Using the

YPL Rheology Model.” BPA Bluebook Report F93-P-12,
93026ART0243.
Optimization Well Site

Scott, K.F., "A New Approach to Drilling Hydraulics", Petroleum
Engineer, Sept. 1972.
Power Law Model

Milheim, Keith K., Amoco Production Co.; Said Sahin Tulga, DRD
Corp. “Simulation of the Wellbore Hydraulics While Drilling, Including
the Effects of Fluid Influxes and Losses and Pipe Washouts.” SPE
11057 (1982).
Schuh, F., Engineering Essentials of Modern Drilling, Energy

Publications Division of HBJ.
Rheology Thermal Effects

Annis, M. R. Journal of Petroleum Technology, August 1967.
Chapman, A. J., Heat Transfer. McMillan Press. 1967.
Combs, G. D. and Whitmire, L. D. Oil & Gas Journal, 30 September

1968.
Dropkin, E. and Omerscales, S. “Heat transfer by Natural Convection by

Fluid Confined by Parallel Plates.” ASME, February 1965.
Hiller, K. H. Journal of Petroleum Technology, July 1963.
Sorelle, J. Ardiolin, Bukley. “Mathematical Field Model Predicts

Downhole Density Changes in Static Drilling Fluids.” SPE 11118.

Wilhite G. P. “Overall Heat Transfer Coefficients in Stem and Hot water

Injection Wells.” Journal of Petroleum Technology, May 1967.
Surge Swab
Burkhardt, J. A. “Wellbore Pressure Surges Produced in Pipe
Movement.” Journal of Petroleum Technology, June 1961.
Clark, E. H. Jr. “Bottom-Hole Pressure Surges While Running Pipe.”

Petroleum Engineering, January 1955.
Fontenot, J. E., Clark R. K. “An Improved Method for Calculating Swab

and Surge Pressures and Circulating Pressures in a Drilling Well.” SPE
4521 (1974).
Schuh, F. J. “Computer Makes Surge-Pressure Calculations Useful.” Oil

& Gas Journal, 3 August 1964.
Tool Joint Pressure Loss

Denison, Pressure Losses Inside Tool Joints Can Alter Drilling
Hydraulics", E.B., Oil & Gas Journal, Sept. 26, 1977, pg. 66.
Milheim, Keith, Amoco Production Co., Tulga, Sahin, DRD

Corporation, Tulsa, OK., “Simulation of the Wellbore Hydraulics While
Drilling, Including the Effects of Fluid Influxes and Losses and Pipe
Washouts”, SPE 11057, 1982.

Chapter 5
Well Control Analysis
Well Control Analysis can be used to calculate the expected influx volume, assist with casing
design in terms of shoe settings depths, and expected conditions resulting from an influx, generate
kill sheets, determine maximum safe drilling depth, and maximum allowable influx volume.
Well Control Analysis assumes the influx is a single, methane gas bubble. The influx density is
the density of methane at the current temperature and pressure. The compressibility factor, Z, is
based on the critical temperature and pressure of methane. Liquid influxes are not modeled, nor
are dispersed gas influxes.
Overview
of using the Well Control module. You will also become familiar with
the data presented on reports, and plots. To reinforce what you learn in
the class lecture, you will have the opportunity to complete several
exercises designed to prepare you for using the module outside of class.
The information presented in this chapter can be used as a study guide
during the course, and can also be used as a reference for future analysis.

Chapter 5: Well Control Analysis
Well Control Analysis: An Introduction
The Well Control Analysis Module can be used to calculate the expected
influx volume, assist with casing design in terms of shoe settings depths
to handle pressures associated with controlling an influx (kick),
expected conditions resulting from an influx, generate kill sheets,
determine maximum safe drilling depth, and maximum allowable influx
volume.
Well Control Analysis assumes the influx is a single, methane gas

bubble. The influx density is the density of methane at the current
temperature and pressure. The compressibility factor, Z, is based on the
critical temperature and pressure of methane. Liquid influxes are not
modelled, nor are dispersed gas influxes.
Starting Well Control Analysis

There are two ways to begin the Well Control Module. You can select
Well Control from the Modules Menu, and then select the appropriate
analysis mode. You can also click the Well Control Button and
then select the appropriate analysis mode from the Mode drop down list.
Select desired Well Control

Analysis mode from Choose Well Control Analysis from the Modules Menu, or by
submenu, or from Mode drop clicking the Well Control Button.
down list.


The Well Control Module has three available analysis modes. Each
analysis mode will be discussed in this course.
l Expected Influx Volume: Use this analysis mode to predict the

volume of an influx while drilling or after pump shut down.
l Kick Tolerance: Use this analysis mode to simulate the circulation

of a kick while drilling, a swab kick or after the pumps have shut
down.
l Kill Sheet: Use this analysis to quickly generate a standpipe

pressure schedule.

Using Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode
This analysis will predict the volume of an influx while drilling or after
the pumps have been shut down. The calculation is a function of bottom
hole pressure, crew reaction times, equipment performance (closing
BOPs, etc.), drilling rate of penetration and reservoir properties.
Starting Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode
Select Expected
Influx Volume
from drop down
list.
Enter Case Data

As most other analysis modes, the Expected Influx Volume analysis
mode uses the information entered on the Case menu. The contents of
the Case menu will change depending on the Well Control analysis
mode selected.
The Well Control Setup tabs are only available while using a Well
Control analysis mode. For discussion on the Case menu items that are
common to all WELLPLAN modules, please refer to the Basics chapter
of this manual. The common Case menu options include: the General,
Offshore, Wellbore Editor, String Editor, Fluid Editor, and Deviation
menu.

Expected Influx Volume
analysis mode.

Specify Choke and Kill Line Use

For the Expected Influx Volume analysis mode, the
Case →Well Control Setup dialog contains only the Choke/Kill tab.
Use the Choke/Kill tab to specify choke and kill line usage, and sizes.
This tab is not accessible unless the well is specified as offshore on the
Case →General Dialog - Options tab and as subsea on the
Case →Offshore dialog. Choke and kill line information is used to
calculate pressure loss in these areas. Only on subsea wells is the
pressure loss in the choke and kill lines significant. If the well is a land
well, you do not need to enter data into the Choke/Kill tab to use the
Expected Influx Volume analysis mode.
For other Well Control analysis modes, the Well Control Setup dialog
will contain additional tabs. These tabs are not applicable to the
Expected Influx analysis, so these tabs are absent when using this
analysis mode.
Click the radio button to indicate to indicate the choke mode

configuration you are using. If you are not using a kill line, do not enter
the kill line ID. You only need to enter the ID of the lines in use.
The Choke/Kill Line Length will default to the length of the riser
(specified on the Wellbore Editor) plus the elevation specified on the
General dialog. You many enter another value if you wish.
Click here to indicate choke and/or kill line use.
Choke/Kill line length defaults to riser length plus

elevation, but you can change it.
Enter ID of lines in use.
Enter Temperature Profile for Well Control Analysis

The Parameter →Temperature Distribution tabs are used to define
the temperature profile in the well.

The Temperature Model tab is used to select the temperature model you
want to use for the temperature calculations. The calculated
temperatures will be used to calculate gas pressures and volumes, but
will not be used to modify the density or rheology parameters of the
drilling mud.
The Steady State Circulation model performs a heat transfer calculation

between the fluids in the annulus and the fluids in the string to determine
their respective temperature profiles. This model is the most realistic
temperature model offered.
The Undisturbed Temperature model assumes the annulus and string

temperature profiles are identical to the formation temperature profile.
The data in this section of the dialog will default one time to the
information displayed in the Undisturbed Temperature dialog on the
Case Menu.
After the initial default of data, any changes made to either the
Case →Temperature Model tabs or to the
Parameter →Temperature Distribution tabs will not be
reflected in the other tab
The Constant Temperature model assumes the mud is one temperature

through the entire wellbore and string. This model is the least accurate.
Steady State Circulation model is the

most realistic model offered.
Undisturbed Temperatures default

from the Undisturbed Temperature
dialog on the Case menu.
The Additional tab allows you to specify abnormal temperatures if you

are using the Undisturbed Temperature Model or the Steady-State
Circulation Model. The Constant Temperature Model does not use
additional Temperature data.

Additional temperature data is used in combination with the temperature

data entered on the Temperature Distribution - Temperature Model Tab.
Additional temperature data should be used to characterize a non-linear
formation or seawater profile. These temperatures must be entered on a
true vertical depth (TVD) basis. Intermediate temperatures are linearly
interpolated between specified points. You must enter these additional
temperatures in descending order.
Determining Type of Kick

The information on the Parameter →Kick Class Determination
dialog is used to calculate the bottom hole pressures, influx volume, and
kick tolerance and kick type at the moment an influx occurs.
The initial mud gradient refers to the mud in the well when the kick
occurred. The circulation flowrate is the pump rate during drilling prior
to the influx and the kick interval gradient is the pore pressure gradient
for the area of the formation that produced the kick.
The Quick Look section displays the calculated kick type as determined
from the bottom hole pressures. The Quick Look section also displays
the circulating and static bottom hole pressures, and the calculated
pressure at the depth where the kick occurred.
There are three types of kicks including: a kick while drilling, a kick
after pump shut down, and a swab kick.
Defaults from Fluid Editor.
Kick Interval Gradient defines the pore

pressure
Quick Look section displays the type of

kick that occurred. In this case, it is a
“Kick While Drilling”.
Kick While Drilling

This is a kick taken while drilling. In this case, the pore pressure is
higher than the dynamic bottom hole pressure.

Kick After Pump Shut Down

This is a kick taken after the circulation pumps have been shut down.
The pore pressure is lower than the dynamic bottom hole pressure but
higher than the static bottom hole pressure.
Swab Kick
This is a kick taken while tripping out of the hole. In this case, the pore
pressure is lower than the static bottom hole pressure.
Estimating Influx Volume

The Parameter →Influx Volume Estimation tabs are used to specify
information required to determine the volume of the influx. The volume
of the influx depends on the kick detection method, reservoir properties,
crew reaction times and the kick class determined using the Kick Class
Determination dialog.
Setup Tab
The information displayed on the Setup tab is a summary of the results
from the Kick Class Determination dialog. You can not edit the
information displayed on this tab. The information is displayed here for
information purposes. This tab will not be available if the kick is
determined to be a “kick while swabbing”.
This tab displays a summary of the

results from the Kick Class
Determination dialog.
You can not edit the information

displayed on this tab.
Kick Detection Method Tab

Use the Kick Detection Method tab to define the type of kick detection
in use. You can choose from flowrate or volume variation methods.

This information will be used to help determine the influx size. This tab
will not be available if the kick is determined to be a “kick while
swabbing”.
If you are using the Flowrate Variation method, you must enter the
minimum flow difference that can be detected between the flowrate in
and the flowrate out.
For the Volume Variation method, you must enter the minimum
increase in pit volume that can be practically detected. Because the
change in volume is not instantaneous, you must also specify a
Detection Time Delay. Detection time delay occurs primarily due to the
performance of the shale shakers being used. Detection time is a
function of flow rate, screen size, mud density, plastic viscosity and
expected cuttings removal performance.
Flow rate detection methods have no detection time delay because the
change in flow rate is noticed immediately.
Enter the minimum Flowrate or

Volume Variation that can be
detected.
Detection Time Delay applies only

to the Volume Variation method
Reservoir Tab
This tab is used to define reservoir properties that will be used to
determine the size of the influx. This tab will not be available if the kick
is determined to be a “kick while swabbing”.

Enter the total measured depth thickness of

the reservoir. This is used if the kick occurs
while drilling, or after pump shutdown.
Enter the measured depth length of the

reservoir that has been drilled. This is only
used if the kick is determined to occur after
pump shutdown.
Reaction Times Tab

This tab is used to specify crew reaction times during various events
typical after taking a kick. This tab will not be available if the kick is
determined to be a “kick while swabbing”. These reaction times will be
used to determine influx size. You may set some of these reaction times
to zero to model certain types of events. An example might be a hard
shut-in.
Enter the reaction times for the

various activities.
Analyzing Results
The only results available for the Expected Influx Volume analysis
model are displayed on the Influx Volume Estimation - Results Tab.
There are no plots, reports, or tables that display analysis results.
However, there is a Temperature Distribution plot available for viewing
wellbore temperatures.

Influx Volume Estimation Results Tab

This tab displays the results of the influx size estimation based on the
information entered on other Influx Volume Estimation tabs.
Total influx volume after detection

and closing the well in
Influx volume when first detected

using the specified Kick Detection
Method
Calculated time to detect the influx
Plots
Temperature Distribution Plot

This plot indicates the temperature profile as calculated based on the
temperature model specified on the Parameter →Temperature
Distribution - Temperature Model tab.
If you are using the steady state circulation model, this plot will display
separate curves indicating the undisturbed temperature, as well as the
calculated string temperature and annular temperature.
The Title Bar

indicates the
temperature
model used.

Using Kick Tolerance Analysis Mode
This analysis mode is used to simulate the circulation of a kick while

drilling, a swab induced kick or a kick after the pumps have shut down.
This analysis provides several plots to analyze the results. Using these
plots, you can:
•
Determine wellbore pressures for depths of interests while
circulating a kick.
• Determine the maximum pressure at each point in the wellbore.
• Determine the allowable influx volume based on formation
breakdown pressure.
• Calculate the maximum pressure for various influx sizes at
several wellbore depths.
• Estimate shoe setting depth based on formation breakdown
gradients.
• Calculate the wellbore pressures in the well assuming all mud in
the well has been displaced by gas.
You can select the Kick Tolerance analysis mode from the Modules
Menu, or from the Mode drop down list.
Choose Kick
Tolerance analysis
mode from Modules
Menu, or from Mode
drop down list.
Enter Case Data

As with most analysis modes, the Kick Tolerance analysis mode uses
the information entered on the Case menu. Although, the contents of the
Case menu will change depending on the analysis mode selected. For
Kick Tolerance analysis, you must enter circulating system information,
pore pressure and fracture pressure data. This information is not
required for all Well Control analysis modes.


information. These tabs were discussed in the Basics chapter of this
manual.

The Case →Pore Pressure spreadsheet is used to define the pore
pressure profile as a function of depth. This spreadsheet was discussed
in the Basics chapter of this manual.

The Case →Frac Pressure spreadsheet is used to define the fracture
gradient profile as a function of depth. This spreadsheet was discussed
in the Basics chapter of this manual.
Specify Kill Method, Choke/Kill Line and Slow Pumps Data

For the Kick Tolerance analysis mode, this dialog contains two tabs.
Other Well Control analysis modes may contain different tabs on this
dialog.
Enter Choke/Kill Data

The information entered into the Case →Well Control Setup dialog for
the Expected Influx Volume analysis will continue to be used for the
Kick Tolerance analysis. Since both analysis modes use the information

entered into this tab, remember that if you change the information, it will
be changed for all analysis modes.
Select Kill Method and Enter Operational Data

The Case →Well Control Setup Operational tab is used to specify kill
method, BOP and casing pressure rating, and leak off test results. You
can choose to use either the Driller’s Method, or the Wait and Weight
Method. If you choose to use the Driller’s Method, a message is added
to the reports advising the user that the pressure data is based on the
assumption it is only valid for the second circulation when the kill mud
is pumped down the string to the bit. For the Wait and Weight Method,
the pressure data is based on the assumption the kill mud is pumped
down the string while the kick is circulated out.
Select kill method
Enter Kill Rate, Kick Data

The information input on the Parameter →Kick Tolerance dialog will
be used to simulate the circulation of an influx taken while drilling or
after pump shutdown.
For a swab kick, tripping the work string back to the bottom of the hole
is simulated. In this scenario, a worst case situation of passing the influx
bubble with the BHA is analyzed at every depth.
The information presented in the Setup section of the Kick Tolerance

dialog was determined based on information input on the Kick Class
Determination dialog. The Kill Rate is the flowrate that will be used to
circulate out the influx.

The influx volume can be determined using the Estimated Influx

Volume analysis mode, or you can input another volume. The Depth of
Interest is the depth in the well that you are interested in analyzing.
Usually this will be a casing shoe depth. The Depth Interval to Check
pertains to the Safe Drilling Depth analysis. This is the depth interval
past the current measured depth that you want to analyze.
Setup section is based on Kick Class

Determination dialog results
Kill rate to circulate out the influx
Influx volume can be determined using the

Estimated Influx Volume analysis mode
Enter measured depth that you are

interested in analyzing
Analyzing Results
The Kick Tolerance analysis mode has several plots that can be used to
analyze the results. These plots can be used to analyze annular pressure
as the influx is circulated, allowable kick volumes, safe drilling depths,
as well as pressure resulting from fully evacuating the annulus and
filling it with gas.
The Kick Tolerance analysis also provides a schematic to view the

position and size of the kick as it is circulated out.
Plots
Pressure at Depth Plot

This plot displays how the pressure at a specified depth of interest in the
annulus will vary as the kill mud is pumped into the well. This plot
assumes the bit is at the string depth specified on the String Editor. You
may choose one Depth of Interest on the Kick Tolerance Dialog. The
plot also assumes a constant influx volume, which is specified on the
same dialog.

The various peaks and valleys on the plot reflect the different annular
areas that result in changing lengths of annular fluids and the impact on
the pressure calculations.
Depth of interest
Fracture pressure at
depth of interest
Pore pressure at
depth of interest
Maximum Pressure Plot

The Maximum Pressure plot depicts the annular pressures that will
occur at any measured depth with an influx of constant volume in the
well. Although you can determine from this plot what the maximum
pressure will be at all measured depths, you can not determine when the
high pressure was encountered as the influx was circulated out of the
well.
You may use this plot to determine casing burst service loads, or shoe
setting depths.

Maximum annular pressure greater than fracture

pressure
Casing shoe depth
Maximum annular pressure less than fracture pressure
Allowable Kick Volume Plot

This plot shows the maximum pressure encountered during kick
circulation at a specified depth of interest for a range of influx volumes.
The pore pressure and fracture pressure at the depth of interest are also
displayed on the plot for reference.
Curve indicates
annular pressure
at specified depth
as a function of
influx volume.

Safe Drilling Depth Plot

This plot shows the maximum pressure at a depth of interest using a
constant influx volume as the wellbore depth is increased using the
specified depth interval past the current measured depth. You may want
to use this plot to determine how far ahead you can drill with the casing
shoe depth specified as the depth of interest. The plot includes pore
pressure and fracture gradients to assist with determining maximum
allowable pressures.
Depth of interest
Maximum annular pressure at depth of interest. Because this is a

horizontal well, this line is straight.
Formation Breakdown Gradient Plot

This plot presents the maximum annular pressure, expressed as a
gradient, that will occur as a result of the specified influx size. You can
use this plot to determine the maximum pressure (expressed as a

gradient) that you can encounter without exceeding the formation

fracture gradient.
Maximum
pressure
Fracture gradient
Full Evacuation to Gas Plot

This plot shows the pressure that will occur at any measured depth in the
well as a result of entirely filling the annulus with methane. You can use
this plot to determine if the annular pressure resulting from fully
evacuating the wellbore with methane will fracture the open hole
section.
Casing shoe
Open hole annular pressure

Animation
Schematics
This is an animated simulation of the process of circulating the influx to
the surface. In this animation, you can “see” the influx occurring, and
then watch as the influx is circulated out of the well.
Start animation by Stop animation by

clicking this button clicking this button
Click here to move to

previous data point
Click here to move to

the next data point
Kick in original position
Frame Data
The information on this screen is a numerical representation of
circulating the influx. You can view a pictorial animation on the
Schematic. The Frame Data provides more information that the
Schematic. Using the Frame Data, you can easily view the bottom hole

pressure, choke pressure, influx volume and pressure as the kick is

circulated out of the annulus.
Buttons perform as in the Schematic

Using Kill Sheet Analysis Mode
The Kill Sheet analysis can help pre-plan a course of action in the event
of a kick. This can be very helpful, especially since taking a kick can be
a very serious, and stressful time. It is recommended that as much of the
information required for the Kill Sheet analysis is entered prior to taking
a kick. This will significantly reduce the information that will be
required to gather and input after a kick has occurred. The Kill Sheet
analysis can quickly generate a standpipe pressure schedule, and a report
of useful information.
Select Kill Sheet

from Mode drop
down list.
Enter Case Data

The Kill Sheet analysis mode uses the fluid information entered on the
Fluid Editor (Case menu). You may want to review the fluid information
for accuracy.
You may also want to review, or enter the Slow Pumps information on
the Well Control Setup tabs. Later in this analysis, you will be required
to select a pump speed from those entered on the Well Control Setup,
Slow Pumps tab.
Circulating System and

Well Control Setup
information entered in
prior analysis

Enter Kill Sheet Data

These tabs are used to collect information that will be used to generate
a kill sheet.
Enter Kick Analysis Parameters

Use the Parameter →Kill Sheet Kick Parameters tab to specify
analysis parameters to use in the kill sheet calculations. On this tab, you
will specify the measured depth of the kick, pit gain, trip margin and
shut-in drillpipe and casing pressures. This information will be used to
generated the kill sheet, and pump schedule.
Enter the pit gain as a result of the influx
Enter the shut-in drill pipe and casing pressure

after the well has been closed
Enter additional pressure to be used as overkill
Enter the additional mud weight needed to

overcome the pressure reduction experienced
while tripping out of the well
Enter Mud Weight Up Data

Use the Parameter→Kill Sheet Mud Weight Up tab to specify mud
volumes (other than inside the string or in the annulus), and information
defining the weight material and mixing capacities. This data will be
used in the kill sheet generation.

Enter the specific gravity of the

weighting material you will be using
to weight up the mud to the kill mud
weight
Enter the amount of weighting

material that can be mixed per unit
of time.
Enter Annular Volumes

Use the Parameter →Kill Sheet Annulus tab to specify the annulus
volumes. You can enter the volumes on this tab, or you can have this
information automatically calculated from data input on the String
Editor and Wellbore Editor.
Click the Default from

Editors button to calculate
annular volumes from data
input on String and
Wellbore editors

Enter String Volumes

Use the Parameter →Kill Sheet String tab to specify the string
volumes. You can specify these directly, or you can copy them
automatically from the String Editor.
Click Default from Editors button to

calculate volumes using data entered
on the String editor
Select Kill Pump Speed

The Parameter →Kill Sheet Pumps tab is used to identify the slow
circulation data for the pump used to kill the well. This tabbed dialog
displays, in read only format, the information chosen from data entered
on the Well Control Setup - Slow Pumps tab. If the pump information
you want to use is not available by clicking the button, then you must
enter pump information on the Slow Pumps tab first. After the pump
information is entered, you may view and select the appropriate pump
using this tab.

Click Select Pump/Kill Speed button to

select Pump/Kill Speed from the entries
on the Well Control Setup - Slow Pumps
tab
Analysis Results
Plots
The Kill Sheet plot indicates the desired stand pipe pressure as the kill
mud is pumped down the string until it reaches the annulus. This plot
will change based on the kill method selected.
Initial circulating pressure
Final circulating pressure

Reports
Kill Sheet Report

This report summarizes much of the input information. It also reports
many additional types of information including:
l Summary of weak links
l Weight up requirement for kill mud and trip margin
l Pump stroke schedule
l Volumes and capacities
The pump stroke schedule can be used in well control operations to use
drillpipe pressure schedules to maintain the bottomhole pressure at the
proper value. During well control operations, the bottomhole pressure
must be maintained at a value slightly higher than the formation pressure
during kill operations.

Analysis Mode Methodology
The first section in this chapter discusses general analysis assumptions,

and terminology used in the Well Control Module. The remaining
sections cover one of the analysis modes available in the Well Control
Analysis Module. In each section, the major analysis steps for the
analysis mode are discussed. Within the analysis steps there may be a
reference to a calculation. The title of the calculations are presented in
italic for recognition. Many calculations apply to more than one analysis
mode. To avoid duplicating information, the calculations are presented
in alphabetical order in the section titled Supporting Information and
Calculations. While reading through the methodology for a particular
analysis mode you will notice calculation titles/names in italic. If you
require more information about a particular calculation, please refer to
the Supporting Information and Calculations section for additional
information.
General Assumptions and Terminology
Initial Influx Volume

Initial influx volume refers to the influx volume taken from the time a
kick first develops through the time the kick has been brought under
control (i.e. when the well has been shut in). In designing for the “worst
case”, the initial influx volume is the maximum expected influx volume.
Of course, the volume of the influx will change once well kill
procedures are instigated and the circulation of the influx up the annulus
begins.
Naturally, the size of the initial influx volume is dependent on how

quickly the kick is detected and controlled. Smaller kicks will result in
lower pressures exerted within the wellbore as the kick is circulated out
of the well. Designing the well to withstand the appropriate maximum
initial influx volume will minimize the risk to the well.
Influx Properties Assumptions

The type of influx can be oil, gas, water, condensate, or any combination
of these. However, WELLPLAN Well Control assumes that the influx
is a single bubble of “pure” methane gas. Assuming the influx to be
composed of entirely methane gas is a conservative or “worst case”
assumption. Methane is the lightest gas likely to be encountered in any

great quantities. Methane gas will exhibit the fastest gas migration up
the wellbore annulus because of the large difference in its density
compared with the significantly heavier drilling mud.
In practice, a gas influx will disperse into separate bubbles as it expands

and rises through the well. WELLPLAN Well Control assume that the
influx remains a single gas bubble in order to predict the worst possible
pressure conditions.
WELLPLAN does not model soluble gas kicks. In soluble gas kicks, the
gas initially goes into solution with the drilling fluid (mud), and remains
in solution until near the surface. This type of kick are difficult to detect,
and are not handled by the Well Control Module.
Influx Annular Volume and Height

Smaller annular capacities between the work string and the wellbore
will have “longer” influx lengths for a given initial influx volume. This
will reduce the overall effect of the hydrostatic column on the bottom of
the hole. In order to maintain a constant bottom hole pressure, higher
choke pressures will be required at the surface.
The height of the influx equates to the overall length of the influx in the
annulus. It is affected by the annular volume and the gas compressibility
(expansion). The length and location of the influx in the wellbore
impacts the combined effect of the hydrostatic gas/mud column in the
annulus. An influx located high in the annulus, or a large (“long”) influx
will have higher associated choke pressures.
Choke Pressure and Influx Position

The position of the top of the influx also affects the choke pressure
requirements. As the influx rises, the hydrostatic effect of the mud
column above the gas influx reduces. As the influx rises in the annulus,
higher choke (surface) pressures are required to maintain the bottom
hole pressure. This effect is combated by allowing the gas to expand by
opening the choke. A constant bottom hole pressure is required to
prevent further influxes into the wellbore.
Kill Methods
The initial mud weight and the bottom hole pressure affect the choice of
kill method. The common methods used are the “Driller’s Method” and

the “Wait and Weight Method”. Both of these methods maintain

constant bottom hole pressure.
The safest method is the “Wait and Weight” method which can circulate
the influx out of the well and kill the well in one circulation. However,
concerns about gas migration can result if the “wait” period is too long.
In this situation, the “Driller’s Method” may be used instead. The
“Driller’s Method” kills the well in a minimum of two circulations. The
first circulation will circulate out the influx, and the second circulation
will fill the wellbore with kill mud. Higher choke pressures will be
required during the first circulation of the “Driller’s Method” to
maintain a constant bottom hole pressure.
Expected Influx Volume

During the drilling of a reservoir, a “kick” is taken when the pore
pressure of the formation being drilled exceeds the effective bottom hole
(circulating, or hydrostatic) pressure exerted by the drilling mud. This
results in formation fluids entering the well. The Expected Influx
Volume analysis can be used to determine the volume of the influx. It
is important to point out that the influx is assumed to be a single,
methane gas bubble.
The maximum size of the influx depends on several factors, including:
• The pressure difference between the reservoir formation

pressure and the effective bottom hole pressure. Based on this
pressure difference, the Kick Classification calculations are used
to determine the kick type.
• The reservoir characteristics, including porosity, permeability,
etc.
• The rate of penetration through the reservoir which determines
how much of the reservoir is exposed.
• The type and accuracy of the equipment used to detect the influx
(flowrate or volume change detection).
• How quickly the well is shut in based on crew reaction times.
The following are general steps performed during the analysis to

determine the size of the influx. After you have determined the influx
size, you can determine the effects a kick this size will have by using the
Kick Tolerance analysis mode.
1. The first step is to determine the temperature profile in the well. You
can choose from three temperature profiles on the Temperature

Distribution, Temperature Model Tab. Regardless of the

temperature model chosen, any additional temperatures specified on
the Temperature Distribution, Additional Tab will be incorporated
into the temperature profile.
a) The Steady State Circulation model is the most realistic as the

effect of circulation is included in the model. Refer to Steady
State Circulation Temperature Model calculations for details.
b) The Undisturbed Temperatures model assumes the temperature

profile of the drilling fluid to be the same as the surrounding rock
formation. The profile is based on specified surface and total
depth temperatures, or on a surface temperature combined with
a geothermal gradient.
c) The Constant Temperature model is the least realistic and

assumes one temperature throughout the well.
2. The next step is to determine the type of kick that is occurring. The
type of kick is determined by the pressure difference between the
reservoir formation pressure specified on the Pore Pressure Dialog
and the effective bottom hole pressure. The dynamic bottom hole
pressures are determined by the same algorithms used by Pressure
Loss Analysis calculations. The rheological model and fluid
parameters that impact the analysis are specified on the Fluid
Editor.
WELLPLAN Well Control analysis defines three Kick

Classifications, including: Kick While Drilling, Kick After Pump
Shutdown, and Swab Kick. Estimated influx volumes can be
determined for a “Kick While Drilling” or for “Kick After Pump
Shutdown”. If the kick is determined to be a “Swab Kick”, an
estimated influx volume can not be determined. Refer to Kick
Classification for more information.
3. Based on the kick class, the volume of influx is calculated using
either the Kick While Drilling Influx Estimation calculations, or the
Kick After Pump Shut Down Influx Estimation calculations.
Kick Tolerance
Use this analysis mode to simulate the circulation of a kick while
drilling, a swab induce kick or after the pumps have shut down.
1. The first step is to determine the temperature profile in the well. You
can choose from three temperature profiles on the Temperature

Distribution-Temperature Model Tab. Regardless of the

temperature model chosen, additional temperatures specified on the
Temperature Distribution-Additional Tab will be incorporated into
the temperature profile.
a) The Steady State Circulation model is the most realistic as the

effect of circulation is included in the model. Refer to Steady
State Circulation Temperature Model calculations for details.
b) The Undisturbed Temperatures model assumes the temperature

profile of the drilling fluid to be the same as the surrounding rock
formation. The profile is based on specified surface and total
depth temperatures, or on a surface temperature combined with
a geothermal gradient.
c) The Constant Temperature model is the least realistic and

assumes one temperature throughout the well.
The next step is to determine the type of kick that is occurring using
the Kick Classification calculations. WELLPLAN Well Control
analysis defines three kick classifications, including: Kick While
Drilling, Kick After Pump Shutdown, and Swab Kick. The type of
kick is determined by the pressure difference between the reservoir
formation pressure specified on the Pore Pressure Dialog and the
effective bottom hole pressure. The dynamic bottom hole pressures
are determined by the same algorithms used by Pressure Loss
Analysis calculations. The rheological model and fluid parameters
that impact the analysis are specified on the Fluid Editor.
2. After the kick class is determined, you can choose from several
analysis related to wellbore pressures during a kick. For the kicks
while drilling or kicks after pump shutdown, the Pressure Loss
calculations are performed by the same method used in
WELLPLAN Hydraulics. Pressure loss calculations are required
for these kick types to determine the annular and choke frictional
pressure losses resulting from pumping kill mud through the
annulus. The following analyses are available.
• Pressure at Depth: This analysis determines the pressure at a

specified depth as well as the volume of kill mud pumped. This
analysis is not available for Swab Kicks because this type of kick
is circulated without pumping kill mud. The results of this
analysis are available on the Pressure at Depth Plot. To
determine the volume of pumped, and the influx volume as the
influx is circulated, the Influx Circulation Model for Kick While
Drilling or Kick After Pump Shutdown calculations are

performed. After the volume of the influx (and therefore the

height of the influx in the annulus) is known, the Pressure at
Depth of Interest calculations can be performed. The analysis
uses several parameters input on the Kick Tolerance Dialog,
including: Kill Rate, Total Influx Volume, Depth of Interest, and
Kill Mud Gradient. Total Influx Volume can be calculated using
the Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode. Fracture Gradient
and Pore Pressure data at the Depth of Interest will be plotted if
available. This plot can be used to determine if the pressure at the
Depth of Interest will remain within the wellbore pore and
fracture pressures.
• Maximum Pressure: This analysis determines the maximum

pressure at points along the wellbore along with the associated
measured depth (from surface to maximum measured depth).
The results of this analysis are available on the Maximum
Pressure Plot. To determine the pressures in the well as a
function of volume of pumped, and the influx volume as the
influx is circulated, the Influx Circulation Model for Kick While
Drilling or Kick After Pump Shutdown or Influx Circulation
Model for Swab Kicks calculations are performed. The analysis
used several parameters input on the Kick Tolerance Dialog,
including: Kill Rate, Total Influx Volume, and Kill Mud
Gradient. Total Influx Volume can be calculated using the
Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode. Fracture Gradient and
Pore Pressure data at the Depth of Interest will be plotted if
available, and the measured depth location of the last casing
shoe.This plot can be used to determine if the pressure at any
wellbore depth below the last casing shoe will remain within the
wellbore pore and fracture pressures.
• Allowable Kick Volume: This analysis determines the pressure

for several influx volumes. The influx volume increment is
calculated as the annulus volume from the kick measured depth
to the measured depth of the shoe, divided by eight. The first
influx volume used in the calculations is equal to the influx
volume increment. Each succeeding influx volume is the last
influx volume plus the influx volume increment. The analysis
continues until the last influx volume fills the annulus from the
kick measured depth to the measured depth of the last casing
shoe. The results of this analysis are available on the Allowable
Kick Volume Plot. To determine the pressures resulting from the
various influx volumes, the Influx Circulation Model for Kick
While Drilling or Kick After Pump Shutdown or the Influx
Circulation Model for Swab Kicks calculations are performed.
The analysis used several parameters input on the Kick
Tolerance dialog, including: Kill Rate, Depth of Interest, and

Kill Mud Gradient. Fracture Gradient and Pore Pressure data at

the Depth of Interest will be plotted if available. This plot can be
used to determine if the maximum influx volume that can be
taken at the current bit measured depth that will not exceed the
wellbore fracture gradient at the depth of interest.
• Safe Drilling Depth: This analysis determines the pressure

resulting from an influx taken at several measured depths as the
well is drilled past the current measured depth. The results of
this analysis are available on the Safe Drilling Depth Plot. This
analysis is performed by moving the bit location ahead, taking a
kick and performing an Influx Circulation Model for Kick While
Drilling or Kick After Pump Shutdown or Influx Circulation
Model for Swab Kicks. The analysis uses several parameters
input on the Kick Tolerance dialog, including: Kill Rate, Total
Influx Volume, Depth Interval to Check, and Kill Mud Gradient.
Total Influx Volume can be calculated using the Expected Influx
Volume Analysis Mode. Fracture Gradient and Pore Pressure
data at the Depth of Interest will be plotted if available. This plot
can be used to determine the maximum depth where pressures
related to the Total Influx Volume will remain within the
wellbore pore and fracture pressures.
• Formation Breakdown Gradient: This analysis determines the

pressure gradient in the wellbore at depths in the wellbore
between the casing shoe measured depth and the kick measured
depth. Influx Circulation Model for Swab Kicks or Influx
Circulation Model for Kick While Drilling or Kick After Pump
Shutdown calculations are performed to determine the pressures.
The results of this analysis are available on the Formation
Breakdown Gradient Plot. This plot can be used to determine if
the pressure gradient at any location in the wellbore below the
casing shoe will be outside the safety zone between the wellbore
pore and fracture pressure gradients. The analysis the Kill Rate,
Total Influx Volume, and Kill Mud Gradient parameters input
on the Kick Tolerance dialog. Total Influx Volume can be
calculated using the Expected Influx Volume Analysis Mode. In
addition to the measured depth location of the last casing shoe,
Fracture Gradient and Pore Pressure data will be plotted if
available. This plot can be used to determine if the pressure
gradient at any location in the wellbore below the casing shoe
will be outside the safety zone between the wellbore pore and
fracture pressure gradients.
• Full Evacuation to Gas: This analysis determines the pressure

in the wellbore assuming the entire wellbore annulus is filled
with methane gas. The pressure in the wellbore is due to the

hydrostatic pressure of the gas as determined by the gas density

resulting from the wellbore temperature at that depth. The
results of this analysis are available on the Full Evacuation to
Gas plot. The analysis does not any parameters input on the Kick
Tolerance dialog. Fracture gradient and pore pressure data will
be plotted if available.
Kill Sheet
Refer to the Kill Sheet Calculations.

Allowable Kick Volume Calculations

This analysis determines the pressure for several influx volumes. The
influx volume increment is calculated as the annulus volume from the
kick measured depth to the measured depth of the shoe, divided by eight.
The first influx volume used in the calculations is equal to the influx
volume increment. Each succeeding influx volume is the last influx
volume plus the influx volume increment. The analysis continues until
the last influx volume fills the annulus from the kick measured depth to
the measured depth of the last casing shoe. The results of this analysis
are available on the allowable kick volume plot.
To determine the pressures resulting from the various influx volumes,

the Influx Circulation Model for Kick While Drilling or Kick After Pump
Shutdown or the Influx Circulation Model for Swab Kicks calculations
are performed. The analysis uses several parameters input on the Kick
Tolerance Dialog, including: Kill Rate, Depth of Interest, and Kill Mud
Gradient.
Fracture Gradient and Pore Pressure data at the Depth of Interest will be
plotted if available.
This plot can be used to determine if the maximum influx volume that
can be taken at the current bit measured depth that will not exceed the
wellbore fracture gradient at the depth of interest.
Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate Calculations

The influx model is:
kt
tD =
φµcRw2

If (t D > 10 ) then,
 t  4πhk∆P 
V =  D  
 ln(t D )  µ 
 1 1  4πhk∆P 
Q =  − 2 
 
 ln (t D ) ln (t D )  µ 
else
 2  t D    1  1.5  t D   
( )
2

V =   t D +  +  0.5 t D + 
0.5
 2πRw2 hφc
 π  2    6π  16 
  
 1 t
0.5
  t   2πhk∆P 
Q =   0.5 0.5 − D 0.5  +  0.5 + D   
 tD π 4π   8   µ 

Refer to the Viscosity And Compressibility Of Methane calculations.
Where:
V ( )
= Influx v olum e, m
3
= Flow rate, (m s )
3
Q
tD = Dim ensionless tim e factor
k ( )
= Perm eability, m
2
t = Tim e, one tim e step is 5 seconds, (sec)

φ = Porosity
µ (
= Gas v iscosity, Nsm
2
)
∆P = Pressure difference between annulus fluid and form atio
h = Height of penetration into form ation, (m )

 m2 
c = Gas com pressibility,  
 N 
Rw = Annulus radius (m )

Gas Compressibility
T
Tr =
Tc
P
Pr =
Pc
Pr
A = Ωa 2.5
Tr ..
Pr
B = Ωb
Tr
C1 = − AB
(
C2 = A − B 2 − B )
q = −(C 2 − 0.333333)
 C 
r = − C1 + 2 − 0.0740740 
 3 
(
t = 27.0 ∗ r 2 − 4.0q 3 )

If (t>0)
If (q>0)
  3  1 .5  r  
Φ = a cosh    ∗   
 q   2  

 2 
Z =   ( q ) cosh Φ3  + 0.333333
 3  
If (q<0)
  3  1 .5  r  
Φ = a sinh    ∗  
  − q   2  

 2 
Z =   ( 
) Φ
− q  sinh  + 0 .333333
 3  3
If (q=0)
Z = r . 0.333333 + 0 .333333
If (t<=0)
  3  1 .5  r  
Φ = a cos    ∗   
 q   2  

 2 
Z =   ( q ) cos Φ3  + 0.333333
 3  
Where:
Acosh = Inverse hyperbolic cosine
Asinh = Inverse hyperbolic sine
Cosh = Hyperbolic cosing
Sinh = Hyperbolic sine
Ωa = 0.427480233548
Ωb = 0.0866403499633
T = Gas temperature
P = Gas pressure
Tc = 207.98 K ° , critical temperature of methane
Pc = 4601000 Pa, critical pressure of methane
Z = Gas compressibility factor (Z factor)

Influx Circulation Model for Kick While Drilling or After Pump

Shutdown
In this circulation model, the analysis is performed in a number of
discrete steps with each representing a volume of mud pumped. The
basic algorithm is to pump one volume increment of mud, and then
determine the location of the influx, and the influx properties such as
height, volume, and density. The mass remains constant until the influx
begins to exit the annulus. By comparing the change in influx volume
from one step to the next, an influx expansion factor is determined. This
expansion factor is used to calculate the acceleration (beyond the pump
rate) of the mud flowing above the influx in the annulus.
The following equations and descriptions are a simplification of the

actual algorithms employed in the software. Additional complexity
arises due to the arbitrary complexity of the wellbore. Over the length of
an influx bubble, the annulus cross sectional area and curvature may
change multiple times. The influx circulation algorithm divides each
influx solution into multiple problems distributed over constant annulus
cross sections. The curvature over these sections dictates the
complexity of relating measured depth to true vertical depth, which is a
controlling factor in the determination of influx height. The solution is
further divided into sections or reasonably constant temperature and
compressibility factor (Z).
Determine influx volume

The initial influx volume (V) is input as “Total Influx Volume” on the
Kick Tolerance Dialog. This volume is calculated in the case of the
Allowable Kick Volume analysis.
Determine initial height of the influx

The true vertical depth length (h) of the influx is determined from the
survey data based on the measured depth length in the annulus occupied
by the initial influx volume.
Determine initial pressure

The initial pressure Pk of the influx is the “Kick Interval Pressure”
specified on the Kick Class Determination Dialog.

Pbot = Pk
Determine the influx mass
 V  P 
M =   bot (
 1 − e λ )
 h  g c 
− gch
λ=
ZRT
Determine the initial density
Pbot
ρ=
ZRT
Determine initial influx gradient
G = ρg c
Determine initial surface pressure
Ps = Pbot − ( ρg c h ) − ( ρ dm g c hdm ) − Pfchoke
Determine the mud pumped increment
Vinc = (Va + Vs ) 80

Circulate the influx out of the annulus

The following calculations are repeated until the influx has been
Pump one increment of mud and determine the new location of the
bottom of the influx. The bottom of the influx will move up the annulus
by the measured depth required to hold one mud increment of volume in
that annulus section.
Vinc
MD inc =
A
MD bot = MD bot − prev − MD inc
Determine the hydrostatic pressure of the drilling mud column below

the influx. For “Wait and Weight” method, the kill mud will not enter
the annulus until the total volume of mud pumped is greater than, or
equal to the string volume. For the “Driller’s” method, kill mud will
never enter the annulus until the influx is circulated out.
Phdm = hdm ρ dm g c
Phkm = hkm ρ km g c
Determine the new pressure at the bottom of the influx
Pbot = PK − Phdm − Phkm − Pfchoke
Once the bottom of the influx is moved to its new position, determine if
the last volume will place the top of the influx outside of the annulus.
If the top of the influx is inside the annulus

To determine the new volume and height of the influx, a new influx
height is assumed. Iteration is performed until the following sets of
dependent simultaneous equations converge to a solution. The mass is
a constant until the influx starts to exit the annulus.

 V  P 
M =   bot (
 1 − e λ )
 h  g c 
Pbot
ρ=
ZRT
M
V =
ρ
If the top of the influx is outside the annulus

In this case, the volume and height are known.
 V  P 
M =   bot (
 1 − e λ )
 h  g c 
Pbot
ρ=
ZRT
Determine the new influx gradient
G = ρg c
Determine the new surface pressure
Ps = Pbot − ( ρg c h ) − ( ρ m g c hm ) − ( ρ km g c hkm ) − Pfchoke
Refer to the Gas Compressibility and Z Factor calculations.

Where:
Pbot = P ressure at bottom of influx
PK = Initial kick pressure
Phdm = H ydrostatic pressure of the m ud from the well bottom
to the influx bottom
Phkm = H ydrostatic pressure of the kill m ud from the well
bottom to the influx bottom
P fchoke = F rictional pressure loss through the choke and kill lines.
T his is calculated using the pipe pressure loss equations
for the m ud rheology m odel
G = Influx pressure gradient
M = M ass of influx
V = V olum e of influx
V a = A nnulus v olum e
V s = S tring v olum e
V inc = M ud pum ped v olum e increm ent
h = T V D height of influx
h dm = T V D height of the drilling m ud in the annulus
h km = T V D height of the kill m ud in the annulus
g c = G rav itational constant
Z = C om pressibility factor
R = G as constant
T = Influx tem perature, determ ined from annular tem perature profile
ρ = Influx density
ρ dm = D rilling m ud density
ρ km = K ill m ud density
A = A nnulus cross sectional area
MD inc = M easured depth increm ent
MD bot = M easured depth location of the influx bottom
MD i = Initial m easured depth of bit
MD bot − prev = P ressure m easured depth of influx bottom
Influx Circulation Model for Swab Kicks

In this circulation model, mud circulation is not performed. The influx
is removed in a number of discrete steps. The influx is moved to the top
and exits the annulus as the string is moved up the annulus. As the bit
is moved up, the bottom of the influx is always kept at the same depth
as the bit. Each step is represented by a new bit location. At each depth,
the influx properties, such as height, volume, and density are
determined. The mass remains constant until the influx begins to exit
the annulus. By comparing the change in influx volume from one step

to the next, an influx expansion factor is determined. This expansion

factor is used to calculate the acceleration of the mud being pushed
above the influx.
The following equations and descriptions are a simplification of the

actual algorithms employed in the software. Additional complexity
arises due to the arbitrary complexity of the wellbore. Over the length
of an influx bubble, the annulus cross sectional area and curvature may
change multiple times. The influx circulation algorithm divides each
influx solution into multiple problems distributed over constant annulus
cross sections. The curvature over these sections dictates the
complexity of relating measured depth to true vertical depth, which is a
controlling factor in the determination of influx height. The solution is
further divided into sections or reasonably constant temperature and
compressibility factor (Z).
Determine influx volume

The initial influx volume (V) is input as “Total Influx Volume” on the
Kick Tolerance dialog. This volume is calculated in the case of the
Allowable Kick Volume analysis.
Determine initial height of the influx

The true vertical depth length (h) of the influx is determined from the
survey data based on the measured depth length in the annulus occupied
by the initial influx volume.
Determine initial pressure

The initial pressure Pk of the influx is the “Kick Interval Pressure”
specified on the Kick Class Determination Dialog.
Pbot = Pk
Determine influx mass
 V  P 
M =   bot (
 1 − e λ )
 h  g c 

− gch
λ=
ZRT
Determine initial density
Pbot
ρ=
ZRT
Determine initial influx gradient
G = ρg c
Determine initial surface pressure
Ps = Pbot − ( ρg c h ) − ( ρ dm g c hdm )
Determine the measured depth increment
MDinc = MDi 80
Circulate the influx out of the annulus

The following calculations are repeated until the influx has been
Move the bit and bottom of the influx up one measured depth increment.
MDbot = MDbot − prev − MDinc

Determine the hydrostatic pressure of the drilling mud column below

the influx. Kill mud will not enter the annulus because kill mud is not
pumped for “Swab Kicks”.
Phdm = hdm ρ dm g c
Determine the new pressure at the bottom of the influx. There is no

choke frictional loss because mud is not being pumped.
Pbot = PK − Phdm
Once the bottom of the influx is moved to its new position, determine if
the last volume will place the top of the influx outside of the annulus.
If the top of the influx is inside the annulus:
To determine the new volume and height of the influx, a new influx
height is assumed. Iteration is performed until the following sets of
dependent simultaneous equations converge to a solution. The mass is
a constant until the influx starts to exit the annulus.
 V  P 
M =   bot (
 1 − e λ )
 h  g c 
Pbot
ρ=
ZRT
M
V=
ρ
If the top of the influx is outside the annulus:
In this case, the volume and height are known.

 V  P 
M =   bot (
 1 − e λ )
 h  g c 
Pbot
ρ=
ZRT
Determine the new influx gradient.
G = ρg c
Determine the new surface pressure.
Ps = Pbot − ( ρg c h ) − ( ρ dm g c hdm )
Refer to the Gas Compressibility and Z Factor calculations.
Where:

Pbot = Pressure at bottom of influx
PK = Initial kick pressure

Phdm = Hydrostatic pressure of the drilling m ud from well bottom to influx bottom
G = Influx pressure gradient
M = M ass of influx
V = Volum e of influx
h = TVD height of influx
h dm = TVD height of the drilling m ud in the annulus
gc = G rav itational constant
Z = Com pressibility factor
R = G as constant
T = Influx tem perature, determ ined from annular tem perature profile
ρ = Influx density
ρ dm = Drilling m ud density
MD inc = M easured depth increm ent
MD bot = M easured depth location of the influx bottom
MD i = Initial m easured depth of bit
MD bot − prev = Pressure m easured depth of influx bottom
Kick Classification
WELLPLAN Well Control analysis defines three kick classifications,
including: Kick While Drilling, Kick After Pump Shutdown, and Swab
Kick. Estimated influx volumes can be determined for a “Kick While
Drilling” or for “Kick After Pump Shutdown”. If the kick is determined
to be a “Swab Kick”, an estimated influx volume can not be determined.
Kick While Drilling

Pore Pressure > Dynamic BHP > Static BHP
This will occur if the formation pore pressure exceeds the dynamic
circulating pressure exerted by the drilling fluid.
In this case, the kick is circulated out by pumping kill mud for Weight
& Wait Method, or by pumping drilling mud during the first circulation
of the Driller’s Method.

Kick After Pump Shutdown

Dynamic BHP > Pore Pressure > Static BHP
This will occur if the formation pore pressure is lower than the
circulating pressure of the drilling mud, and sufficient over balance
exists. However, when the pumps are shut down and the circulation
stops, the hydrostatic pressure of the mud alone is insufficient to
counteract the pore pressure exerted.
In this case, the kick is circulated out by pumping kill mud for Weight
& Wait Method, or by pumping drilling mud during the first circulation
of the Driller’s Method.
Swab Kick
Dynamic BHP > Static BHP > Pore Pressure
With the formation pore pressure lower than the hydrostatic pressure of
the mud, a kick can occur through swabbing of the formation. Swabbing
can occur while pulling the work string out of the hole.
In this case, the annulus pressure profile is modeled by moving the string
with the influx, and mud is not pumped to move the influx. The bottom
of the influx is keep even with the bottom of the bit. Expected Influx
calculations are not allowed.
Kick After Pump Shut Down Influx Estimation

The sequence of events during the inflow period is divided into three
time periods.

Time Period A
In this time period, indications of the kick are apparent by use of the rigs
kick detection equipment on surface. The sensitivity of this equipment
is a factor in how much influx is taken during this period.
The Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate Calculations are used to
determine the volume of the influx and the flow rate of the mud above
the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period A. These calculations
are performed for a series of five-second-time steps until the calculated
volume, or flow rate is detectable. For these calculations, the following
conditions apply.
a) The rate of penetration, ROP, is zero because there is no rotation.
b) The flow rate is zero because the pumps are shut down.
c) The pressure difference, ∆P , between the formation and the

drilling fluid column is between the pore pressure and the
calculated dynamic bottom hole pressure. The pressure
difference is due to hydrostatic pressure of the mud column.
Frictional pressure loss is not generated because the mud pumps
are off.
d) The height of penetrated reservoir, h, is constant based on the

“Exposed Height” specified on the Influx Volume Estimation
Reservoir Tab.

The values for volume of influx, V, and flowrate, Q, are calculated for
each five-second-time step until the end of Period A is determined based
on the following conditions related to kick detection equipment.
For kicks detected by “Flowrate Variation”

Perform the calculations until the calculated flowrate, Q, is greater than
or equal to the magnitude of the detectable flowrate variation.
For kicks detected by “Volume Variation”

Perform the calculations until the calculated influx volume, V, minus
the flowrate, Q, times the specified “Detection Time Delay” is greater
than or equal to the magnitude of the detectable volume variation.
Time Period B
This time period does not apply to “Kicks After Pump Shut Down”
because there is no circulation.
Time Period C
In this time period, the well is secured. The BOP and choke valves are
made ready before the well is finally closed in. How quickly this can be
achieved depends on the crew reaction times specified on the Influx
Volume Estimation Reaction Times Tab. Only at this stage are further
formation fluids prevented from entering the well. The initial influx
volume is at a maximum.
the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period C. These calculations
are performed for a series of five-second-time steps until the
accumulated time steps exceed the time span of Period C. For these
calculations, the following conditions apply.
a) The rate of penetration, ROP, is zero because rotation has

stopped.
b) The mud flow rate is zero because the pumps are stopped.



Frictional pressure loss is not generated because the pumps are
off.
d) The height of penetrated reservoir, h, is now a constant value

equal to “Exposed Height” specified on the Influx Volume
Estimation Reservoir Tab.
Results
The total influx volume is the sum of the influx volumes calculated for
Time Period A and Time Period C. The influx volume at the time of
detection is equal to the influx volume at the end of Time Period A. The
kick detection time is equal to the length Time Period A.
Kick While Drilling Influx Estimation

The sequence of events during the inflow period is divided into three
time periods.
Time Period A
In this time period, indications of the kick are apparent by use of the rigs
kick detection equipment on surface. The sensitivity of this equipment
is a factor in how much influx is taken during this period.

the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period A. These calculations
are performed for a series of five-second-time steps until the calculated
volume, or flow rate is detectable. For these calculations, the following
conditions apply.
a) The rate of penetration, ROP, is set to the ROP specified on the

Influx Volume Estimation - Reservoir Tab.
b) The flow rate is set to the drilling flow rate.

difference is due to hydrostatic pressure of the mud column, and
the frictional pressure loss in the annulus.
d) The height of penetrated reservoir, h, begins at zero, and

increases based on ROP and elapsed time until the time has
exceeded the length of Time Period A. For each five-second-
time step, h will increase by a factor of (5 ∗ ROP ) .
The values for volume of influx, V, and flowrate, Q, are calculated for
each five-second-time step until the end of Period A is determined based
on the following conditions related to kick detection equipment.
For kicks detected by “Flowrate Variation”

Perform the calculations until the calculated flowrate, Q, is greater than
or equal to the magnitude of the detectable flowrate variation.
For kicks detected by “Volume Variation”

Perform the calculations until the calculated influx volume, V, minus
the flowrate, Q, times the specified “
Detection Time Delay” is greater than or equal to the magnitude of the

detectable volume variation.
Time Period B
In this time period, the drilling is stopped, the bit is pulled off-bottom
and the pumps are shut down. How quickly this can be achieved
depends on the crew reaction times specified on the Influx Volume
Estimation Reaction Times Tab.

the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period B. These calculations
accumulated time steps exceed the time span of Period B. For these

stopped.
b) The flow rate is set to the drilling flow rate.

difference is due to hydrostatic pressure of the mud column, and
the frictional pressure loss in the annulus.

equal to the time spent in Period A multiplied by the ROP
specified on the Influx Volume Estimation Reservoir Tab.
Time Period C
In this time period, the well is secured. The BOP and choke valves are
made ready before the well is finally closed in. How quickly this can be
achieved depends on the crew reaction times specified on the Influx
Volume Estimation Reaction Times Tab. Only at this stage are further
formation fluids prevented from entering the well. The initial influx
volume is at a maximum.
the influx in the annulus at the end of Time Period C. These calculations
accumulated time steps exceed the time span of Period C. For these

stopped.
b) The mud flow rate is zero because the pumps are stopped.



Frictional pressure loss is not generated because the pumps are
off.

equal to the time spent in Period A multiplied by the ROP
specified on the Influx Volume Estimation Reservoir Tab.
Results
The total influx volume is the sum of the influx volumes calculated for
the three time periods. The influx volume at the time of detection is
equal to the influx volume at the end of Time Period A. The kick
detection time is equal to the length of Time Period A.
Kill Sheet
Initial Circulating Pressure
PICP = PSIDP + PP + PO
Final Circulating Pressure
ρ 
PFCP = PP  KM 
 ρ DM 
Kill Mud Weight
 PSIDP 
ρ KM =   + ρ DM
 DKTVD ∗ 0.052 

Final Mud Weight
ρ FM = ρ KM + ρ TM
Kill Mud Weight Increase
ρ KM = ρ KM − ρ DM
PSIDP
ρ KM =
(0 .052 D KTVD )
Final Mud Weight Increase
∆ ρ FM = ρ FM − ρ KM
∆ ρ FM = ρ TM
Kill Mud Weighting Material Required
WTW = VT ρ W
( ρ KM − ρ DM )
( ρ W − ρ KM )
Final Mud Weighting Material Required
WFW = VT ρ W
( ρ FM − ρ KM )
( ρ W − ρ FM )
Formation Pressure
PF = PSIDP + PHDM

Formation Equivalent Mud Weight
PF
ρ FEQM =
0.052 DKTVD
Leak Off Equivalent Mud Weight
PLO
ρ LEQM = + ρ LM
0.052 DSTVD
Casing Maximum Allowed Pressure
PCM = (ρ LEQM − ρ DM )DSTVD (0.052)
Drill Pipe Pressure
PDP = PICP − ∆PHDM + ∆PFR − POC
Total Delta Frictional Pressure
ρ 
∆PTFR = PP  KM  − 1
 ρ DM 
Delta Hydrostatic Pressure
∆PHD = ( ρ KM − ρ DM )(0.052 )( DKMTVD )

Delta Frictional Pressure
D 
∆PFR = ∆PTFR  KMMD 
 D KM 
Overkill Pressure Correction
D 
POC = PO  KMTVD 
 DKTVD 

Where:
PICP = Initial circulating pressure
PSIDP = Shut in drill pipe pressure
PP = Pump pressure
PO = Overkill pressure
PFCP = Final circulating pressure

PF = Formation pressure
PHDM = Hydrostatic drill mud pressure at total depth
PFEQM = Formation equivalent mud weight
PLO = Leak off pressure
PCM = Maximum casing pressure allowed

PDP = Drill pipe pressure
PFR = Frictional pressure
POC = Overkill pressure correction
W TW = Total weight of weighting material
WW = W eight of weighting material
W FW = Final weight of weighting material

ρ KM = Kill mud density
ρ DM = Drill mud density
ρ FM = Final mud density
ρ TM = Trip margin density
ρ LEQM = Leak off equivalent mud density
ρ LM = Leak off mud density
ρW = W eighting material density
D KTVD = True vertical depth of kick
DSTVD = True vertical depth of shoe
D KM = Kill mud depth

D KMTVD = True vertical depth of kill mud
D KMMD = Measured depth of kill mud
VT = Total mud volume

Pressure at Depth of Interest
Pd = PP + ∆Pmf − ∆Pg − ∆Pmh
Where:
Pd = P re s s u re a t th e d e p th o f in te re s t
PP = F o rm a tio n p o re p re s s u re a s s p e c if ie d b y th e “K ic k
In te rv a l P re s s u re ” o n th e K ic k C la s s D e te rm in a tio n d ia lo g
Pmf = F ric tio n a l p re s s u re lo s s d u e to th e m u d f lo w f ro m th e
d e p th o f in te re s t to th e s u rf a c e . T h e f ric tio n a l p re s s u re
lo s s e s in c lu d e th e c h o k e a n d k ill lin e p re s s u re lo s s .
T h e s a m e a lg o rith m s a s u s e d b y W E L L P L A N H y d ra u lic s
p e rf o rm th e f ric tio n a l p re s s u re lo s s c a lc u la tio n s . T h e s e
a lg o rith m s a re b a s e d o n th e rh e o lo g y m o d e l s p e c if ie d
o n th e f lu id e d ito r a s w e ll a s m u d p a ra m e te rs s u c h a s
P V /Y P /0 -S e c G e l o r F a n n d a ta .
Pg = H y d ro s ta tic p re s s u re o f th e g a s c o lu m n f ro m th e b o tto m
h o le lo c a tio n to th e d e p th o f in te re s t.
P mh = H y d ro s ta tic p re s s u re o f th e m u d c o lu m n f ro m th e b o tto m
h o le lo c a tio n to th e d e p th o f in te re s t. T h e s e in c lu d e a ll
d rillin g m u d a n d k ill m u d .
Pressure Loss Analysis

The following general analysis steps are used to determine pressure
losses in the various segments of the circulating system. For more
information concerning the pressure loss calculations, refer to the
Hydraulics Analysis section in this book.
1. The first step is to Calculate PV, YP, 0-Gel and Fann Data as
required. The Bingham Plastic and Power Law pressure loss
calculations require PV/YP data. If Fann data is input, PV/YP/0-Sec
Gel can be calculated. Herschel-Bulkley requires Fann data. If Fann
data not is input on the Fluid Editor, it can be calculated from
PV/YP/0-Sec Gel data.
2. Calculate work string and annular pressure losses are based on the
rheological model selected using the Bingham Plastic rheology
model calculations, Power Law rheology model calculations or
Herschel-Bulkley rheology model calculations.
3. Calculate the bit pressure loss.

4. Calculate tool joint pressure losses, if required as specified on the

Rate Dialog or the Rates Dialog.
5. Determine mud motor, or MWD pressure losses as input on the

Mud Motor Catalog or the MWD Catalog.
6. Calculate the pressure losses in the surface equipment using the

pipe pressure loss equations for the selected rheological model.
7. Calculate the total pressure loss by adding all pressure losses

together.
8. Calculate ECD if required.
Steady State Circulation Temperature Model

To determine the temperatures along the entire wellbore length, the
wellbore is divided into several sections. The following calculations are
performed for each section, beginning at the annulus surface.
Set initial parameter values for first section
a =1
b=0
Tag = T0

Calculate constants for this section
B  4
C1 = 1 + 1 + 
2 A  B 
B  4 
C2 = 1 − 1 +
2 A  B 
B 4
C 3 = 1 + 1 + 1 + 
2 B
B 4
C 4 = 1 + 1 − 1 + 
2 B
mc p
A=
2πrpU p
raU a
B=
r pU p
Calculate K parameters for this section
e (C2 L ) (aC 4 − 1)
α=
e (C1L ) (1 − aC 3 )
GL(a − 1) + GA + (a − 1)T0 + b
β=
(1 − aC3 )e (C1L )
Tag − T0 − βC 3
K2 =
αC 3 + C 4
K 1 = αK 2 + β
Estimate annulus temperature for next section
Tag = K 1C 3 e (C1L ) + K 2 C 4 e (C2 L ) + GL + T0

Calculate parameters for next section
α +1
a=
αC3 + C 4
(β + T0 − GA)(αC3 + C 4 ) − (βC3 + T0 )(α + 1)
b=
(αC3 + C 4 )
Repeat calculations for C constant parameters for this section. Repeat

cycle for all sections.
Calculate workstring and annulus temperatures

When all depth section parameters (all K, and all C) have been
determined, calculate the following annulus and workstring
temperatures for all depth sections.
Workstring Temperature
TP = K 1e C1L + K 2 e C2 L + To + GL − GA
Annulus Temperature
Ta = K 1C 3 e C1L + K 2 C 4 e C2 L + GL + To

Where:
Tp = Workstring temperature at depth L, (K)
Ta = Annulus temperature at depth L, (K)
Tag = Estimate annulus temperature at depth L, (K)
To = Flow line mud temperature, (K)
G = Geothermal gradient based on temperature data input on Undisturbed Temperature
Tabs ,or is interpolated using the data from the Undisturbed Temperature, Additional
(
Tab . Km
−1
)
= Massflux, (.kgs )
−1
m
cp = Heat capacity of mud, . Jkg. K ( −1 −1
)
Up = Overall heat transfer coefficient through workstring, 1680 Js m K ( −1 −2
−1
)
Ua = Overall heat transfer coefficient through annulus, 170.3 Js m K ( −1 −2
−1
)
rp = Workstring radius, (m)
ra = Annulus radius, (m)
L = Measured depth section length, (m)
Viscosity and Compressibility of Methane
Calculate the viscosity of methane at temperature and

pressure
P
Pr =
Pc
T
Tr =
Tc
(
f = A 0 + A1 Pr + A 2 Pr + A 3 Pr3 +
2
)
(
T r A 4 + A 5 Pr + A 6 Pr + A 7 Pr + 2 3
)
Tr
2
(A 8 + A 9 Pr + A10 Pr + A11 Pr3 +
2
)
Tr
3
(A 12 + A13 Pr + A14 Pr2 + A15 Pr3 )
µ base
µ =ef This value is used in the Estimated Influx Calculation
Tr

Calculate the compressibility of methane at temperature

and pressure
Pr
f 1 = 0.07408
Tr3.5
0.4275 P
f2 = 1.5
− 0.01501 r − 0.08664
Tr Tr
Z
N = f1 − f 2
Tr
0.4275 P
r1 = 1.5
− 0.007506 r − 0.08664
Tr Tr
r
D = 3Z 2 − 2 Z + Pr 1
Tr
1 N
r2 = −
Pr DZ
r2
c= This value is used in the Estimated Influx Calculation
Pc
Use the Gas Compressibility (Z Factor) calculations.

Where:
µ (
= Gas Viscosity at T and P, Nsm
2
)
c (
= Gas compressibility at T and P, m
2
N )
T = Kick temperature (deg Kelvin)
P = Kick Pressure , (Pa)
Tc = Critical temperature of methane at 207.98 deg Kelvin
Pc = Critical pressure of methane at 4,602,000 Pa
Tr = Reduced temperature
Pr = Reduced pressure
µ base = Base viscosity for methane, 0.016 ∗ 10 −3 cp
Z = Gas compressibility factor
Constants:
A0 = −2.46211820 ∗ 10 −00
A1 = −2.97054714 ∗ 10 −00
A2 = −2.86264054 ∗ 10 −01
A3 = 8.05420522 ∗ 10 −03
A4 = 2..80860949 ∗ 10 −00
A5 = −3.49803305 ∗ 10 −00
A6 = 3.60373020 ∗ 10 −01
A7 = −1.04432413 ∗ 10 −02
A8 = −7.93385684 ∗ 10 −01
A9 = 1.39643306 ∗ 10 −00
A10 = −1.49144925 ∗ 10 −01
A11 = 4.41015512 ∗ 10 −03
A12 = 8.39387178 ∗ 10 −02
A13 = −1.86408848 ∗ 10 −01
A14 = 2.03367881 ∗ 10 −02
A15 = −6.09579263 ∗ 10 −04

References
General
Hage, J.I., Shell Research Rijswijk, Surewaard, J.H.G., Shell Research
Rijswijk, Vullinghs, P.J.J., “Application of Research in Kick Detection
and Well Control”, SIPM Paper presented at the IADC European Well
Control Conference, Noordwijkerhout, June 2-4, 1992.
Rabia, H., “Fundamentals of Casing Design”, Graham and Trotman,

1987.
Estimated Influx Volume and Flow Rate

Van Everdingen, A.F. and Hurst, W., “The Application of the Laplace
Transformation to Flow Problems in Reservoirs”, Trans. AIDE 186,
305-324, 1949.
Gas Compressibility (Z Factor) Model Calculations

Redlich, O. and Kwong, J.N.S., Chem. Rev., 44,233,(1949).
Steady State Temperature

Swift, S.C. and Holmes, C.S., “Calculation of Circulating Mud
Temperatures”, JPT, June 1970.

Chapter 6
Surge Analysis
Surge can be used for planning and designing wells where the control of surge pressures will be
important and for postmortem analysis of well problems related to pressure surges. Surge can be
especially useful in deep holes, while running liners, and while reciprocating pipe during
cementing operations.
Overview
of using the Surge module. You will also become familiar with the data
presented on reports, and plots. To reinforce what you learn in the class,
you will complete several exercises designed to prepare you for using
the program outside of class. The information presented in this chapter
can be used as a study guide during the course, and can also be used as
a reference for future analysis.

Chapter 6: Surge Analysis
Surge Analysis: An Introduction
What is the Surge Module?

The Surge module is a transient pressure model that can be used for
finding surge and swab pressures throughout the wellbore caused by
pipe movement. This analysis can be useful for well planning operations
when surge pressures need to be controlled and when well problems
occurred that were related to pressure surges. It can also be useful for
critical well designs when other surge pressure calculation methods are
not sufficiently accurate.
Surge is based on a fully dynamic analysis of fluid flow and pipe

motion. (Refer to “Supporting Information and Calculations” on
page 337, and the “References” on page 346sections of this chapter for
more information.) This analysis solves the full balance of mass and
balance of momentum for pipe flow and annulus flow.
Surge solutions consider the compressibility of the fluids, the elasticity

of the system, and the dynamic motions of pipes and fluids. Also
considered are surge pressures related to fluid column length below the
moving pipe, compressibility of the formation, and axial elasticity of the
moving string. In-hole fluid properties are adjusted to reflect the effects
of pressure and temperature on the fluids.
Surge uses the wellbore, fluid, survey, workstring, and other parameters
specified in the Case menu options. Operational, depths of interest, and
moving pipe depth parameters are specified in the Parameter menu
options. The analysis results (output) can be displayed on several plots,
tables, and reports, which are accessed through the View menu.
What is the Difference Between a Transient and Steady-State Model?

The calculation of steady-state surge pressures is much easier and faster
than the calculation of transient surge pressures. The transient pressure
model included in the Surge module has several features that a steady-
state model does not have. These features include:
l Compressibility: A transient model accounts for the

compressibility and expansion of the wellbore and fluids.

l Storage: Fluids entering the well do not necessarily mean that

fluids are exiting the well. For example, when viscous forces are
extremely high, the surge pressure will be more related to the water
compression and wellbore expansion than the steady state frictional
pressure drop would indicate.
l Elasticity: Because the drillstring can deform, the bit speed is not
necessarily the draw works speed. For high yield points, pipe
elasticity reduces swab pressures to an important degree.
l Inertia: Fluid movement may be started or stopped. Therefore,

positive and negative pressures may be developed in the same pipe
movement. For high mud weights, fluid inertia results in higher
swab pressures.
When Should I use the Transient Surge Model?

Under what circumstances are the more complex transient pressure
calculations justified? Generally, more accurate estimates for surge
pressures are required when there is a small margin for error.
Some specific operations when Surge is useful include:
l Tripping drill strings in deep hot holes, especially while drilling

below liners
l Running long casing strings, especially those with low clearance
l Running liners, especially for larger sizes run in holes with minimal
clearance
l Analyzing pressure surges due to pipe movement during cementing

of long strings and liners, especially where high pressure gas zones
could be effected by surge pressures
l Optimizing the selection of drilling fluid densities and pipe motions

for wells with narrow margins between pore pressure and fracture
gradients
The following examples illustrate the advantage a transient surge model

can offer.
l Example 1: Assume that the wellbore pressure is close to the

fracture pressure at one point in the open hole section. In other
sections of the well there is a healthy margin relative to the pore

pressure. Using a steady state model, surge pressures would clearly

need to be controlled to prevent fracture, but the swab pressures
would not be a consideration. Transient analysis of swab pressures
would show that rebound pressures at the end of the swab could
exceed the fracture pressure and cause unexpected lost returns.
l Example 2: If the bit is nearing the casing setting depth, the

wellbore pressure will be close to both the fracture pressure (top of
the open hole) and the pore pressure (bottom of the open hole).
surge pressures when tripping in should be maintained below the
fracture pressure and above the pore pressures. In this case, there is
little margin for error, so the most accurate calculation is needed.
l Example 3: Running low clearance liners has the potential to

generate large surge pressures because of the high pressure drop in
the narrow annulus between the liner and wellbore. In this case, the
transient model helps by including an effect not considered in a
steady-state calculations: the elasticity of the work string. Steady-
state models usually assume that the liner moves at the same speed
as the draw works. In this case, the resistance to movement may be
so high that the liner doesn’t move at all, at least not initially. As the
fluid flow develops transiently, the liner will slowly descend,
almost independent of the draw works speed.

Workflow
q Open the Case. (File →Open Case) If you have created a new case,
save the case. (File →Save As)
q Enter general information about the case. (Case →General)
q If this is an offshore well, enter water depth and well type. (Case
→Offshore If this isn’t an offshore well, you won’t be able to
access this dialog.)
q Define the wellbore. (Case →Wellbore)
q Define the workstring. Use the same dialog to define all

workstrings (drillstrings, tubing, liners, and so forth) (Case
→String)
q Enter deviation (survey) data. (Case →Deviation→Survey

Editor)
q Define the fluids used. This can be either mud or cement. You must
define the fluid rheological properties, select a rheology model, and
specify the temperature. You can define as many fluids as you want.
Only one fluid can be used for tripping operations. For
reciprocating operations, you can specify two fluids: a wellbore
fluid and a circulating fluid. You can use a different fluid with each
operation you are analyzing, but you will need to calculate results
each time you change the fluid. (Case →Fluid Editor)
q Define the pore pressure gradients. (Case →Pore Pressure)
q Define the fracture gradients. (Case →Frac Gradient)
q Specify formation temperatures. (Case →Undisturbed

Temperature)
q Optional Step: Specify the formation properties if you know the

elastic properties of the wellbore formations. This information will
result in a more accurate analysis. (Case →Formation Properties)
q Optional Step: Enter the properties of the set cement. The default
value for elastic modulus is 3 X 106 psi. The default value for
Poisson’s ratio is 0.35. (Case →Cement Properties)

q Optional Step: Specify the eccentricity ratio of the annuli at

different measured depths. Eccentricity reduces the pressure drop
for annular flow. This information is useful for evaluating the
effects of eccentricity on a vertical well. For a deviated well, the
pipe is automatically assumed to be fully eccentric in the deviated
sections. (Case →Eccentricity)
q Specify the analysis parameters you want to use for this analysis
run. These parameters apply to all operations you are analyzing.
You must specify the fluid (mud or cement) in use, and one or more
depths (called Moving Pipe Depths) where the bottom of the
moving pipe is located during the analysis. Calculations are
performed at the depths specified in these columns assuming that
the bottom of the moving pipe is at these depths.
(Parameter→Operations Data→Analysis Parameters tab)
q Specify the depth(s) that you are interested in analyzing.(These

depths are called Depth of Interest.) Typically this is the last casing
shoe, and the total depth of the well (TD). Analysis results will be
calculated for each of the Depths of Interest assuming the pipe is at
each of the Moving Pipe Depths specified.
(Parameter→Operations Data→Operations tab)
q Define an operation that you want to analyze. You must enter a

unique name for the operation, and specify the operation type
(surge, swab, or reciprocation). (Parameter→Operations
Data→Operations tab)
q After you have created an operation, you must define the operation
parameters. To do this, click the row number of the operation you
want to define. This will highlight the operation. After the
operation has been highlighted, click the Details button. You won’t
be able to click the Details button until after you create and
highlight the operation. (Parameter→Operations
Data→Operations tab)
q Define the operation details.
For Surge or Swab Operations: Specify the stand length,

acceleration and deceleration speeds. You must also specify if you
want to optimize trip time, or use a float. (Parameter→Operations
Data→Operations tab→Details button→Analysis Details tab) If
you are not optimizing trip time, define the maximum speeds the
workstring can move for each depth interval specified on the
Analysis Depths tab. (If you are optimizing, these values will be
calculated.) The depths on this dialog are defined by the Moving

Pipe Depths you specified in an earlier step.

(Parameter→Operations Data→Operations tab→Details
Button→Analysis Depths tab)
For Reciprocation Operations: Specify the acceleration and
deceleration speeds. You must also specify if you want to optimize
trip time. (Parameter→Operations Data→Operations
tab→Details Button→Analysis Details tab) Next, define the
stroke length, stroke rate, circulating fluid, and flowrate.
(Parameter→Operations Data→Operations tab→Details
Button→Reciprocation Data tab)
q Repeat the above two steps to define as many operations as
necessary. Analyzing more than two or three operations at a time
can become complicated, so you may want to repeat the analysis
steps rather than run one analysis with many operations.
q Calculate the results. (View→Calculate)
q Analyze the results. You will want to review the Surge Limit,
Swab Limit, and Transient Response plots. Use the Surge and
Swab Limit plots to determine if the maximum surge or swab
pressures exceed the pore or fracture pressure gradients. Use the
Transient Response plot to determine if the fluctuating pressures
exceed the pore or fracture pressures. Sometimes a surge operation
may experience pressures below pore pressure, or a swab operation
will experience pressures above the fracture pressure. You will need
to review the Transient Response plots to notice this.

Using Surge Analysis Mode
Starting Surge Analysis

There are two ways to begin the Surge module:
l Select Surge from the Modules menu.
l Click the Surge button .
Select Surge from Modules menu or click Surge button.
Entering Case Data

Surge analysis uses the information input on the Case menu. Entry of
some of this information is discussed in the section “Entering Case
Data” on page 40 of the Basics chapter of this manual. For information
on using the General, Offshore, Wellbore Editor, String Editor,
Deviation, Pore Pressure, Frac Pressure and Undisturbed Temperature
dialogs, please refer to the Basics chapter of this manual.
Case menu options specific to Surge analysis will be covered in this

chapter of the manual. Case menu items specific to Surge analysis are
the Formation Properties spreadsheet, Cement Properties spreadsheet,
and the Eccentricity spreadsheet.


Surge analysis

Use the Case →Fluid Editor dialog to assign the rheological model and
specify other basic characteristics about standard drilling muds or
cement slurries. The Fluid Editor is discussed in the section “Defining
Drilling Fluids” on page 50 of the Basics section of this manual.
The Fluid Editor has the following two tabs while using the Surge
module.
l Standard Muds tab - Use this tab to specify the basic

characteristics of simple or standard drilling muds.
l Cement Slurries tab - Use this tab to specify basic cement slurry
characteristics.
Formation Properties
Use Case →Formation Properties to specify the properties of the
formation if you have this information available. These data are used to
calculate the compressibility of the formation. If you don’t specify data
in this spreadsheet, default values of 1.45 X 106 psi for Elastic Modulus,
and 0.3 for Poisson’s Ratio will be used.
Most of the time you will not have this information available, and the
default values are sufficient. In those situations where you have
information regarding the elastic properties of the wellbore material,
you can use this dialog to obtain a more accurate analysis.
For most formations, the Elastic Modulus ranges between 1 X 106 and
2 X 106 psi. Poisson’s Ratio ranges between 0.2 and 0.3 for most
formations.

Specify the top and bottom of the formation layer, the Elastic Modulus, and
Poisson’s Ratio.
Cement Properties
Use the Case →Cement Properties dialog to specify the elastic
properties of the set cement behind the casing, if you have this
information available. These data help provide more accurate
calculated results of the analysis. If you don’t specify the Cement
Properties using this dialog, the analysis will use the formation
properties input on the Case →Formation Properties dialog.
Use this dialog to specify the properties

of the set cement (behind the casing).
Eccentricity
Use Case →Eccentricity spreadsheet to specify the eccentricity ratio of
the annuli at different depths. Eccentricity reduces the pressure drop for
annular flow.
This information is useful for evaluating the effects of eccentricity on a

vertical well. For a deviated well, the pipe is automatically assumed to
be fully eccentric in the deviated sections.
An eccentric annulus ratio is defined by specifying the displacement

from the centerline divided by the radial clearance outside the moving
pipe. You need to define the eccentricity for each annular section and
then its eccentric value. Define the annular section by specifying a
depth in the Depth cell for the row, and then specify an eccentric value
for the section. A value of zero is concentric and a value of 1 is fully
eccentric.

You can use the WELLPLAN Torque Drag module Position Plot to
determine the position of the string in the wellbore. The position in the
wellbore can be used to determine the eccentricity. Remember, you
must use a stiff string analysis to be able to generate a Position plot.
Check Concentric Annulus to indicate the entire string is concentric in the

annulus. When this box is checked, data in the spreadsheet is not used.
Enter eccentricity = 1 to indicate

string positioned against the
wellbore.
Specifying Surge Operations and Analysis Parameters

Use the two Parameter→Surge Operations Data tabs to specify:
l Operation types you want to analyze and the depths at which the
operation types are performed.
l Moving pipe depths, and whether a wellbore fluid or cementing

fluids are in use.
Analysis Parameters Tab

Use the Parameter→Surge Operations Data→Analysis Parameters
tab to specify moving pipe depths, and the wellbore fluid or cementing
fluids (muds and/or slurries) in use.
Mark the Cementing check box if cementing fluids are in use. When
you mark this box you will need to specify the fluids and/or slurries in
use, and their upper-level depths. When this check box is unmarked,
you cannot specify any slurries and fluids, and you must specify the

fluid in the wellbore using the Wellbore Fluid field. The Wellbore Fluid
field is disabled when this check box is marked.
Specify a combined cased and open hole friction factor.
Specify the fluid to be used

in the analysis. The
Wellbore Fluid drop-down
list has the fluids defined in
the Fluid Editor dialog.
This option is disabled
when the Cementing check
box is marked.
Specify the depths where the bottom of the moving pipe is

located. Calculations are performed at the depths specified
in these columns assuming that the bottom of the moving
pipe is at these depths. These depths will be used as the
Analysis Depths on the Parameter→Surge
Operations→Details button→Analysis Depths tab.
Specify the Operations to Analyze

Use the Parameter→Surge Operations Data→Operations tab to
specify the name and type of the operation(s) you want to analyze. You
can also specify one or more Depths of Interest. Typically a depth of
interest will be depths in the well where you are particularly interested
in analyzing. Examples may include the casing shoe, or the well TD. For
the depths specified in the Depths of Interest fields, complete analysis
are performed for all operations listed in the Operation/Operation Type
section.
You can name any operation by typing a name into the Operation cell.
After you have entered an operation name, you must select an operation
type by clicking the cell. From the drop-down list, click an operation to
associate with the name you have entered. Operation Type choices are
Swab, Surge, and Reciprocation.
Using this tab, you can specify multiple operations using the same
operations type if you wish. For example, you can analyze two swab

cases. Using the Details button, you can specify different analysis
details about each swab, surge or reciprocation analysis. Keep in mind
that analyzing several operations at once may become too complex. You
may want to limit the analysis to two or three operations at a time.
Enter Depths of Interest.

Additional depths of
interest taken from the
depths specified on the Click the
pore and frac pressure operation for
spreadsheets will which you will
automatically be used in specify analysis
the analysis, but are not details. Then
displayed here. click Details to
specify the
Analysis Details.
Enter a name for

the operation first.
Then specify the
Operation Type.
Analysis Details
Use the Analysis Details tabs to define details about the analysis you are
performing. The Analysis Conditions dialog and tabs are displayed
when you click the Details button on the Parameter →Operations
Data →Operations tab. The tabs displayed will depend on the
operation type you have selected.
Analysis Conditions (for Tripping) Tab

Use the Analysis Conditions tab (Parameter→Surge Operations
Data→Operations tab→Details button→Analysis Conditions) to
define details about conditions when tripping in and out of the hole for
the operation you selected in the Parameter→Surge Operations
Data→Operations tab.
The criteria you specify here includes trip speeds, acceleration rates, and
deceleration rates. You can also specify whether floats and optimized
trip times should be included in the operation.

Check the Optimize Trip Time box to calculate the maximum speed the
pipe can be tripped by increasing the calculation time. Trip time is
optimized by calculating the fastest times where surge and swab
pressures do not exceed the input constraints for fracture pressures and
pore pressures (as specified in their respective spreadsheets). When the
formation limits are exceeded, the speed is reduced until the limits are
satisfied.
Check the Float in Pipe box to calculate the pressures assuming there is
non-moving fluid above the float in the moving pipe. A float inhibits
fluid from flowing up into the moving pipe.
The analysis details are the same for both tripping in and out. However,
you can have different operations details for each operation specified on
the Parameter →Operations Data →Operations tab.
Check this box to perform

calculation to optimize trip time.
Check this box to include a

float.
To optimize trip time, you must
specify a maximum trip speed.
Specify the linear acceleration
and deceleration.
Analysis Depths (for Tripping Operations) Tab

Use the Analysis Depths tab to define details for complex pipe speeds
for the depths of interest specified in the Parameter→Surge
Operations Data→Operations tab. This tab is not available if you are
analyzing reciprocation, or if you have checked the Optimize Trip
Time box.
Depth cells are read-only. They are populated with the values specified
in the Moving Pipe Depth fields in the Parameter→Surge Operations
Data→Analysis Parameters tab.
Use the Pipe Speed cells to specify the speeds that the pipes are tripped
in and out of the hole depending on the operation type you have selected.

Depth cells are read-only.

Depths are entered in the Moving
Pipe Depths fields on the
Parameter→Surge
Operations→Analysis
Parameters tab.
Specify the speeds that the pipes are

tripped in and out of the hole for the
specified depth interval.
Analysis Conditions (for Reciprocation) Tab

Use the Analysis Conditions tab to define details about conditions when
reciprocating if you selected reciprocation in the Parameter→Surge
Operations Data→Operations tab.
The criteria you specify here include acceleration rates, and deceleration
rates. You can also specify whether floats should be included in the
operation.
You can not check the Optimize Trip Time box because this type of
analysis doesn’t pertain to reciprocating. Similarly, the stand length and
maximum trip time fields are also unavailable.
Check the Float in Pipe box to calculate the pressures assuming there is
non-moving fluid above the float in the moving pipe. A float inhibits
fluid from flowing up into the moving pipe.
Check this box to include a

float.
Specify the linear acceleration

and deceleration.

Reciprocation Data Tab

Use the Reciprocation Data tab to define details about stroke velocity
and fluid circulation for the reciprocation operation specified in the
Parameter→Surge Operations Data→Operations tab. These details
are defined by specifying stroke length, stroke rate, fluid type, and flow
rate in the fields provided.
Keep in mind when you define the velocity profile data (stroke length
and rate), that if the moving pipe approaches within 20 feet of the current
measured depth of the well, the analysis depth is backed off from the
well bottom by 20 feet plus the length of one stroke before the
reciprocation analysis begins. Also, 60 seconds of circulation is
simulated before the reciprocation analysis begins to ensure that steady-
state circulation is achieved.
Specify the length the pipe is moved

up and down for each stroke.
Specify the number of strokes rates
per minute. One stroke consists of
an up-and-down cycle.
Specify the circulation or displacement fluid

to use in the analysis. The drop-down list
contains the fluids defined in the Fluid
Editor dialog.
Calculating Results
Use the View →Calculate dialog to calculate the swab, surge, and
reciprocation operations defined in the Surge Operations Data dialog.
The items in the dialog’s list are calculated using values you specified
in the Case and Parameter menu options.
You highlight the items you want calculated by clicking them. All
highlighted items are calculated one after the other in the order they are
listed on this dialog.
Click Diagnostics if you want the input and output data files displayed
during the operation calculations. The Diagnostics dialog appears with

two file types that you can select for displaying and editing. These data
files follow a specific format. If you want to edit them, please contact
Landmark support for assistance.
Click Calculate when you are ready to calculate your data. You can
view the analysis results using the View menu options.
Click Calculate to begin the

calculations.
Highlight the operations you want

to analyze.
Click Diagnostics to display

the Diagnostics dialog.
Specify Diagnostic File Usage

Click the Diagnostics button on the View →Calculate to display the
Diagnostics dialog. On this dialog, select the files you want displayed
during the swab, surge, and reciprocation operation calculations.
Check Edit Input File to have the Edit Input File dialog appear before
the calculation routine starts. This dialog contains an ASCII text file
that you can view and edit the data used in the engineering calculations.
Editing this data changes the data displayed in the results views (plots,
tables, and reports). It will not change the data entered in any dialogs or
spreadsheets.
Check Show Output File to have the Show Output File dialog appear
after the calculation routine is finished. This dialog contains a
diagnostics report as an ASCII text file that you can use to view and edit
the results from the engineering calculations. Editing this file does not
change the results views. When you edit either of these files you do not
change the values in any dialogs or spreadsheets.

After the calculations are finished, and if you marked Show Output File,
the Diagnostics report appears. When finished, click OK to close the
dialog. The calculation routine is complete. Use the View menu Single
Operation Plot, Multiple Operation Plot, Table, and Report options to
display the calculated results.
Check to edit the input data file.

Check to display the output file.
Analyzing Results
Results for the Surge analysis are presented in plots, tables and a report.
All results are available using the View menu.
The analysis results must be calculated using View →Calculate before

generating any plots, tables or the report. If not, data will not be
available or the data presented will be inaccurate.
Plots
The Surge module has several plots that will assist you while analyzing
results.
The plot data can be displayed as a table. Right-click inside the plot to
display its context menu, and then click Switch.
Each plot represents results for tripping or reciprocating one stand of

pipe.
Multiple Operation Plots
Trip Speed vs Moving Pipe Depth

Use this plot to display the trip speed at a moving pipe depth for various
operations. You can plot any of the surge, swab, and reciprocation
operations that are defined in the Surge Operations Data→Operations
tab. Several operations can be plotted simultaneously.

Trip speeds are specified on the Parameter→Surge Operations→Details

button→Analysis Depths tab for tripping operations. For reciprocation
operations, the trip speed is determined by the stroke length and strokes per
minute specified on the Parameter→Surge Operations→Details
button→Analysis Details→Reciprocation Data tab
Surge Limit Plot

Use this plot to view the maximum pressures at a depth of interest versus
various operations compared to the fracture pressure. You can plot any
of the surge, swab, and reciprocation operations that are defined in the
Surge Operations Data→Operations tab. Several operations can be
plotted simultaneously.
Due to dynamic sloshing and backflow effects, maximum pressures

during a swab may exceed the fracture pressure, and minimum pressures
during a surge may drop below the pore pressure. To help you obtain a
complete evaluation of the operation, you should review both the surge
and swab limit plots.

Plot refers to one depth of interest only.
Red portion of the plot

(shaded in this picture)
indicates fracture
gradient pressure.
Similar red areas are
displayed for pore
pressures.
This plot indicates the maximum pressure that will occur at one depth of
interest at the specified moving pipe depths for the defined operations.
To view the plot at 5,700 ft MD, click the right mouse button. Choose
Data Selection and select 5,700 ft. Click OK. Data at the selected depth
displays on the plot.
Highlight the Highlight the

depth of interest operations you
you want want displayed
displayed in the in the plot.
plot.

Red (shaded) area

indicates fracture
gradient.
Anticipated
pressures during
reciprocation will
exceed the fracture
gradient.
From the plot you can see that the fracture gradient has been exceeded
during the reciprocation operation as it is currently defined. Reduce the
strokes to three strokes per minute (Parameter→Surge
Operations→Details button→Analysis Details→Reciprocation
Data) and calculate the results again. The following plot indicates that
reciprocating with three strokes per minute will not exceed the fracture
gradient.
The red (shaded)

area is no longer
displayed on the
plot because the
pressures will not
exceed the fracture
gradient.
Swab Limit Plot

Use this plot to view the minimum pressures at a depth of interest versus
various operations compared to the pore pressure. You can plot any of
the surge, swab, and reciprocation operations that are defined in the


At 5700 ft, the swab pressures will be greatest while tripping in.
Transient Response Plot

Use this plot to display the transient pressure responses for one or more
operations, at one depth of interest and one moving pipe depth versus the
time to trip one stand of pipe. You can plot any of the surge, swab, and
reciprocation operations that are defined.
Why use transient pressure analysis instead of steady-state?
Pressures on this plot can be compared to the specified formation pore

and fracture pressure limits displayed as red areas on the plot. This plot
can easily display a significant advantage of using a transient pressure
analysis rather than a steady-state model. The relatively constant
pressure displayed on the plot is the “steady-state” pressure. Notice the
pressures above and below this steady-state pressure. These pressure
changes can be significant, and are calculated using the transient
pressure model.
What is this plot telling me?
The pressure fluctuations at the left side of this plot display the sloshing
and damping effects on the pressure behavior. This behavior is caused

by the acceleration and deceleration of the pipe as the pipe motion

begins and ends. As an example, during a tripping in (surge) operation,
the fluid will begin to compress. As a result, the pressure will increase.
Eventually the fluid will begin to flow from the annulus, and the
pressure will decrease. This cycle will continue until the pressure
fluctuations dampen as a result of the friction in the fluid. As this
occurs, the curve flattens to a relative constant, or “steady-state”
pressure as displayed on the plot. The relatively constant pressure
continues until the pipe motion begins to stop. As the motion stops, the
fluid continues to flow from the annulus, and therefore the pressure will
decrease. Some pressure fluctuations will occur as the pipe and fluid
motion ceases. The reverse of this explanation holds for a tripping out
(swab) operation.
For reciprocation operations, refer to the portion of the plot displaying

the peaks and valleys, or sine wave shape. The overall shape of the
curve displays the pressure fluctuations resulting from each stroke.
(Note that if you are optimizing trip time, the strokes per minute could
be adjusted.) Imposed on the overall curve shape are some “wiggles” or
smaller fluctuations in pressure as the curve follows the general sine
wave pattern. These “wiggles” are caused by the transient pressure
changes as the fluid is opposing the motion of the string. It can be
confusing to display the reciprocation and tripping operations on the
same plot because the pressure variations with time are difficult to
correlate.

Spikes in the
reciprocation curve
indicate the pressure
changes resulting from
the strokes.
Initial movement of pipe.
Curves flatten as the initial fluid movement is

taking time to reflect back. This is the “steady-
state” pressure.
For a reciprocation operation, this plot is modified two ways.
l Most of the initial circulation used to reach a steady-state prior to

reciprocation is deleted from the plot. Therefore, the time scale
should be viewed as incremental time, and not absolute time.
l The reciprocation event is cut off from the plot so that only the rise/
fall pressure is drawn. In other words, for slow-stroke speeds, the
flat constant pressure portions of the curves are extracted from the
plots. Therefore, the accelerations and decelerations along with
maximums and minimums are presented for consecutive strokes,
and the full transient response is cut off to allow the key
information to be presented as a single plot.
Hook Load vs. Trip Time Plot

Use this plot to display the hook load for a moving pipe versus trip time
for various operations. You can plot any of the surge, swab, and
reciprocation operations that are defined in the Surge Operations
Data→Operations tab. Several operations can be plotted
simultaneously.

Tripping out has a Peaks correspond to

positive change in strokes.
hook load.
The rate of
change in hook
load decreases
as you near the
end of a stand.
Tripping in has a
negative change in
hook load.
Surge Limit Plot @ Moving Pipe Depth

Use the Surge Limit Plot @ Moving Pipe Depth plot to view the
maximum pressures at a moving pipe depth versus various operations
compared to the fracture pressure. Moving pipe depth is defined in the
Surge Operations Data→Analysis Parameters tab. You can plot any


None of the
operations
exceed the pore
pressure or
fracture gradient
limits.
Swab Limit Plot @ Moving Pipe Depth

Use the Swab Limit Plot @ Moving Pipe Depth plot to view the
minimum pressures at a moving pipe depth versus various operations
compared to the pore pressure. Moving pipe depth is defined in the
Surge Operations Data→Analysis Parameters tab. You can plot any

None of the
operations
exceed the pore
pressure or
fracture
gradient limits.

Miscellaneous Plots
Surface Results
The Surface Results plot displays the standpipe pressure, block speed,
and bit velocity versus times for a single operation at one moving pipe
depth.
Plot pertains to one moving

pipe depth.
Transient Results
The Transient Results plot has the moving pipe depth at various times
while tripping one stand of pipe.
Use the plot to

determine how fast
the bit is moving
when it is located at
various depths.

Report
Report Options
analyzing.
Surge Report
This report describes drill string and wellbore input data, mud
properties, and booster pump properties.

The material contained in this section is intended to provide you more

detailed information and calculations pertaining to many of the steps
presented during the descriptions of the analysis mode methodologies.
require, please refer to “References” on page 346 for additional sources
of information pertaining to the your topic of interest.
Methodology
The surge calculations are divided into two regions: the interval from the
surface to the end of the pipe and the interval from the end of the pipe to
bottomhole. In the upper region, pipe pressures are coupled to annulus
pressures through the radial elasticity of the pipe. The interpolated
method of characteristics is used to solve the fluid flow and pipe
dynamics for these “Coupled Pipe-Annulus” and “Pipe-To-
Bottomhole” regions. The fluid flow and pipe velocity equations are
solved subject to the boundary conditions given below.
The maximum time step allowed is the minimum grid spacing divided
by the sonic velocity. For a drill string near bottomhole, the minimum
gird spacing will be the distance off bottom. In order to avoid very small
time-step sizes for surges near bottomhole, a “near bottomhole” element
has been defined for this special case that neglects inertia.
Many of the mass equations have terms that relate the flow cross-
sectional area to the fluid pressures. For instance, in the “Coupled Pipe-
Annulus” region, increasing tubing pressure increases the tubing cross-
sectional area and decreases the annulus cross-sectional area.
Expansion of the pipe cross-sectional area is governed by “thick-wall”
pipe elastic solutions.
Pressure and Temperature Behavior of Water Based Muds

Temperature and pressure behavior of water-based muds is very
complex and dependent on mud composition and chemistry. There are
two water-based mud models in Surge. The simplest water-based mud
model used by Surge is the results from Annis combined with a
comprehensive water viscosity correlation.

The more generalized water-based mud model uses Alderman,

Gavignet, Guillot, and Maitland to provide a pressure-temperature
correlation for user-supplied viscometer data as well as an improved
model for low shear-rate flow. The fluid model is based on the Casson
equation for non-Newtonian fluids.
Viscosity Correlations of Oil Based Muds

Temperature and pressure behavior of oil-based muds is equally
complex and dependent on mud composition and chemistry. As for
water-based muds, there are two oil-based mud models in Surge. For the
simplest model, viscosity correlations for oil-based muds are based on
the work of Combs and Whitmire.
The more generalized oil-based mud model uses Houwen and Geehan
for improved pressure-temperature correlation to viscometer data, as
well as an improved model for low shear-rate flow. The fluid model is
based on the Casson equation for non-Newtonian fluids.
Surge Analysis
Two Analysis Regions

The dynamic surge analysis considers two distinct regions:
l Coupled-pipe/annulus region
l Pipe-to-bottomhole region

These two regions are visible in the following picture.
The Coupled-Pipe/Annulus Region Features:

l The full balance of mass and balance of momentum for pipe and
annulus flow are solved.
l Pipe and annulus pressures are coupled through the pipe elasticity.
Annulus pressures caused by pipe pressures may be significant.
l Longitudinal pipe elasticity and fluid viscous forces determine pipe

displacement. Referring to the following picture, we can see that
the velocity of the pipe end is not necessarily equal to the velocity

imposed at the surface. Therefore, the block speed does not

necessarily equal the speed of the bit.
l Frictional pressure drop is solved for laminar flow in an annulus

with a moving pipe for power-law fluids. Turbulent-flow frictional
pressure drop uses the Dodge and Metzner friction factor for
power-law fluids.
l Fluid properties vary as a function of pressure and temperature.

Plastic viscosity and yield point can vary significantly with
temperature.
l Formation elasticity, pipe elasticity and cement elasticity are all

considered in determining the composite elastic response of the
wellbore. For the case of a pipe cemented to the formation, use of
only the pipe elasticity will not give conservative surge pressures.
The Pipe-To-Bottomhole Region Features:

l Balance of mass and balance of momentum for the pipe-to-
bottomhole flow are solved.
l Frictional pressure drop is solved for laminar flow in the pipe-to-

bottomhole region for power-law fluids. Turbulent flow frictional
pressure drop uses the Dodge and Metzner friction factor for
power-law fluids.
l Fluid properties vary as a function of pressure and temperature.

l Formation elasticity, pipe elasticity and cement elasticity are all

considered in determining the composite elastic response of the
wellbore.
Connecting the Coupled-Pipe/Annulus and the Pipe-to-Bottomhole Regions

The two regions are connected through a comprehensive set of force and
displacement compatibility relations.
l The elastic force in the moving pipe is equal to the pressure below
the pipe times the pipe-end area. This means that a sufficiently high
pressure below the pipe could retard the pipe motion.
l Mass-flow balances are calculated for flow through the pipe nozzle,
the annulus return area and into the pipe bottomhole region. The
surge force and displacement and compatibility relations are
illustrated in the following diagram.
l Pressure drops are calculated through the pipe nozzle and annulus
return area on the basis of cross-sectional area changes with
appropriate discharge coefficients.
l Boundary conditions for floats were chosen to allow one-way flow

through the float. Fluid is allowed to flow out of the float, otherwise
the float is treated as a closed pipe.

l Surface boundary conditions set the fluid pressures in the tube and
the annulus to atmospheric pressure. The bottomhole boundary
condition assumes a rigid floor, which requires a zero fluid velocity.
Open Annulus Calculations
Mass Balance
The Mass Balance consists of three parts:
l Expansion of the hole caused by internal fluid pressure (dA/dP).
l Compression of the fluid resulting from the changes in fluid

pressure.
l Influx (or outflux) of the fluid.
Hole expansion is a impacted by the elastic response of the formation

and any casing cemented between the fluid and the formation. The fluid
volume change is given by the bulk modulus, K. For drilling muds, K is
a function of the composition, pressure, and temperature of the mud. K
is the reciprocal of the compressibility.
 1 dA 1  dP 1 ∂
 +  + q=0
 A dP K  dt A ∂z
Momentum Balance
This equation consists of four parts. The left side of the equation
represents acceleration of the fluid. The acceleration of the fluid equals
the sum of the forces on the fluid. The forces on the fluid are represented
by the three terms on the right side of the equation. The first fluid force
term represents the pressure or viscous force. The middle term on the
right side is the drag and is a function of the fluid velocity. The final term
is the gravitational force.
ρ d ∂P
q=− + h(q ) + ρg cos Θ
A dt ∂z

Where:
A = Cross-sectional area
P = Pressure
K = Fluid bulk modulus
q = Fluid volume flow rate
ρ = Fluid density
h = Frictional pressure drop
g = Gravitational constant
Θ = Angle of inclination of annulus from vertical
Coupled Pipe Annulus Calculations

Four partial differential equations define this region. These balance
equations are similar to the equations for the Open Annulus. However,
there are two important differences.
l In the balance of mass equations, an extra term is added to account

for the pressures both inside and outside of the pipe. For example,
increased annulus pressure can decrease the cross-sectional area
inside the pipe and increased pipe pressure can increase the cross-
sectional area because of pipe elastic deformation.
l The second major difference is the effect of pipe speed on the

frictional pressure drop in the annulus as given by the frictional
pressure drop term.
Pipe Flow
Mass Balance
 1 dA1 1  dP1  1 dA1  dP2 1 ∂

 +  +   + q1 = 0
 A1 dP1 K 1  dt  A1 dP2  dt A1 ∂z
Momentum Balance
ρ1 d ∂P
q1 = − 1 + h(q1 − A1v3 ) + ρ1 g cos Θ
A1 dt ∂z

Annulus Flow
Mass Balance
 ρ1 dA2  dP1  1 dA2 1  dP2 1 ∂

  +  +  + q2 = 0
 A2 dP1  dt  A2 dP2 K 2  dt A2 ∂z
Momentum Balance
ρ2 d ∂P
q 2 = − 2 + h2 (q 2 , v3 ) + ρ 2 g cos Θ
A2 dt ∂z
Pipe Motion
The following equation is the balance of momentum for the pipe. The
pipe inertia is represented by the left side of the equation. The first term
of the right side is the longitudinal elasticity of the pipe (using Young’s
modulus, E). The second and third items provide the hoop-stress effect
(increased inside pressure shortens the pipe and increased outside
pressure lengthens the pipe). The final three terms define the effect of
viscous drag on the pipe. Variations in fluid velocity, relative to the pipe
velocity, inside the pipe and in the annulus affect the shear stress at the
pipe.
Momentum Balance
d2 ∂ 2 v3 ∂ dP1 ∂ dP2 d d d
ρ3 v3 = E + f1 + f2 + f 3 q1 + f 4 q 2 + f 5 v3
dt 2
∂z 2 ∂ z dt ∂z dt dt dt dt

Where:
A1 = Pipe flow area

K1 = Pipe fluid bulk modulus
P1 = Pipe fluid pressure
q1 = Pipe fluid volume flow rate
h = Pipe frictional pressure drop
ρ1 = Pipe fluid density
A2 = Annulus flow area

K2 = Annulus fluid bulk modulus
P2 = Annulus fluid pressure
q2 = Annulus fluid volume flow rate
h2 = Annulus frictional pressure drop
ρ2 = Annulus fluid density
E = Pipe elastic modulus

v3 = Pipe velocity
ρ3 = Pipe density
f1 , f 2 = Hoop strain coefficients
f3 , f4 , f5 = Fluid shear stress coefficients
g = Gravitational constant
Θ = Angle of inclination from vertical

References
Transient Pressure Surge

Mitchell, R. F. “Dynamic Surge/Swab Pressure Predictions.”, SPE
Drilling Engineering, September 1988, (pages 325-333).
Lal, Manohar. “Surge and Swab Modeling for Dynamic Pressures and
Safe Trip Velocities.” Proceedings, 1983 IADC/SPE Drilling
Conference, New Orleans (427-433).
Lubinski, A., Hsu, F. H., and Nolte, K. G. “Transient Pressure Surges

Due to Pipe Movement in an Oil Well.” Fevue de l’Inst. Franc. Du Pet.,
May — June 1977 (307-347).
Wylie, E. Benjamin, and Streeter, Victor L. Fluid Transients, Corrected

Edition (1983). FEB Press, Ann Arbor, Mich., (1982).
Validation
Rudolf, R.L., Suryanarayana, P.V.R., Mobil E&P Technical Center,
“Field Validation of Swab Effects While Tripping-In the Hole on Deep,
High Temperature Wells “, SPE 39395.
Samuel, G.R., Sunthankar, A., McColpin, G., Landmark Graphics,

Bern, P., BPAmoco, Flynn,T., Sperry Sun, “Field Validation of
Transient Swab/Surge Response with PWD Data”, SPE 67717.
Pipe and Borehole Expansion

Timoshenko, S. P., and Goodier, J. N., “Theory of Elasticity”, McGraw-
Hill Book Company, New York, 1951.
Frictional Pressure Drop

Savins, F. J. “Generalized Newton (Pseudo-plastic) Flow in Stationary
Pipes and Annuli.” Pet. Trans. AIME (1958).
Dodge, D.W., and Metzner, A. B. “Turbulent Flow of Non-Newtonian

Systems,” AIChEJ (June 1959).

Fontenot, J. E., and Clark, R. E.: “An Improved Method for Calculating
Swab and Surge Pressures and Calculating Pressures in a Drilling Well,
“Society of Petroleum Engineering, October 1974 (451-462).
Schuh, F. J. “Computer Makes Surge-Pressure Calculations Useful.” Oil

and Gas Journal, August 1964 (96).
Pressure and Temperature Fluid Property Dependence

Annis, Max R. “High Temperature Flow Properties of Water-Base
Drilling Fluids.” J. Pet. Tech., August 1967.
Alderman, N. J., Gavignet, A., Guillot, D., and Maitland, G. C.: “High
Temperature, High Pressure Rheology of Water-Based Muds,” SPE
18035, 63rd Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition of the SPE.,
Houston, (1988 (187-196).
Combs, G. D., and Whitmire, L. D. “Capillary Viscometer Simulates

Bottom Hole Conditions.” Oil and Gas Journal, September 30, 1968
(108-113).
Houwen, O. H. and Geehan, T.:”Rheology of Oil-Based Muds.”

SPE15416, 61st Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition of the
SPE, New Orleans (1986).
Uner, D., Ozgen, C., and Tosun, I. “Flow of a Power-Law Fluid in an

Eccentric Annulus” SPEDE, September 1989 (269-272).
Johancsik, C. A., Friesen, D. B., and Dawson, R. “Torque and Drag in

Directional Wells — Prediction and Measurement.” J. Pet. Tech., June
1984 (987-992).


Chapter 7
Cementing-OptiCem Analysis
Cementing can be used to optimize cementing operations and minimize the possibility of costly
cementing errors.
Overview
In this section of the course you will become familiar with all aspects of
using Cementing to design your cementing operations. You will become
familiar with entering analysis data and using plot, reports, and tables to
analyze the results. To reinforce what you learn in the course lecture,
you will complete several exercises designed to prepare you for using
the program outside of class. The information presented in this chapter
can be used as a study guide during the course, and can also be used as
a reference for future cement job planning.

Chapter 7: Cementing-OptiCem Analysis
Cementing Analysis: An Introduction
What is Cementing?
The Cementing module can be used to predict what occurs in the well
during cementing operations. Cementing can be used to evaluate the
effects of various conditions on the simulated cementing operation. You
can use Cementing to calculate:
• Safe pump rates

• Surface pressure
• Downhole pressures
• Nitrogen concentration
• Foam volume
• Downhole rheology
• Temperature thinning of fluids

Workflow
q Activate Cementing by clicking the button.

workstrings (drillstrings, casings, liners, etc.) (Case →String)

Editor)
q Define the fluids used. You will probably need to enter mud and
cement. You must define the fluid rheological properties, select a
rheology model, and specify the temperature. You can define as
many fluids as you want. (Case→Fluid Editor)
q Define the pore pressure gradients. (Case →Pore Pressure)
q Define the fracture gradients. (Case →Frac Gradient)
q Specify centralizer information. (Parameter→Centralizer

Placement)
q Specify cement job data including volumes, fluids used, back

pressure and whether or not this is a foam job. (Parameter→Job
Data)
q If this is a foam job, specify the foam job data. (Parameter→Foam

Data)
q Specify wellbore temperatures, depths of interest and whether or

not returns are taken at the sea floor. (Parameter→Additional
Data)

q Specify additional pressure that may be required to seat the plug

and the eccentricity (standoff) to be used in the calculations.
(Parameter→Data Analysis)
q Analyze the results.

Using Cementing Analysis Mode
Starting Cementing Analysis

There are two ways to start the Cementing Module.
l Select Cementing from the Modules menu.
l Click the Cementing button.
Entering Case Data

The example case used in this portion of the course is titled “Cement 7
inch casing” in the project “Guided Tour” and well “Tour #1.” Please
open this case now. The Cementing module uses the information input
on the Case menu. Entry of much of this information is discussed in the
section “Entering Case Data” on page 40 of Basics chapter of this
manual. The next few pages will discuss entry of information that is not
discussed in the Basics chapter of this manual. If you have a question
that is not addressed in this chapter, you may want to refer to the Basics
chapter for additional information on using the General, Offshore,
Wellbore Editor, String Editor, Deviation, Pore Pressure, and Frac
Pressure dialogs. Although the Fluid Editor is common to all modules,
it will be discussed here in this section again because entry of cement
data has not been covered before.
Define Fluids Used During the Cement Job

Use the Case→Fluid Editor tabs to specify the rheological model and
other basic characteristics about simple drilling muds, spacers, or
cement slurries
Two tabs are used to specify fluids used during a cement job. These
include:
l Standard Muds Tab: Use this tab to define drilling muds and
spacers.
l Cement Slurries Tab: Use this tab to define cement slurries.

You can also import fluids from fluid libraries and export fluids defined
in this dialog to the fluid libraries.
Defining Muds and Spacers

Use the Case→Fluid Editor→Standard Fluids tab to define drilling
fluids and spacers by specifying the basic characteristics of the fluid
using the fields provided. You can also import fluids from fluid libraries
and export fluids defined in this tab to the fluid libraries. This tab was
discussed in the Basics chapter of this manual. The data for the spacer
has been entered for you.
Be sure to select the

correct Type from the
drop-down list. You
can choose from
Spacer and Non
Spacer.
Defining Cement Slurries

Use the Case→Fluid Editor→Cement Slurries tab to define the
cement slurries you will be using. You can define multiple cements
using the tab. You can also import or export cements to libraries using
this tab.

The following defines the lead cement. Enter this data as described
below.
Use the Import To Library or Export From

Library buttons to import a cement from the Click New to enter a new cement.
library or to export a cement to the library.
Highlight an existing cement name if

you want to edit data defining an
existing cement.The data displayed
pertains to the highlighted cement.
Highlight the temperature for which

you will specify rheology data. In this
example, there is only one
temperature specified, but you can
have more than one temperature. All
data specified in the Rheology Tests
pertains to the highlighted
temperature.

In this example, we want to use a tail slurry also. Review the data
entered in the following dialog.
Tail Slurry is highlighted.

Therefore, all data on this tab
pertains to the cement named
Tail Slurry.
Notice that this cement has

rheological data defined for
two temperatures.
Define Job Information

In the Basics chapter you became familiar with the Options and
Comments tabs on the Case →General dialog. For Cementing analysis,
the General dialog has an additional tab called the Job Information tab.
Entry of information on this tab is optional. In this example, we will not
use this tab.
Specify the Volume Excess %

If you remember from the Basics section of this course, the Wellbore
Editor is used to define the wellbore as the current workstring sees it.
You can also use the Case→Wellbore dialog to specify the extra
percentage of annular cement volume required for an enlarged wellbore.
This volume will be based on the Effective Hole Diameter field. For
open hole sections, the Effective Hole Diameter is used to represent the

actual size of the hole. If you specify the Effective Hole Diameter, the
Volume Excess % is calculated based on Effective Hole Diameter.
Similarly, if you specify the Volume Excess %, the Effective Hole
Diameter will be calculated.
For example, if you are drilling an 8.5 inch hole that is 10% overgauge,
enter 8.5 for Hole Diameter and 10 for Volume Excess %. The extra
volume will be calculated. Do not use the Volume Excess % field to
raise the cement top. Use Parameter →Job Data to raise the cement
top.
Be careful that you don’t enlarge the wellbore in the Hole Diameter
field and then again using the Volume Excess % field.
Enter the Volume Excess % and the

Effective Hole Diameter is
calculated.
Specify the Standoff or Calculate the Centralizer Placement

Use the Parameter →Centralizer Placement dialog to calculate the
spacing between multiple centralizers and/or the variable standoff
between the casing and wellbore. Alternately, you can enter a manual
standoff value that applies to the entire well. Before using this dialog,
you should use the Centralizer Editor to specify all centralizers if you
plan on using centralizers not already in the catalog. A special button
lets you access the Centralizer Editor to define additional centralizers.

Centralizer placement calculations are typically performed before

wellbore simulation. These calculations can also be performed
independently using the Centralizer Placement mode.
Dialog Field Descriptions

Calculate Standoff/Spacing
Select this option if you want to use this window to calculate
spacing and/or standoff values. The remaining entries in this
window will help you build the spreadsheet. Standoff is the ratio of
the largest to smallest distances between the casing and wellbore.
Standoff is 100% when the casing is perfectly centered in the
wellbore and declines as the casing becomes off-centered. If casing
is against the wellbore, standoff would be 0%.
Entered Standoff
Select this option if you want to enter a standoff manually. A good
value for standoff is 80%. A value of 70% is adequate. If you select
this option, all other fields except Top of Centralized Interval will
become inactive because the centralizer placement will not be
calculated.
Fluid Profile
These entries specify whether the standoff/spacing calculations will
use the density of the fluids at the end of the cement job, or only a
single mud density. If you select As Top Plug Lands, the fluid
profile will be taken from the Parameter →Job Data dialog. If
you select During Mud Conditioning, then enter the Mud Density
value immediately before the casing is run. If the wellbore fluid
density has been entered elsewhere, it will be automatically
specified here.

Spacing Limits (Between Centralizers)

Enter the Maximum Distance and Minimum Distance values that
the program can use when calculating the spacing between
centralizers.
Top of Centralized Interval
If desired, you can specify a Measured Depth and Standoff above
the top of the centralized interval. To do this, turn on the check box
next to the Top of Centralized Interval field and enter the values.
Enter the depth measured from the Kelly bushing to the top of the
interval to be centralized. Specify the percentage value for standoff
above the top. The default value of 40 percent is typical. This
represents the resulting standoff in the upper portion of the well
caused by the suspended weight below and the centering effect of
the slips.
Centralizer Editor button
Click the Centralizer Editor button if you want to define more
centralizers. Typically, you will do this if you do not see the desired
centralizers in the drop-down lists under the second and third
column of the spreadsheet.
Centralizer Spreadsheet
Use the spreadsheet area on the right side of the dialog to specify
centralizer patterns and calculate standoff and spacing for each. The
first three columns contain drop-down lists that you can use to
select a centralizer pattern and to specify the centralizers in each
interval. The remaining columns let you enter specific depths and
standoffs, and either enter or calculate the spacing.
Pattern Column
The pattern column allows you to optionally switch back and
forth between multiple centralizers within a single constant
interval. From the drop-down list, Pattern A is normal and uses
a single centralizer for the interval. All other patterns alternate
between the two specified centralizers in the manner suggested
by the lettering.
Centralizer A, Centralizer B Columns
Use these two fields to select the centralizers to be used for this
interval. The drop-down list shows centralizers defined in the
Centralizer Editor. Use the Centralizer B column only if you are
using a pattern other than A (AB, AAB, AABB, or AAAB).
The list of centralizers available comes from the centralizer
database.
Define the Cement Job

The Job Data dialog lets you define crucial job information such as
tracer fluid types, rate, volume, and placement for each fluid in the
cementing job.

Job Data Dialog Field Descriptions

Automatic Rate Adjustment
Select this check box to allow the program to automatically adjust
the pumping rate so that the pressure at the fracture zone depth
remains less that the fracture gradient minus the safety factor. The
pumping rate is automatically adjusted down to a minimum of 0.5
bpm [0.08 m³], if required. To use a rate less than 0.5 bpm, turn this
option off and enter the rate manually.
Safety Factor
When the Automatic Rate Adjustment option is selected, the safety
factor specifies how close the ECD can come to the entered fracture
gradient before the program reduces the rate to a safe value.
Mud Erodibility
Mud Erodibility as used in cementing and OptiCem refers to the
ability of the wellbore fluid to be eroded away by a different fluid
passing by it in the annulus of the well. First, you need to enter the
rheological parameters of the fluids you will be pumping into the
well (cement, spacers/flushes, etc.). OptiCem uses these values to
calculate the erosion that occurs as these fluids pass by the wellbore
fluid. It then uses this erodibility that has occurred to calculate a
displacement efficiency. For example, if the erodibility graph
shows 80% displacement efficiency, basically 80% of the wellbore
fluid was removed. This calculation applies to 5% of the
temperature differential of the chosen zone of interest.
The Mud Erodibility option is available only to Halliburton users. If

you need this calculation performed, please contact your local
Halliburton Zonal Isolation Group.

Tracer Fluid
A tracer fluid allows you to track a certain fluid in the wellbore
during the course of the job. Typically, this is assigned to the
cement slurry (lead cement slurry, if two are being pumped). The
tracer fluid is displayed in the ‘Volume and Rate Calculations’ and
‘Free Fall Calculations’ tables in the simulated output of the report
document.
From the drop-down list, select the fluid you want to use as the
tracer fluid. The tracer fluid drop-down list is blank until the stage
table types are selected. The initial wellbore fluid cannot be a tracer
fluid. Usually the lead cement stage is selected as the tracer fluid
from the drop-down list. The leading edge of the tracer fluid is a
reference point for tracking fluid movement. The value is negative
as the fluid is moving down the well in the casing string, and
positive as it begins to move up the well in the annulus. The
position of the selected tracer fluid is shown in the report document.
OptiCem actually calculates the movement of all the fluids, but due
to size limitations only one can be shown in the report.
Use Foam Schedule
Check this box to indicate the cement job is using foam. When you
are using a foamed cement, you must specify the foam job
information using Parameter →Foam Data. If this box is checked,
Foam Data option becomes available under the Parameter menu.
Otherwise, the Foam Data menu option will not be available.
Disable Auto-Displacement Calculation
Check this box if you want to disable the automatic calculation of
displacement. If this box is not checked, the calculation is
performed automatically.
Fluid Editor Button
Access Case→Fluid Editor in order to define more standard fluids
or cement slurries. Typically, you would do this if you do not see
the appropriate fluids listed in the drop-down list under the Fluid
column of the spreadsheet.
Spreadsheet Columns:
Type
This is the stage name displayed in the report and graphs. This
name defaults to the fluid name and can be used to differentiate
stages with the same selected fluid. The following types are
available:
Wellbore
The initial fluid at the start of the job, usually the drilling fluid
or mud used to circulate. No volume is entered.

Cement
A cement fluid type placed in the annulus. Cement can be
subdivided into a lead and tail cement, or as many other parts as
required.
Displacement
Drilling fluid or mud that follows the plug.
Shutdown
Period of time that pumping has stopped, often while dropping
the plug.
Spacer/Flush
A spacer or flush fluid placed in the annulus or pumped out.
Shoe Slurry
Specify the cement that is left in the shoe joint after the top plug
lands or at the end of the cement job.
Spacer on Plug
A spacer or flush that follows the plug and remains in the
casing.
Tuned Spacer
A tuned spacer is a special type of spacer that is used in
conjunction with the erodibility technology. Once you can
identify the Required Shear Stress of the fluid to be removed,
you can “tune” a spacer system rheologically to remove it.
Mud
A drilling fluid or mud that can be placed in the annulus, much
like a spacer. Mud can be in the wellbore before the cement job
or it can be used to displace the slurry.
Fluid
This is the selected fluid as defined in the Fluid Editor.
Rate
The rate the selected fluid will be pumped into the well, in barrels
per minute.
Stroke Rate
The stroke rate in strokes per minute. You must enter a volume per
stroke on the Circulating System dialog to use strokes.
Shutdown Time
If Shutdown is selected in Type, a time must be entered in this field;
all other fields become inactive.
Placement Method
The Placement Method column defines how volumes are calculated
for each stage. When the calculations are performed, the omitted
information in the table is filled in automatically. The drop-down
list contains Top of Fluid, Length, Volume, and Bulk & Yield.
Volume
Enter the volume for this stage, and Top of Fluid and Length are
calculated. If you wish to calculate stage volumes, enter
information for the stages you are pumping in the order they are to
be pumped. Each stage must have one of the following columns

entered, depending on the Volume calculation option: Top of Fluid,

Length, Bulk Cement.
Strokes
The number of strokes. You must enter a volume per stroke on the
Circulating System dialog to use strokes.
Top of Fluid
Enter the measured depth for the top of the fluid in the annulus at
the end of the job. The volume and length are calculated.
Length
Enter the measured length of this stage in the annulus at the end of
the job. The volume and top of fluid are calculated.
Bulk Cement
Enter the number of sacks to be mixed for this cement stage. The
volume, length, and top of fluid are calculated.
Back Pressure Schedule
Back Pressure is the absolute (not gauge) pressure held on the top
of the annulus during pumping. You can simulate a job with any
back pressure or combinations of back pressures. If the annulus is
to be left open to the atmosphere during the entire job, then 14.7 psi
[101 kPa] should be entered for the back pressure value and 0
should be used for the return volume. If several back pressure
values are to be used, then enter zero for the return volume of the
last back pressure. This indicates that the pressure will be
maintained throughout the remainder of the job.
Back pressure is often used for one of three reasons:
• To compress foam near the surface. When foam is circulated

back to the surface, densities can become too light. The
application of back pressure before circulating the foam to
surface can increase the density of the near surface foam.
• To control annular gas migration. Back pressure has also been

used as an anti-gas migration technique. Back pressure has been
shown to be effective only if applied immediately after the plug
lands, prior to the development of gel strength of the slurry in the
annulus.
• To prevent or minimize free fall. If free fall must be controlled

or eliminated, back pressure can be incrementally increased
during free fall.
Return Volume
If the entire job is to be run at one back pressure, then the Return
Volume value should be zero. If several back pressure values are

used, the Return Volume value for the last pressure should be zero,
because the last pressure remains in effect until the plug is down.
Define Temperatures, Depths of Interest and Offshore Returns

Information
The Additional Data dialog is used to enter data for the Wellbore
Simulator mode in the Cementing module (OptiCem). This dialog
allows you to enter and manage offshore, zone depth, and temperature
information.
Do not check this box because

we are not taking returns at
the sea floor.
Reservoir Zone and Fracture

Zone are the same in this
case.
Offshore Information
Returns at Sea Floor
Check this box to indicate there are returns at the sea floor. Use this
option when you have a subsea wellhead and no riser. If you are
taking returns at the sea floor, you must specify the sea water
density.
Sea Water Density
Enter a value in this field when you have clicked the check box for
Returns at Sea Floor.
Depths of Interest for Plots (MD)

Reservoir Zone
Enter a value for the depth where the pore pressure gradient is a
maximum.

Fracture Zone
Enter a value for the depth where you are concerned about
fracturing the formation.
Temperature Information
BHCT button
The temperature profile can be calculated in one of several ways. If
the Bottom Hole Circulating Temperature (BHCT) is known, then
click this button and enter the BHCT, Surface Temperature, and
Mud Outlet Temperature in the fields that become active below.
Calculate API BHCT button
To calculate the API BHCT (bottom hole circulating temperature),
click this button and enter the Mud Outlet Temperature and Bottom
Hold Static Temperature as described below.
Temperature Profile button
The temperature profile can be calculated in one of several ways. If
the Bottom Hole Circulating Temperature (BHCT) is known, then
you can enter this temperature along with Surface Temperature and
Mud Outlet Temperature. To calculate the API BHCT, enter the
Bottom Hole Static Temperature (BHST) and Mud temperature.
NOTE: The WellCat thermal simulator can create an OptiCem
compatible temperature profile data set. This data set contains the
casing and annular temperatures at several different depths along
the wellbore. If a temperature profile data set is selected, OptiCem
uses that temperature profile in its simulation. Some sample
temperature profiles are available with this application and use the
filename extension *.HCT. You may access temperature profiles or
enter temperature profile data by selecting the Edit Profile button
and then selecting Import.
Edit Profile Button
Define the temperature profile to be used or import a temperature
profile.
BHCT
If you have selected the BHCT or Calculate API BHCT options
above, then enter the Bottom Hole Circulating Temperature value
in this field when it becomes active.
Surface Temperature
If BHCT is selected above, then enter the Surface Temperature
value in this field when it becomes active.
Mud Outlet Temperature
If BHCT is selected above, then enter the Mud Outlet Temperature
value in this field when it becomes active.
BHST
If Calculate API BHCT is selected above, then enter the Bottom
Hole Static Temperature in this field when it becomes active.

Specify Additional Analysis Parameters

The Parameter →Analysis Data dialog provides supplemental control
of several values before performing the Wellbore Simulator
calculations.
Select Eccentricity if eccentricity is to be considered in To ensure proper plug

the calculation. If Eccentricity is turned off, then the seating, additional pressure
wellbore simulator performs its calculations assuming may be applied to the
100% standoff. If you want the eccentricity calculations casing immediately after
at a particular standoff, select the Entered Standoff the plug is landed.
option on the Centralizer Placement Dialog. Otherwise,
it will run with an actual standoff profile.
Erodibility is only available to Halliburton personnel. If

you need this option, contact your local Zonal Isolation
Group.
Check Calculate Automatically for automatic

calculation of step size.
Enter a Volume Increment (barrels) if simulator step

size is not to be calculated automatically. The check
box for automatic calculation cannot be selected.
NOTE: The Volume Increment is the amount of fluid
volume the simulator pumps per iteration. The
Calculate Automatically option uses 1.4% of the total
job volume rounded to the nearest 5 bbls or 1 m³.
Increase this value if the rates or ECD curves have
extra spikes. Decrease the value if data is missing
between points. Usually you will want to leave the
Calculate Automatically option turned on.
Analyzing Results
Results for the Cementing analysis are presented in plots, tables and a
report. All results are available using the View menu.

What is the Circulating Pressure Throughout the Cement Job?

Use the View→Plot→Circ Pres and Den - Frac Zone plot to
determine the circulating pressure fluid volume pumped at the fracture
zone specified on Parameter→Additional Data.
These lines indicate when the The circulating pressure during

various stages occur. the displacement stage
exceeds the fracture pressure.
Fracture
pressure
The formation breakdown pressure at this depth is indicated by one of

the curves on this plot. If the Automatic Rate Adjustment option was
selected (on Parameter→Job Data), then a second curve indicates the
safety factor. If the circulating pressure exceeds the fracture zone
pressure, the fluid can fracture the formation and result in lost
circulation from the wellbore.
If the circulating pressure exceeds the fracture zone pressure, reduce the
pump rates or turn on the Automatic Rate Adjustment option. If
reducing the pump rates does not completely solve the problem,
decrease the density of one or more fluids (with foamed fluids, or by
increasing the nitrogen concentration), or decrease the volume of the
heaviest stages.

If you prefer, you can view this information as ECD versus volume
pumped.
Click the right mouse button anywhere on the plot to open the plot
selection box. Highlight the plot you want displayed and click the
left mouse button.
This plot displays the pressure as ECD.
Is There Free Fall?

The View→Plot→Comparison of Rates In and Out plot displays the
total annular return rate and corresponding pump rate versus the fluid
pumped into the well. This data may be correlated with information in

the Volume and Rates Calculations table in the Cementing Report.

(View→Report)
Differences between the two rate curves indicates free fall without
nitrogen injection. If free fall occurs and the well goes on vacuum, the
rate out will initially exceed, and then fall below, the planned pumped
rate.
An example of free fall
Notice the rate out initially

exceeds the rate in.
After initial high, rate out then
falls below rate in.
What is the Surface Pressure?

Use the View→Plot→Calculated Wellhead/Surface Pressure plot to
view the pressure changes as varying density fluids are pumped at
varying rates through the well. If the Surface Iron option was selected
(on the Case→Cement Circulating System dialog) this graph is titled
Calculated Surface Pressure. This data may be correlated with
information in the Volume and Rates Calculations table on the
cementing report.
The calculated wellhead pressure is lower than pump pressure because

of the hydrostatic head and friction in the lines between the pump and
cementing head.
A horizontal graph line along the x-axis indicates free fall. Often, as the
majority of the cement moves from the casing to the annulus, the slope

of this curve beings to increase. Usually, it continues to increase as the

heavier cementing fluids are forced up the annular gap.
Free Fall
Automatically Adjusting the Flowrate

Because the circulating pressure exceeds the fracture pressure using the
rates specified on the Parameter→Job Data dialog, you can allow the
software to automatically adjust the pump rates. Click the Automatic
Rate Adjustment box on the Parameter→Job Data dialog.
Click Automatic Rate Adjustment to have the rate
adjusted to avoid exceeding the fracture pressure.
If you allow automatic rate adjustment, you must specify a

Safety Factor.
These rates
will be
adjusted.

Refer to the View→Plot→Circ Pres and Den - Frac Zone plot to

determine the circulating pressure using the adjusted flow rates.
In this example, although the circulating pressure no longer exceeds the fracture
pressure, it is exceeding the safe pressure (based on the safety factor).
The maximum
circulating
pressure is
83 psi less
than the
fracture
pressure.
What Are the Adjusted Rates?

The View→Plot→Comparison of Rates In and Out plot displays the
total annular return rate and corresponding pump rate versus the fluid
pumped into the well. This data may be correlated with information in
the Volume and Rates Calculations table in the Cementing Report.
(View→Report)
Rates have been decreased to reduce the circulating pressure as a result of checking
the Automatic Rate Adjustment box on the Parameter→Job Data dialog. Refer to
the Job Data dialog to view the rates specified prior to the rate adjustment.

Using Foamed Cement

In the example we have been using, the circulating pressure exceeds the
formation fracture pressure. We have used the automatic rate adjustment
option to reduce the circulating pressures. Using foamed cement is
another means to reduce the circulating pressures.
The Parameter→Foam Data dialog is available only if you check the

Use Foam Schedule box on the Parameter→Job Data dialog while
using the Wellbore Simulator analysis mode. This dialog lets you
describe calculation methods and stages when simulating foam in a
cement job.
Select Constant or Staged Gas Flow to keep the
nitrogen constant for a segment.The foam
Type concentrations for
density will follow the pressure gradient, and
Surfactant, Stabilizer.
thus decreases from the bottom to the top of the
segment. The longer the segment, the greater
the density variance.
Select this option if the

nitrogen ratio will be adjusted
to offset pressure changes
and thus hold density more
constant. Use this option Click the stage you
only with automated nitrogen want to define using
pumping equipment. the bottom portion of
this dialog.
This information is read-only.
It is defaulted from the Job
Data dialog.
In order to foam a segment, The Gas Rate Stage

you must check the Foam Number is used to tell
box. how many different gas
rates are to be used
under the Stage Gas
option and where each
Enter Foam Density and Quality (the volume
of the rates are used.
percentage of gas in the foam) is calculated.
or
Enter Quality (the volume percentage of gas

in the foam) and Foam Density is calculated.

The information in this

example pertains to the
slurry stage.
Foam Data Dialog Data Descriptions
Calculation Methods
Constant or Staged Gas Flow
Select this option if nitrogen will be constant for a segment. The
foam density follows the pressure gradient, and thus decreases from
the bottom to the top of the segment. The longer the segment, the
greater the density variance. For depths of 6,000 feet. or less, adjust
the nitrogen ratio at least every 1,000 feet; for greater depths, adjust
at least every 2,000 feet.
Constant Density
Select this option if the nitrogen ratio will be adjusted to offset
pressure changes and thus hold density more constant. Use this
option only with automated nitrogen pumping equipment.
Foaming Agents
Percentage concentrations of foam stabilizer and foamer other than
the standard 1.5 and 0.75% may be entered in the Stabilizer and
Surfactant fields. Zero is acceptable, but only in one field at a time.
Stages List
This is a portion of the fluids list: those that will remain in the
annulus. Fluids pumped out or partially pumped and the
displacement fluids do not appear in this list. The segment table
below shows the foam segments for only one stage at a time. Select
the stage you wish to foam by clicking on it to highlight it. You can

not edit the data listed in the Stages List. This information is
defaulted from the Parameter→Job Data dialog.
Stage Number
Each stage name listed displays its Stage Number in this
column.
Stage Name
This column shows a partial list of fluids that will remain in the
annulus. Fluids pumped out or partially pumped and the
displacement fluids will not appear in this list. The segment
table at the bottom of the dialog shows the foam segments for
only one stage at a time. Select the stage you wish to foam.
Density
The density for this stage, in pounds per gallon.
Length
The length of this stage, in feet.
Stage Name, Top of Stage and In-Place Fluid Length:
This data is shown for each stage in the foam job, when the stage is
selected from the Stages list above. This information is read-only
and defaults from the Parameter→Job Data dialog.
Clear button
Click to reset all entries in the Segments group.
Segments
This is a table of foam parameters for each segment of the fluid in
the annulus. Displayed segments are for the currently selected stage
in the Stages List above. You can break up a stage into segments to
vary the foam density or gas rate. The lengths of the segments must
add up to the total in-place fluid length for that stage. For constant
gas flow method, increment the gas rate stage number when you
want a new gas injection rate. To start over on a stage’s segments,
click the Clear button.
Length
The length of this portion of the stage.
Foam
By selecting this check box, you are indicating that you want to
foam this stage. If so, enter the foamed density or quality.
Foam Density
The foam density for this segment. The field remains inactive
unless Foam is checked.
Quality
Quality is the volume percentage of gas in the foam. Pick a
quality or a reduced density. The field remains inactive unless
Foam is checked.
Gas Rate Stage Number
This number is used to tell how many different gas rates are to
be used under the Stage Gas option and where each of the rates
are used.

Using the Foam Schedule

Use View→Foam Schedule dialog to calculate and view the Foam
Pumping Schedule. This dialog lists liquid volume and gas rates of the
fluids left in the annulus at the end of the simulation. The calculated
hydrostatic pressure for the frac zone and reservoir zones are displayed
at the bottom of the table. The frac zone and reservoir zones are
specified using the Parameter→Additional Data dialog.
Notice that some of these fluids may not be foamed. Some fluids may
not appear in this report if they were pumped completely out of the
annulus.
If an error occurs during the calculation process, an error dialog appears

displaying a description of the error. When you finish reading it, click
OK. The Error dialog and the Calculate dialog close so you can begin
working on solving the source of the error.

These are design depths (as specified on the Job Data dialog) and may not be the actual
depths. Review the View→Final Density and Hydrostatic plot for accurate cement
locations.
Click Calculate to
ensure you are
looking at accurate Adjusted Liquid Volume and Adjusted Gas Rate sliders adjust the cement tops
results. or placement.
These are the calculated Final Gas Rate and Adjusted

hydrostatic pressure gradient for Final Gas Rate do not apply
the depths of interest specified when you are using constant or
on the Additional Data dialog. stage gas flow.
Field Descriptions
Calculate
Click Calculate when you are ready to calculate your data. See the
Checking Results section below for tips on how to check results of
the calculation.
Adjusted Liquid Volume
You may enter a value in this field if you wish, or use the sliders to
adjust the values displayed. Use the slide bar by clicking it and
moving it along the percentage graduation marks. You may also
click the slider, or press the Tab key until the slider bar is selected,
then use your Right Arrow or Left Arrow keys to adjust the value

displayed. Use this feature to increase volume or gas cone as

needed to correct base hydrostatic calculations.
Adjusted Gas Rate
You may enter a value in this field if you wish, or use the sliders to
adjust the values displayed. Use the slide bar by clicking it and
moving it along the percentage graduation marks. You may also
click the slider, or press the Tab key until the slider bar is selected,
then use your Right Arrow or Left Arrow keys to adjust the value
displayed. Use this feature to increase volume or gas cone as
needed to correct base hydrostatic calculations.
Spreadsheet
The spreadsheet section of this dialog displays the calculated foam
schedule including volumes, ranges and densities for each segment
of the foam job.
Top of Fluid
The distance from the top of fluid to the Kelly bushing, in feet,
for each segment of the foam job.
Length
The length of the segment, in feet, for each segment of the foam
job.
Liquid Volume
The liquid volume, in barrels, for each segment of the foam job.
Adjusted Liquid Volume
The adjusted liquid volume, in barrels, for each segment of the
foam job. This can be varied as a function of the percentage
entered in the Adjusted Liquid Volume field above.
Gas Rate
The gas rate, or starting rate on ramp N2 jobs, in standard cubic
feet per barrel, for each segment of the foam job.
Adjusted Gas Rate
The adjusted gas rate, in standard cubic feet per barrel, for each
segment of the foam job. This varies as a function of the
percentage entered in the Adjusted Gas Rate field above.
Top/Bottom Density
The density in pounds per gallon at the top and bottom of each
segment.
Final Gas Rate
The final gas rate, in standard cubic feet per barrel, for each
segment of the foam job.
Adjusted Final Gas Rate
The final gas rate, in standard cubic feet per barrel, adjusted as a
function of the percentage entered in the Adjusted Gas Rate
field above.
Checking Results
To check results of the foam schedule calculation:

1. Check the Fluid Animations Schematic to see whether the desired

top of cement was achieved, check the Final Positions of Stages
table in the reports, or downhole density plot.
2. Check the circulation Pressure and Density-Fracture Zone graph

and the Circulation Pressure and Density-Reservoir Zone graphs to
see if the density is acceptable.
3. Adjust, rerun, and recheck the job as follows:
Checking Results
If TOC is.... and ECD is.... then do this:
Low Light 1. Increase density or decrease
quality.
2. Rerun the Foam Schedule.
3. Use the slider bar (top of
Foam Data dialog) to increase
the Adjusted Liquid Volume.
4. Click the Calculate button.
5. Check the Fluid Animation
Schematic and the Circ Pres
and Den plots.
Low Acceptable 1. Use the slider bar (top of
the Adjusted Liquid Volume.
2. Repeat steps 4 and 5 above.
Low Heavy 1. Use the slider bar (top of
the Adjusted Gas Rate.
Low Light 1. Increase the density or
decrease quality.
Acceptable Acceptable Do nothing.

Checking Results (Continued)

Acceptable Heavy 1. Decrease density or increase
quality.
Acceptable Heavy 1. Decrease density or increase
quality.
2. Rerun the Foam Simulator.
High** Light 1. Manually decrease N2 in the
Adjusted Start Gas Rate
column.
2. If calculation method is
constant density, also
manually decrease N2 in the
Adj. Final Gas Rate column.
High** Acceptable 1. Manually decrease liquid
volume in the Adj. Liq. Vol.
column.*
High** Heavy 1. Decrease density or increase
quality.
2. Rerun the Foam Simulator.
* To estimate the percentage by which to change the volume, use the

percentage by which the simulated foamed length differs from the
desired length. (If the foamed length 1,500 feet and the desired length is
2,000 feet, increase by 33%.)
** This scenario is unlikely because the Fluid Placement calculations

should prevent excessive top of cement.
Repeat these steps until you are satisfied with the results. Round the
slurry and gas rate quantities before running the Wellbore Simulator.

References
Ravi, K.M., and Sutton, D.L., “New Rheological Correlation for

Cement Slurries as a Function of Temperature,” SPE 20449.
Shah, Subhash, N., and Sutton, David, L., “New Friction Correlation for
Cements from Pipe And Rotational-Viscometer Data,” SPE 19539.

Chapter 8
Critical Speed
The Critical Speed Analysis module was designed to assist with the
determination and prediction of damaging downhole vibrations. The
analysis begins with a static structural analysis to determine where the
drillstring is in contact with the wellbore and to determine what forces
are acting on the drillstring. The next step is the vibrational analysis. The
program predicts the relative stresses the drillstring will be subjected to
based upon a range of rotational speeds (RPMs) input by the user.
Critical Speed Course Overview
During the Critical Speed segment of your WELLPLAN training you

will learn the basic functionality of the Critical Speed Analysis module.
The class exercises are designed to mimic a typical Critical Speed
Analysis workflow. In the future, you can refer to these workflows to
assist you with using WELLPLAN.
By the end of the Critical Speed course you will know how to complete
the following tasks:
q Input required data for the analysis.
q Create analysis plots.
q Interpret analysis plots to analyze string behavior over a range of

operating parameters.
q Predict critical rotational speeds that may cause damaging

vibrations.
q Investigate the effect of changing input parameters on the

vibrational response of the string.
q Recognize drilling parameters that are likely to cause vibration.

Chapter 8: Critical Speed
Critical Speed: An Introduction
What is the Critical Speed Module?

The Critical Speed Analysis module is used to identify critical rotary
speeds and areas of high stress concentration in the drillstring. The
analysis uses an engineering analysis technique called Forced
Frequency Response (FFR) to solve for resonant rotational speeds

Resonance can occur when a drillstring’s natural vibration is subjected

to a forced vibration. Resonance is an increase in amplitude that results
when a drillstring is exposed to a periodic force or displacement
(excitation) whose frequency is equal to, or very close to the natural
frequency of the system. Resonance is nearly always accompanied with
severe high dynamic stresses that can cause drillstring damage or
failure. The Critical Speed Analysis module indicates resonant
frequencies for a drillstring rotating in a wellbore, as well as non-
rotating steerable assemblies. The effects of hole angle, curvature, collar
size, contact locations, and BHA displacement due to rotational friction
effects can be modeled. Drill string rotation will affect the results of this
analysis, to some degree, due to additional torque at the contact points
that are generated due to friction forces.
Critical Speed Limitations

A rotating drillstring is subject to intermittent contact, impact, and
friction effects as well as many other highly nonlinear and transient
phenomena. Since the Critical Speed Analysis module assumes cyclic
behavior, transient effects typical for drillstring dynamics cannot be
modeled. The analysis assumes all drillstring components are free of
stress fractures. Ideally, this type of analysis is run along with downhole
sensors, or at the least with careful surface observations.
Isolating and identifying the principal excitation mechanism responsible

for drillstring vibrations has proven to be challenging. The literature
contains many studies undertaken to acquire and analyze experimental
and field-derived data to determine the dynamic characteristics of
drillstring systems. Many excitation mechanisms have been identified,
including bit forces, stabilizer forces, mass imbalances, and walk and
whirl mechanisms.
It is important to realize that the Critical Speed Analysis module does

not provide an exact solution for critical frequencies. The results from
the Critical Speed Analysis are relative stresses, indicating those
frequencies that are likely to cause damaging vibrations. The Critical
Speed Analysis module can be used prior to drilling, or can be use in
conjunction with downhole sensors. Vibration control is a multi-step
process. It involves planning and analysis, monitoring during drilling,
and interpreting control through observations.

Workflow
The following steps are designed to be a general guide to the steps

involved in using the Critical Speed Analysis module. This workflow is
not intended to suggest that you must follow these steps when using the
module. There are certainly other workflows that may meet your
analysis requirements.
q Select the Critical Speed Analysis module by clicking .
→Offshore) If this isn’t an offshore well, you won’t be able to
access this dialog.

workstrings (drillstrings, tubing, liners, and so forth) (Case
→String)

Editor)
q Define the fluids used. You must define the fluid rheological
properties, select a rheology model, and specify the temperature.
You can define as many fluids as you want. Only one fluid can be
used at a time. (Case →Fluid Editor)
q Optional Step: Most of the time you will want to use the default
values for the mesh. Rarely will you need to change this
information. (Case →Mesh Zone)
q Define the analysis parameters. (Parameter→Critical Speed

Analysis Parameters)
q Analyze the results. First, determine the critical rotational speeds.

(View→Rotational Speed Plots→Resultant Stresses) Next,
determine where in the string the greatest relative stress is
occurring at the critical rotational speeds.

(View→Position Plots→Resultant Stresses) You may also want

to determine what type of stress is causing the large relative
stresses. (View→Position Plots→Stress Components)

Using Critical Speed
Starting the Critical Speed Module

There are two ways to begin the Critical Speed Analysis module:
l Select Critical Speed from the Modules menu.
l Click the button.
Opening the Case

In this section of the course, we will be analyzing the Case ‘Landmark
1’ in the Project ‘Wellplan 6 Example’ and Well ‘DEMO’. Open this
Case now by using File→Open Case and selecting the appropriate
Project, Well and Case.
Entering Case Data

Like all WELLPLAN modules, Critical Speed uses the information
input on the Case menu. Entry of almost all of this information is
discussed in the Basics chapter of this manual. Please refer to “Entering
Case Data” on page 40 of the Basics chapter of this manual if you have
questions concerned with the General dialog, Offshore dialog, Wellbore
Editor, String Editor, Survey Editor, or Fluid Editor.
Specify the Finite Element Mesh

Normally you will use the default values as shown below. You may
consider changing the mesh if you are particularly interested in what is
happening at a particular section of the workstring. Otherwise, the
defaults provide adequate analysis of most situations. The information
entered on this dialog is used to divide the string up into small portions
(called elements) prior to analysis. The Finite Element analysis (FEA)
method used in Critical Speed analyzes small portions initially, and then
combines the individual analyses into an complete analysis for the entire
string. Please refer to “Supporting Information and Calculations” on
page 422 of the Bottom Hole Assembly chapter of this manual for more
information about FEA.

Use the default values

as displayed unless you
are familiar with FEA
and are particularly
interested in a section of
the string.
To understand how the Mesh Zone is used, assume you have an 8" collar
located in Zone 1. The maximum element length in Zone 1 for an 8"
collar would be:
8 inches X 20 (default for Aspect Ratio 1) = 160 inches = 13.3 ft.
An exception to this is in the bottom 12 feet of Zone 1 where there is a

3-foot limit for element length. The 3-foot limit is included because the
drillstring closest to the bit has a significant impact on the behavior of
the bottom hole assembly.

Defining Analysis Parameters

Use the Parameter→Critical Speed Analysis Parameters dialog to
input parameters needed to perform the critical speed calculations.
Refer to text below

for field definitions.
Field Definitions
Torque at Bit
Type the actual torque at the bit. Obtain typical bit torque values
from the bit manufacturer, or provide an estimate based on your
own experience.
Weight on Bit
Type the actual weight applied at the bit, not the surface weight that
is slacked off.
Steering Tool Orientation
Type the orientation of the steering tool (scribe line) relative to the
high side of the hole, measured clockwise from the high side. This
is used to orient the bend angle relative to the high side of the hole.
Starting Speed, Ending Speed
A critical speed analysis will be performed at every Speed
Increment within the range specified by the Starting Speed and
Ending Speed fields.
Speed Increment
Type the range and the speed increment you want.
Note: Calculation time increases as the number of speeds analyzed
increases. To reduce execution time, reduce the number of speeds
being analyzed at one time.
Excitation Frequency Factor
Type the rate you want the forcing function to be applied (number
of excitation per revolution). A general rule of thumb is to use 3.0

for tricone bits and 6.0 to 9.0 for PDC bits. The nature of forcing
functions is still an area of study in the industry.
Mesh Begins at Dist. From Bit, Max Total Length of Mesh
Normally, you will type values of 0.0 (zero) and 99999.9 for the
Mesh Begins At Depth From Bit and Max Total Length of Mesh,
respectively, in order to analyze the entire string starting at the bit
(or as much as can be meshed by the number of nodes available). If
you want to study an limited portion of the string, type a smaller
range. Use measured depth to estimate the distance in feet.If you
get an error message indicating an “Non Converged Solution,” this
means the critical speed analysis was unable to solve the structural
solution, usually because the of a complex drillstring (many small
components) and hole geometry. If this happens, shorten the mesh
length, and run the analysis again.
Dynamics
Check this box to turn on the calculation of the nodal torque due to
friction. The nodal torque affects the initial static solution of the
displaced shape of the BHA. If you don’t check this box, the only
torque that will be used is the torque you entered for Torque at Bit.
Specify the Boundary Conditions

Use the Parameter→Boundary Condition Options dialog box to
determine the physical constraints on the top and bottom nodes of the
mesh.
Use the default values as presented here, unless you are familiar with
Finite Element Analysis methods.
Fix w/Axial Slider prevents all movement except for sliding

movement along the longitudinal axis of the string.
Fix Axial prevents sliding movement along the longitudinal

axis of the string, but allows all other types of movement.

Calculating Results
Calculations will be performed automatically when you select a plot
from the View menu.
A typical critical speed analysis consists of an initial “frequency sweep,”

in which the drillstring is analyzed over a user-specified range of
operating speeds. The program repeatedly analyzes the drillstring by
incrementally stepping though the given range. At each step the program
computes the excitation frequency for that step from the current
rotational speed (RPM) and the excitation factor. It then applies the
excitation to the drillstring at the computed frequency and solves for the
response in the entire model. For this analysis, response means any
component of displacement, force, or stress. The maximum response at
each step is saved. After the entire range has been analyzed, the
maximums can be plotted against the operating speed range. These plots
are then used to determine the critical operating speeds for the drillstring
or assembly.
Once the critical speeds are determined, the analysis can be repeated at
each critical speed and the response of the total drillstring model can be
examined. This type of analysis is used to determine the exact nature of
the resonant behavior at a particular critical speed.
Analyzing the Results

All critical speed analysis results are presented as graphs, and can be
selected from the View menu.
What are the Critical Rotational Speeds?

You can determine the critical rotational speeds by reviewing the
Equivalent Resultant Stress curve on the View→Rotational Speed
Plots→Resultant Stresses plot.
It is important to remember that the stress values are relative

stresses and not actual stresses. The stresses are relative in
magnitude to each other also. You cannot determine from the plot
what the actual stress is. You can only compare relative
magnitudes.

For example:
If two stresses are calculated to be 5,000 and 10,000 psi, the stresses may
not be exactly equal to the calculated value. Because the stresses are
relative in magnitude, the stresses may really be 4,000 and 8,000 psi.
All peaks represent stresses above and beyond steady state stresses
caused by vibrations. They are relative to the magnitude of the forcing
function used and should be used only to assist with the location of
critical rotating speeds. The forcing function is a periodic displacement
or force (the Critical Speed Analysis module uses displacement) at a
point on the drillstring that is assumed to occur a regular number of
times per revolution. The forcing function (displacement) can be lateral,
axial, or torsional.
Referring to the following Maximum Relative Resultant Stress plot, you

can see the large peaks of relative stress at certain rotational speeds. You
should avoid the rotational speeds associated with a large relative stress.
Make a note of the critical rotational speeds. You will use them in the
next step of your analysis.
The peak at 74 rpm indicates that this is a critical rotational frequency. This
frequency should be analyzed further. Note that you cannot determine the
actual resultant stress by reviewing this plot. You can only determine that
the stresses at 74 rpm are greater than the stresses at other rpms.
Where in the BHA are the Large Relative Stresses Occurring?

Now that you know what rotational speeds are causing large relative
stresses, you may want to know where in the bottom hole assembly
(BHA) these stresses are occurring. Use the

View→Position Plots→Resultant Stresses plot to determine where in

the BHA the large stresses are occurring.
At 74 rpm, the
maximum equivalent
stress is acting on the
bottom hole
assembly 31 feet
from the bit.
Use the slider bar to change

the rotational speed you want
to analyze.
Refer to the Case→String Editor to determine what component is

located 31 feet from the bit.
What Kind of Stress is Causing the Large Relative Stress?

You may want to know what type of stress (axial, bending, torsional,
shear) is causing the large relative resultant stresses to occur in a certain
part of the BHA. Use the View→Position Plots→Stress Components
plot.
Bending stress is the
most significant
stress acting on the
bottom hole
assembly 31 feet
from the bit while
rotating at 74 rpm.

How Do I View the Large Relative Stress at Any Position on One Plot?
We have been using one plot to tell us what rotational speeds have a
large relative stress and then referring to a position plot to tell us where
in the bottom hole assembly these stresses are occurring. You can use
the View→3D Plots→Resultant Stresses→Equivalent plot to view
this information on one plot if you prefer.
Read Distance from Read Rotational

Click and hold down Bit on this axis. Speed on this axis.
the left mouse
button anywhere on
the plot and then
move the mouse to
rotate the plot.
Read the Equivalent

Stress on this axis.

Structural Solution
The Critical Speed Analysis module begins by performing a structural
solution to determine the displaced shape of the drillstring and the forces
acting on it. The structural solution is accomplished through the use of
the mathematical Finite Element Analysis method.
The static structural solution is completed to determine where the

drillstring is in contact with the wellbore. This information is passed on
to the vibrational analysis segment of the analysis. Any contact points
found during the structural solution are assumed to remain in contact
during the vibrational analysis.
Other points of contact between the string and the wellbore may occur
due to vibration. These contact points may lead to displacements outside
of the wellbore. In reality, displacements outside of the wellbore do not
occur. This is a limitation in the analysis. As a result of this limitation,
the analysis predicts a relative critical frequency (RPM), and does not
model or predict the actual magnitude of a critical frequency.
The steps performed in the structural solution analysis step are the same
as those performed in the WELLPLAN Bottom Hole Assembly analysis
module. The only exception is that the Critical Speed Analysis module
meshes the drillstring into 150 nodes. (The Bottom Hole Assembly
Analysis module will mesh the BHA into 40 nodes.) Refer to the Bottom
Hole Assembly module chapter in this manual for more details
concerning the structural solution.
Vibrational Analysis
Following the completion of the structural solution, the vibrational
portion of the analysis is begun. After the shape of the drillstring is
determined and the structural solution has been performed, the Critical
Speed Analysis module calculates the critical frequencies, or RPMs.
The critical frequencies are determined from the response of the BHA to
some user specified harmonic excitation usually, but not limited, to the
bit. The Critical Speed Analysis module assumes that at a critical
rotational speed, or RPM, excitations at the bit, stabilizer, or other
contact points cause large displacements and stresses elsewhere in the
drillstring. Because the Critical Speed Analysis module is a harmonic

vibration analysis, it does not model the reaction of the drillstring if it is

rotating about an axis that is not centered on the drillstring axis (bit
whirl).
The Critical Speed Analysis module solves for a range of frequencies to

determine the sensitivity of the BHA to the excitation frequency.
Because the analysis applies the boundary conditions only during the
static structural solution, it may yield displacements outside of the
wellbore during the vibrational analysis. The Critical Speed Analysis
module is not a transient analysis, and does not solve the analysis related
to time. As a result, any contact points occurring as a result of the
vibrational analysis are allowed to penetrate the wellbore.
The full transient dynamic response analysis of any non-linear finite

element model involves the finite integration of the equations of motion
found in Equation 1.
In Equation 1, P(t) is a vector quantity indicating the periodic

displacement at a point on the drillstring that occurs at a regular number
of times per revolution. This displacement (or force) can be lateral,
axial, or torsional.
{P(t)} = {I(u,t)} + [C]{ú(t)} + [M]{Ü(t)} (equation 1)
where:
{P(t)} = Applied Load Vector (or forcing function) at time t

{u(t)} = Displacement Vector at time t
{I(u,t)}= Internal Force Vector at time t and Displacement State {u}
[C] = Damping Matrix
[M] = Mass Matrix
{} indicates a vector quantity
[] indicates a matrix quantity
() indicates differentiation with respect to time t
To utilize this equation for solving drilling mechanics problems, it must

be formulated to include the following factors common to drilling.
• The need for large displacement and finite rotation beam theories in
modeling drillstring and BHA components
• Dealing with intermittent contact and the friction effects involved
• The need to model a tortuous 3D curved wellbore surface
• Representing the structural behavior of certain drillstring
components (motors and so forth)

The approach utilized in the analysis solves a linearized form of the

above equation for the case of vibration in which all displacements and
forces are varying harmonically in time at the same frequency. In order
to develop the harmonic formula, two assumptions are made:
• First, it is assumed that the response is at the same frequency as the

excitation, but not necessarily the same phase.
• Second, it is assumed that the excitation is a function and response
of the sin and cosine terms at the same phase. Since the analysis
assumes cyclic behavior, transient effects, such as impact forces
that may have a significant impact on the service life of a
component, can not be modeled with the Critical Speed module.
The solution is based upon an imposed load or force vector excitation

{P}, and it is assumed the BHA is subjected to a harmonically varying
form of the excitation {P} given by:
{P(t)} = {Ps}sin ωt + {Pc}cos ωt (equation 2)
which yields a resulting steady state displacement response of:
{u(t)} = {us} sin ωt + {uc} cos ωt (equation 3)
The angular frequency (ω) of the excitation is directly related to the

rotary speed through the use of an excitation factor. The excitation
factor designates how many times per revolution a given excitation
occurs.
Combining the three previous equations and implementing concepts

from complex vector algebra, it is apparent that the steady state
displacement field arising from the applied harmonic loading can be
determined by solving for the solution of the linearized system of
complex force-displacement relation given by:
{Pc} + i{Ps} = ([J] - ω2[M] + iω[C])({uc} + i{us}) (equation 4)
where:
i = −1
[J] = Jacobian matrix (contains the effects of contact, stress
stiffening and friction)
[M] = Mass matrix
[C] = Damping matrix

During the vibration portion of the analysis, the previous equation is

solved for a range of operating (RPM) speeds. At a critical rotary speed,
small forced excitations at the point of application will cause large
displacements and stresses elsewhere in the drillstring. Therefore, ωcr is
said to locate a point of structural instability of the BHA. The Critical
Speed Analysis module generates many graphics to illustrate this
phenomena.
Mass Matrix
The mass matrix implemented in the Critical Speed Analysis module is
a lumped mass matrix. From the composition of the matrices, it is
evident that the material component descriptions (ID, OD, weight,
material), and fluid descriptions are important data for correctly
determining vibrational response.
In the previous equation, the mass matrix is denoted by [M], and

contains terms based on the following four classes of effects:
l Structural - This is the primary mass matrix, and is based on the

dimensions and material of the drillstring.
l Fluid - Additional term included to account for the weight of the

fluid inside the drillstring.
l Inertial - Includes the effects of acceleration of mud outside the

drillstring.
l Nonstructural mass - Includes miscellaneous masses that may be

attached to the drillstring and are not accounted for in any other
way.
Damping Matrix
The Critical Speed Analysis module includes damping in predicting the
response of the drillstring to the specified excitations. Damping
primarily limits the magnitude of the response to the excitation. An
important implication of including damping in the model is that while
the response of the BHA will be at the same frequency as the excitation,
it may not be in phase with it. Damping includes the effects of
interaction with the formation, drilling fluid effects, inertial effects of
acceleration of mud outside the drillstring and mass damping produced
by the BHA structure.

To account for the damping, or energy losses that drillstring vibration is

subjected to, the Critical Speed includes the following three damping
mechanisms.
l Structural Damping - Accounts for energy losses due to

mechanical means.
l Fluid Damping - Accounts for energy losses due to fluid

movement on the drillstring. This damping does not use fluid
viscosity, and applies to the axial and torsional directions only.
l Lateral Fluid Damping - Accounts for energy losses due to

viscous fluid damping, and is applied to lateral direction only. This
type of damping is based on the work done by Chen (refer to the
Reference section) and uses flow equations for fluid moving around
a cylinder in a confined space.
The damping matrix terms are a function of beam element length, outer
diameter, and constant fluid damping coefficients. Discrete fluid
damping coefficients are also assigned for lateral, axial, and torsional
DOF. All damping coefficients are defaulted and are not user input
items.
Including damping is an important part of the vibrational analysis.

Referring to Equation 4, if the damping matrix is removed, the equation
is simplified. However, if damping is not included, the plots of
amplitude vs. frequency cause the critical states to appear as extremely
steep and relatively narrow spikes of infinite amplitude. A steep, narrow
spike could mislead a user into concluding that the analysis calculates
an exact value for the critical frequency (RPM). In reality, the analysis
can only predict a range of critical frequencies, but can not provide an
exact critical frequency.
Excitation Factors
The frequency of the excitation mechanism is designated by the use of
the excitation factor. This factor is simply the number of times the
excitation is applied for each revolution of the drillstring.
Although excitations are usually at the bit, this analysis can model
excitations at other locations. The Critical Speed Analysis module can
also model multiple excitations at multiple locations. These excitations
can be out of phase with one another, but they will all be assumed to be
excited at the same number of excitations per revolution. This can be a

problem if a tricone bit (normally 3 excitations/revolution) is combined

with a four blade stabilizer (perhaps 4 excitations/revolution).
Experience has shown the following excitation factors:
l Tricone Bits: EF = 3, as expected from the three lobed geometry
l PDC Bits: EF for PDC Bits vary depending on the bit design.
There is no specific rule for selecting the EF for PDC bits.
However a general rule obtained from laboratory experience is:
EF= (n)(#Blades) + 1; where n = 1 or 2

The following table presents several primary and secondary excitation

factors that may occur during drilling. For more information concerning
this information, refer to the references presented at the end of this
chapter.
Physical Primary Secondary

Mechanism Excitation(s) Excitation(s)
Mass Imbalance 1 X RPM Lateral 2 X RPM Axial or

or Bent Pipe
2 X RPM Torsional or
2 X RPM Lateral
Misalignment 1 X RPM Lateral or 2 X RPM Axial or
2 X RPM Lateral 2 X RPM Axial
Tricone Bit 3 X RPM Axial 3 X RPM Torsional or
3/2 X RPM Lateral
Very Soft 1,2,3,4,5, X RPM Axial,
Formation, Low Torsional, Lateral
WOB, Causing a
Loose Drillstring
Rotational Walk dh /(dh - dd) X RPM Lateral 2(dh (dh -dd)) RPM Axial or
(precessional)
2(dh (dh -dd)) RPM Torsional
Rotational Walk dd /(dh - dd) X RPM Lateral 2(dd (dh -dd)) RPM Axial or
(backward whirl)
2(dd (dh -dd)) RPM Torsional
Non synchronous (0.8 to 1.0)(dh(dh - dd)) X RPM (0.6 to 2.0)(dh(dh - dd)) X
Walk or Whirl Lateral (0.6 to 2.0)(dh(dh - dd)) RPM Axial or
X RPM
(0.6 to 2.0)(dh(dh - dd)) X
RPM Torsional
Drillstring Whip RPM Harmonics (1X, 2X, 3X) RPM Harmonics Axial,
Lateral Torsional

References
Field, D.J., DRD Corp., Swarbrick, A.J., Halliburton MWD, and

Haduch, G.A., DRD Corp., “Techniques for Successful Application of
Dynamic Analysis in the Prevention of Field-Induced Vibration
Damage in MWD Tools,” SPE #25773, 1993.
Apostal, M.C., Haduch, G.A., and Williams, J.B., DRD Corp., “A Study
to Determine the Effect of Damping on Finite-Element-Based, Forced-
Frequency-Response Models for Bottomhole Assemble Vibration
Analysis”, SPE #20458, 1990.
Besaisow, A.A. and Payne, M.L., ARCO Oil and Gas Co., “A Study of
Excitation Mechanisms and Resonances Inducing BHA Vibrations”,
SPE #15560, 1986.
Nicholson, J.W., Shell Research B.V., “An Integrated Approach to

Drilling Dynamics Planning, Identification, and Control”, IADC/SPE
#27537, 1994.
Defourny, P., Security DBS, and Abbassian, F., BP Exploration,

“Flexible Bit: A New Anti-Vibration PDC Bit Concept”, SPE #30475,
1995.
Gallagher, J., Baker Hughes INTEQ, Waller, M., Shell (U.K.) E&P, and
Ruszka, J., Baker Hughes INTEQ, “Performance Drilling: A Practical
Solution to Drillstring Vibration”, IADC/SPE 27538, 1994.
Behr, S.M., Warren, T.M., Sinor, L.A., Brett, J.F., Amoco Production
Co., “Three-Dimensional Modeling of PDC Bits”, SPE #21928, 1991.
Behr, S.M., Warren, T.M., Brett, J.F., Amoco Production Co., “Bit
Whirl: A New Theory of PDC Bit Failure”, SPE 19571, 1989.
Dykstra, M.W.; Chen, D. C-K.; Warren, T.M.; Azar, J.J., “Drillstring

Component Mass Imbalance: A Major Source of Downhole
Vibrations”, SPE #29350, 1996.


Chapter 9
Bottom Hole Assembly
The Bottom Hole Assembly module was designed to predict the
directional drilling performance of a bottom hole assembly. The module
can provide an accurate representation of the forces acting on the
assembly as it exists in the wellbore. This type of analysis can be useful
for explaining unexpected performance or for determining the causes of
tool failures. In addition, the module can solve a “drillahead” scenario
to represent the expected behavior of the bottom hole assembly as it
drills new hole.
Bottom Hole Assembly Course Overview
During the Bottom Hole Assembly segment of your WELLPLAN

training you will learn the basic functionality of the Bottom Hole
Assembly module. The class exercise and workflow are designed to
follow a typical workflow using the module. In the future, you can refer
to these workflows to assist you with using WELLPLAN.
By the end of the Bottom Hole Assembly course you will know how to
complete the following tasks:
q Input required data for the analysis.
q Create analysis plots and report.
q Interpret analysis plots to analyze string behavior over a range of

operating parameters.

Chapter 9: Bottom Hole Assembly
Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis: An Introduction
What is the Bottom Hole Assembly Module?

The Bottom Hole Assembly module analyzes a bottom hole assembly
(BHA) in a static “in-place” condition or in a “drillahead” mode. Many
different factors influence the behavior of a bottom hole assembly.
These factors include more controllable parameters such as WOB, and
drillstring component size and placement, as well as less controllable
items such as formation type. Because the performance of a bottom hole
assembly is impacted by such a wide and varied range of parameters,
predicting the behavior of a bottom hole assembly can be very complex.
Engineers in other fields have often relied on the Finite Element

Analysis Method to solve complex problems. The Finite Element
Analysis (FEA) method solves a complex problem by breaking it into
smaller problems. Each of the smaller problems can then be solved
much easier. The individual solutions to the smaller problems can be
combined to solve the complex problem. Depending on the number of
elements (smaller problems) that the complex structure (overall
problem) is comprised of, the solution can become very laborious.
Fortunately, the combination of the increasing speed of computing
power and creative mathematics have significantly simplified FEA
analysis.
Because a bottom hole assembly is composed of many different

elements of varying dimensions, it lends itself quite well to the FEA
method. The following sections describe the major steps performed by
the Bottom Hole Assembly module while solving for an “in-place”
solution, as well as a “drillahead” prediction. For more technical
information, refer to “Supporting Information and Calculations” on
page 422.
Why Should I Use the Bottom Hole Assembly Module?

There are many times where the Bottom Hole Assembly module can be
useful. Among these are:
l Analyze the contact forces and displaced shape of a bottom hole

assembly including the bit tilt, side forces, and wellbore contact
points.

l Study previous directional failures through analysis of contact

forces on tools.
l Predict the directional behavior (including build, walk, and drop) of

a bottom hole assembly as it drills ahead through a specified
interval.
l Predict the transient effect when new assembly is run in hole.
l Adjust operating parameters to affect bottom hole assembly

performance.
l Study effects of bent assemblies, collar size, stabilizer placement,

eccentric stabilizers, stabilizer wear, hole enlargement, operating
parameters for optimal performance.
l Select proper bent sub to achieve desired build or drop rate.
l Estimate the additional torque drawn from a motor due to lateral

forces at bit.
l Determine the downhole mechanism controlling the bottom hole

assembly.
l Determine the orientation of a bottomhole assembly (0 - 180

degrees left or right of high side) for achieving optimum
performance in a well deflection scenario.
l Compare a rotary versus steerable assembly performance for a

given well trajectory analysis.
l Optimize the design of a steerable system through modeling of

number of bends and eccentric contact points in the bottom hole
assembly.
Bottom Hole Assembly Module Limitations

The Bottom Hole Assembly module does not model formation dip.

Workflow
The following steps are designed to be a general guide to the steps

involved in using the Bottom Hole Assembly module. This workflow is
not intended to suggest that you must follow these steps when using the
module. There are certainly other workflows that may meet your
analysis requirements.
q Select the Bottom Hole Assembly module by clicking .
q Define the workstring. Use the String Editor to define all

workstrings (drillstrings, tubing, liners, and so forth). (Case
→String Editor)

Editor)
q Define the fluids used. You must define the fluid rheological
properties, select a rheology model, and specify the temperature.
You can define as many fluids as you want. Only one fluid can be
used at a time. (Case →Fluid Editor)
q Optional Step: Most of the time you will want to use the default
values for the mesh. Rarely will you need to change this
information. (Case →Mesh Zone)
q Define the analysis parameters. (Parameter→Analysis)
q Analyze the results. Using View→Report→BHA you can analyze

the expected build/drop and walk rates for the bottom hole
assembly. You can also analyze the contact forces acting on the
BHA, which may assist you with determining why the bottom hole
assembly is performing as it is.

Using Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis Mode
Starting Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis

There are two ways to begin the Bottom Hole Assembly module:
l Select Bottom Hole Assembly from the Modules menu.
l Click .
In this class example, we will use the case “9 5/8" casing” in the Guided
Tour project, well named Tour #1. Please open this case.
Entering Case Data

Like all WELLPLAN modules, Bottom Hole Assembly uses the
information input on the Case menu. Entry of almost all of this
information is discussed in the Basics chapter (2) of this manual. Please
refer to the Basics chapter of this manual if you have questions
concerned with the General dialog, Offshore dialog, Wellbore Editor,
String Editor, Survey Editor, or Fluid Editor.
Specify the Finite Element Mesh

Normally you will use the default values as shown below. You may
consider changing the mesh if you are particularly interested in what is
happening at a particular section of the workstring. Otherwise, the
defaults provide adequate analysis of most situations. The information
entered on this dialog is used to divide the string up into small portions
(called elements) prior to analysis. The Finite Element analysis (FEA)
method used in Bottom Hole Assembly analyzes small portions initially,
and then combines the individual analyses into an complete analysis for
the entire string.

Use the default values

as displayed unless you
are familiar with FEA and
are particularly
interested in a section of
the string. You may want
to reduce the element
size in areas you are
particularly interested in.
To understand how the Mesh Zone is used, assume you have an 8" collar
located in Zone 1. The maximum element length in Zone 1 for an 8"
collar would be:
8 inches X 20 (default for Aspect Ratio 1) = 160 inches = 13.3 ft.
An exception to this is in the bottom 12 feet of Zone 1 where there is a

drillstring closest to the bit has a significant impact on the behavior of
the bottom hole assembly and a smaller element size better models the
behavior in this portion of the string.
Analyzing a Static Bottom Hole Assembly

Static in-place analysis of the bottom hole assembly can be useful in
determining the contact forces and displaced shape of a bottom hole
assembly, including bit tilt, side forces, and wellbore contact points.
This may be helpful in analyzing previous directional failures through
analysis of contact forces on tools.
Defining Analysis Parameters for Static Analysis

Use Parameter→Analysis to input parameters needed to perform the
calculations. Do not mark the Enable Drillahead check box at this time
because we are analyzing the bottom hole assembly at the current depth.

Later we will analyze the forces acting on the bottom hole assembly in
a “drillahead” scenario.
For information
regarding data
required for this
dialog, refer to the
following text.
Parameters
Torque at Bit
Type the actual torque at the bit. Obtain typical bit torque values
from the bit manufacturer, or provide an estimate based on your
own experience.
Weight at Bit
Type the actual weight applied at the bit. Weight on bit is the
compressive axial load that is applied to the formation by the bit
face. It is the difference between the net weight of the entire
drillstring and the resulting reduced weight when the bit is resting
on bottom.
Rotary Speed
Type the rotating speed of the drillstring and bit once steady state
conditions are reached. For rotary assemblies, type the rotating
speed of the drillstring. For hydraulic motor assemblies where the
drillpipe does not turn, type the rotating speed of the bit. The rotary

speed is used in the lateral penetration model. It does not effect the
static structural solution of the bottom hole assembly.
Enable Drillahead Box

Check this box to solve a “drillahead” scenario to represent the
expected behavior of the bottom hole assembly as it drills new hole.
The “drillahead” solution advances the bit depth, in 5-foot
intervals, through the drill interval specified below. At each of the
5-foot intervals, a static solution is performed. The drillahead
solution assumes the following:
• The bit will drill in the direction it is pointed.
• The bit will cut sideways due to the presence of side forces
generated in the inclination and direction axes.
• The formation has isotropic rock properties.
Drillahead
Steering Tool Orient
Steering tool orientation is the orientation of the steering tool
(scribe line) relative to the high side of the hole, measured
clockwise from the high side. The tool orientation is used in
conjunction with the Tool Reference to determine the orientation of
the bend, relative to the high side of the hole.
Note: A steering tool must be present in the drillstring in order to
enter a tool orientation. Refer to the Basics chapter (2) of this
manual for help with entering steering tools.
Drill Interval
Drill interval is the total measured depth distance that the current
bottom hole assembly will drill ahead. Usually, 100 to 200 feet is
sufficient to determine the directional behavior of the bottom hole
assembly. A minimum value of 100 feet is recommended.
Overgauge
Overgauge is the amount of washout expected as the bottom hole
assembly is drilling. This effect can be modeled without having to
change the hole size on the Wellbore Editor.
Record Interval
Record interval is the distance at which the survey points will be
generated for the final output.
Bit Coefficient
The bit coefficient is a number between 0 and 100 that indicates the
efficiency at which a drill bit will cut sideways. The typical range
for roller bits is 20-80, 80 being used for soft formation bits and 20
for hard formation bits. A bit coefficient of 0 means the bit does not
cut sideways, yielding a trajectory based solely on bit tilt. Rarely
will a bit attain an efficiency of 100. Refer to “Supporting

Information and Calculations” on page 422 of this chapter for more

information.
Formation Hardness
The formation hardness is a number between 0 and 60 which is
used in the lateral ROP model to resist the bit side cutting
capability. Refer to “Supporting Information and Calculations” on
page 422 of this chapter for more information.
Rate of Penetration
The rate of penetration is the speed at which the drillstring is
drilling the hole.
Dynamics Box
Check to turn on the calculation of the nodal torque due to friction.
The nodal torque affects the initial static solution of the displaced
shape of the bottom hole assembly. If you do not check this box, the
only torque that will be applied to the string is the specified torque
at bit.
Analyzing Results for the Static (in-place) Position

First we are going to analyze the current position of the bottom hole
assembly. We will investigate the position of the bottom hole assembly
in the wellbore and we will determine the side forces acting on the
bottom hole assembly where it is in contact with the wellbore. Later we
will analyze the bottom hole assembly as it drills ahead.
Plots
Two plots are available for analysis. The Displacement plot allows you
to determine how the bottom hole assembly is lying in the wellbore. The
Side Force plot tells you the side force acting on the bottom hole
assembly as it lies in the wellbore.
Displacement Plot
The View→Displacement plot displays the displacement from the
centerline versus distance from bit. Three measures of displacement are
used:
• Inclination - the displacement of the analyzed portion of the

drillstring from the wellbore centerline in the inclination plane
• Directional - the displacement of the analyzed portion of the
drillstring from the wellbore centerline in the direction plane
• Clearance - the displacement of the analyzed portion of the
drillstring from the wellbore centerline

A positive value for

Direction indicates
the string
displacement from
the wellbore
centerline is towards
the right side of the
wellbore.
A clearance of zero A negative value for Inclination

indicates the string is indicates the string displacement
lying along the wellbore. from the wellbore centerline is
towards the low side of the wellbore.
Side Force Plot

The View→Side Force plot displays the calculated side force (at each
node analyzed) versus distance from bit. This information is also
displayed in table form in the BHA Forces section of the report.
The maximum side

force is at the bit.
About 65 feet from

the bit, the side force
is close to 1000 lbs.
Report Options
analyzing.

Using the Report

The BHA report (View→Report→BHA) contains information
regarding the forces acting the bottom hole assembly and the resulting
displacements. The BHA report provides information concerning the
forces acting on each element and node as well.
What is Happening at the Bit?

The BHA report includes a section that indicates the bit tilt in both the
inclination and direction planes. This information pertains to the bit
only. It is possible to have a negative bit tilt, yet build angle. If this
should occur, it is probable that the bit is momentarily tilted downward,
and that the assembly is influenced by a positive side force. Always
consider all the information presented when analyzing a bottom hole
assembly performance.
What are the Forces Acting on the Bottom Hole Assembly?

The following is an excerpt from the BHA report. From this portion of
the BHA report you can view a table of the forces acting on the bottom
hole assembly. Force information is useful in determining where the
bottom hole assembly is in contact with the wellbore along with the
corresponding side force at the contact point. This can be helpful if an
assembly is not building or dropping as expected. Perhaps there is no
contact between stabilizers for a build assembly, or the contact point is
not in the proper location. The BHA Forces information may also be
useful in determining areas where casing wear may become a problem.
Look for areas of contact in the cased hole section. The Bottom Hole
Assembly module will not determine if casing wear is a problem, only
that the bottom hole assembly is in contact with the inside of the casing.

If you do not check the

Dynamics box on the Analysis
Parameters dialog the torque
You can determine the contact is always equal to the value
forces acting on any portion of for torque at bit that you
the string that was analyzed. specified.
Where is the Bottom Hole Assembly Located in the

Wellbore?
The following is an another excerpt from the report. From this portion
of the report you can view a table representing how the bottom hole
assembly is lying in the wellbore.

Clearance is
the minimum
This information is distance
also available in the between the
Displacement plot drillstring and
you viewed earlier. the wellbore.
What Force and Moment is Acting at Each Node?

The Element Forces Table from the BHA Report contains information
regarding the magnitudes of the forces and moments (associated with
each degree of freedom) acting on each node.
You can see the forces and moments acting on each element and node.

You can view a summary of this information in the Element Forces

Table Summary of the BHA Report. This table displays the minimum
and maximum magnitudes of each force and moment along with the
corresponding nodes at which these forces or moments occur.
You can view the minimum and maximum force and moment as well as the node at which
the force or moment occurs.
What are the Stresses at Each Node?

The Component Stress Table from the BHA Report displays the
magnitudes of each stress type (axial, bending, torsion, shear and
equivalent) along with the corresponding nodes at which they occur.
Stress information is reported based on stress type.

What are the Principal Stress Acting at Each Node?

The principal stress table from the BHA Report displays the magnitudes
of the maximum principal, minimum principal, maximum shear and
equivalent stress at each node analyzed.
You can determine the principal stress acting at each node.
What is the Inclination and Azimuth of the Drillstring or

Wellbore?
The final section of the BHA Report—the Wellbore vs. Drillstring
Angle Table—contains information related to the inclination and
azimuth directions of each node for the string and the wellbore.
You can determine the inclination and azimuth of the string and wellbore at any node.

Predicting How a Bottom Hole Assembly Will Drill Ahead

The drillahead analysis is useful in the planning stages, as well as during
the operational stages. Drillahead analysis can be used to predict the
directional behavior of a bottom hole assembly during the planning
stages. Drillahead analysis makes it possible to study the effects of
various components, including bent assemblies, collar sizes, stabilizer
placement, hole enlargement, and component wear. During well
operations, drillahead analysis can be used to adjust operating
parameters to optimize performance.
The drillahead analysis first performs the same analysis as in the static
analysis. The program then drills ahead in 5-foot increments to predict
the bottom hole assembly behavior over the user specified drillahead
interval. Data is presented on the reports in increments specified by the
user.
The report generated for the drillahead analysis is similar to the static
analysis except that information for a user specified drillahead interval
is included.
Defining Analysis Parameters for Drillahead Analysis

Use Parameter→Analysis to input parameters needed to perform the
calculations. Mark the Enable Drillahead check box in order to analyze
how the assembly drills ahead.

Check Enable Drillahead

to analyze how a bottom
hole assembly will perform
as it makes new hole.
Type in data as it appears

in the dialog.
Analyzing Drillahead Results

The reports and plots available for a drillahead analysis are the same as
those available for the static analysis discusses previously.
How Will the BHA Drill Ahead?

Refer to the Weight on Bit Study Report section of the BHA Report
(View→Report→BHA) to determine how the BHA performs over the
specified drillahead interval.
In this example, the BHA is very slightly building angle.

Predicted survey data is appended to the existing surveys based on the

drillahead parameters specified.
Predicted survey
data is appended
to the existing
surveys over the
drillahead interval
specified.
Why is the BHA Building or Dropping?

To assist you with determining why the BHA is performing as it is, you
can observe the BHA Forces table on the BHA Report
(View→Report→BHA).

These intermittent contact points You can determine where the

are the connections touching the BHA is in contact with the
wellbore. wellbore and the amount of
contact force.

The material contained in this section is intended to provide you more

detailed information and calculations pertaining to many of the steps
presented during the descriptions of the analysis mode methodologies.
require, please refer to the section titled “References” on page 438 for
additional sources of information pertaining to the topic you are
interested in.
Analysis Methodology
Three Fundamental Requirements of Structural Analysis

The Finite Element Analysis (FEA) method used in the Bottom Hole
Assembly module adheres to three basic conditions of structural
analysis:
• First, the internal forces must balance the external forces.

• Second, the solutions for each separate element must be compatible
with the next element. This is necessary so that the deformed
structure fits together.
• Third, the laws of material behavior must be followed.
Defining the Finite Element Mesh

The first step completed during the analysis is to divide the drillstring
into a 40 element mesh. This 40 element mesh is divided into three
sections, or “zones.” The total length of the mesh, the length of each
zone, and the maximum length of each element in a zone can all be set
by the user to create a coarser or finer mesh. The Bottom Hole Assembly
module has preset defaults for the total length of the mesh, the lengths
of the individual zones, and for the elements within the zones. It is
recommended that the defaults be used unless the user is very familiar
with Finite Element Analysis methods.
The defaults for lengths of zones 1 and 2 are 500 and 2500 feet,
respectively. The length of zone 3 varies depending on the remaining
length of drillstring and the remaining number of available nodes. The
Aspect Ratios for zones 1, 2 and 3 default to 20, 100, and 500
respectively. The following example explains how Aspect Ratios

determine element lengths. Assume there is an 8" collar in zone 1. The

maximum element length in zone 1 for an 8" collar would be:
8" X 20 (default for Aspect Ratio 1) = 160" or 13.3 ft.
An exception to this is in the bottom 12 feet of zone 1 where there is a

drillstring closest to the bit has a significant impact on the bottom hole
assembly behavior.
Compute the Local Stiffness Matrix and the Global Stiffness Matrix
After the drillstring has been divided into elements, each element is
closely examined in terms of geometrical and physical properties. The
correct representation of geometrical and physical properties—
including component weight, dimensions, moment of inertia and
modulus of elasticity—is very important in order to accurately represent
the component for the remaining analysis. The Bottom Hole Assembly
module has a catalog containing much of the information, but it is
important that the user carefully selects each component to model the
drillstring as closely as possible. The user should verify that all selected
component properties accurately reflect the component.
The local stiffness matrix [K] is an important piece of the analysis as it

represents how rigid or bendable a component is. The relationship
between the stiffness matrix [K], and the nodal forces, displacements,
rotations, and moments is defined in Equation 1.
(Equation 1)
{F} = [K] {δ}
where:
{F} = vector of nodal loads, and moments

[K] = stiffness matrix
{δ} = vector of nodal displacements, and rotations
The stiffness matrix [K] is composed of the following:
E = Young’s Modulus (lb/in2)

I = Moment of Inertia (in4)

L = Length between nodes (in)

G = Modulus of Rigidity = E/2 (1+v)
J = Polar Moment of Inertia = 2I
v = Poisson’s Ratio
Young’s Modulus (E) varies with material type. Young’s Moduli for a
few common materials are listed below.
Material Young’s Modulus
Steel 29 X 106 psi
Aluminum 10.3 X 106 psi

Monel 26 X 106 psi
Tungsten 87 X 106 psi
Beryllium-copper alloy 19.5 X 106 psi
The Moment of Inertia (I) varies based on the cross-section of the

element in question. The Moment of Inertia for a tubular element is
given in Equation 2.
(Equation 2)
I= π/64 (OD4 - ID4)
where:
OD = Outside diameter (in)

ID = Inside diameter (in)
Equations 1 (page 423) and 2 (above) clearly present the importance of
accurately representing the bottom hole assembly components. An
incorrect material type or tubular dimension can make a significant
difference.
Figure 1 (on the following page) is the expanded form of Equation 1

(above), and contains more complete descriptions of the vectors and
matrix. The forces and moments acting on the single element in Figure
4 (page 428) are calculated using the matrix algebra illustrated in Figure
1 (page 425). The data in this matrix is for the element between node “n”
and node “n+1.” Note that each element is defined by two nodes. There
are similar matrices for the element between node “n+1” and node
“n+2.”

Landmark
Figure 1: Expanded Stiffness Matrix Equation
Fx(n) (12EI)/L3 (6EI)/L2 (-12EI)/L3 (6EI)/L2 X(n)
Fy(n) (12EI)/L3 (-6EI)/2 (-12EI)/L2 (-6EI)/L2 Y(n)
Fz(n) AE/L -AE/L Z(n)

WELLPLAN
Mx(n) (-6EI)/L2 4EI/L (6EI)/L2 (2EI)/L θx(n)
My(n) =
(6EI)/L2 4EI/L (-6EI)/L2 (2EI)/L X θy(n)
Mz(n) GJ/L GJ/L θz(n)
Fx(n+1) (-12EI)/L3 (-6EI)/L2 (12EI)/L3 (-6EI)/L2 X(n+1)
Fy(n+1) (-12EI)/L2 (6EI)/L2 (12EI)/L3 (6EI)/L2 Y(n+1)
Fz(n+1) -AE/L AE/L Z(n+1)

Mx(n+1) (-6EI)/L2 2EI/L (6EI)/L2 4EI/L θx(n+1)
My(n+1) (6EI)/L2 2EI/L (-6EI)/L2 4EI/L θy(n+1)
Mz(n+1) GJ/L GJ/L θz(n+1)

425
The individual matrices for all the element are combined to form one
matrix for the entire bottom hole assembly. The expanded matrix [K]
containing data for all 40 nodes included in the analysis is structured as
in the Figure 2 (below).
Figure 2: Matrix Structure

Stiffness matrix [K] for element between nodes 1 and 2
Nodes 2 and 3
Nodes 3 and 4
Nodes 37 and 38
Nodes 38 and 39
Nodes 39 and 40

Figure 3: Simplified Beam Element

Length L
Y(n)
Y(n+1)
Deflected Position
Figure 3 (above) is a simplified beam element to illustrate the angle θ as

it is used in Figure 4 (page 428). The angle θ is used to measure the
deflection of the element from the reference axis.
The individual element stiffness matrices are computed and combined

to form the global stiffness matrix. This is a necessary step towards
ensuring a complete solution for the entire bottom hole assembly, rather
than a number of individual solutions for several elements. The global
matrix is a necessary step towards satisfying the fundamental
requirements of structural analysis mentioned earlier.

Degrees of Freedom
Figure 4: Single Beam Element
X
Fx(n+1)
M x(n+1) Z
Fz(n+1)
M z(n+1)
Fx(n)
M z(n) Fy(n+1)
Fz(n) M y(n+1)
Node n + 1
Mz(n)
Fy(n)
M y(n)
Node n
Refer to Figure 4 (above) for an illustration of a single beam element.

This particular illustration shows one element with six degrees of
freedom (DOF). A DOF is an unknown displacement that can occur at a
point, or node. As shown in Figure 4, each node can move along the X,
Y and Z axes, constituting three DOF—one DOF along each axis. In
addition, there can also be a rotation around each axis. This is an
additional three DOF, for a total of six at each node. Notice the forces
and moments acting on the beam at each node. During the mesh
generation step, the entire bottom hole assembly is divided into 39
similar single beam elements and analyzed.
Boundary Conditions
Boundary conditions are the physical constraints acting on the bottom
hole assembly. Boundary conditions are important to the analysis to set
how the structure is supported and constrained. Boundary conditions

make it possible to solve the finite element analysis. The Bottom Hole
Assembly module provides six default boundary conditions that can be
selected for the top and bottom nodes. The Bottom Hole Assembly
module’s system defaults do not apply boundary conditions to nodes
between the top and bottom nodes. An experienced user familiar with
FEA (and with assistance from Landmark) can define additional
boundary conditions and can enforce boundary conditions at additional
nodes. It is recommended that the defaults be used unless the user is
familiar with finite element analysis methods.
The following list defines the seven default boundary conditions

selections available for the top and bottom nodes.
l Full pin: All three translations are specified and rotations are free.
l Full Fix: All three translations and rotations are specified.
l Pin with Axial Slider: Two lateral translations (X, Y) are

specified. Z translation is free, and all three rotations are specified.
l Fix with Axial Slider: Two lateral translation (X, Y) are specified.
Z translation is free, and all three rotations are specified.
l Fix Axial: Two lateral translations (X, Y) are free. Z is specified,

and X,Y, and Z rotations are free.

l Fix Torsion: All three translations (X, Y, Z) are free, two rotations
(X, Y) are free, and Z rotation is specified.
l Fix Rotations: All three translations are free (X, Y, Z) and two
lateral rotations (X, Y) are specified, and Z rotation is specified.
Displacements Rotations
Description X Y Z X Y Z
Full Pin Set Set Set Free Free Free
Full Fix Set Set Set Set Set Set
Pin with Axial Slider Set Set Free Free Free Free
Fix with Axial Slider Set Set Free Set Set Set
Fix Axial Free Free Set Free Free Free
Fix Torsion Free Free Free Free Free Set
Fix Rotation Free Free Free Set Set Free

For each of the seven previous types, it is possible to modify the radius,
angle, axial displacement, and twist for each type.
l Radius: Determines the string position from the center of the

wellbore. A large value places it against the wellbore.
l Angle: Locates the string relative to the high side of the hole. A
radius of 1.0 unit and an angle of 90 degrees places the string one
unit (inch, mm, or so forth) to the right of the center of the hole.
l Axial Displacement: Used to initially displace the string.
l Twist: The rotation from the high side of the hole. This is used to
impart an initial twist to the string.
Constructing the Wellbore and Bottom Hole Assembly Reference Axis

Survey data and wellbore diameters are important pieces of information
supplied by the user. The Bottom Hole Assembly module uses this
information to construct the wellbore. Each survey data point supplied
by the user is used to calculate location reference coordinates for each
survey point of the wellbore using the survey calculation method
supplied by the user (that is, Radius of Curvature and so forth). Next, the
coordinates of the bottom hole assembly nodes are determined as if the
bottom hole assembly is lying along the centerline of the wellbore, with
the bit at the depth specified by the user.
A bottom hole assembly reference axis (Z) is established by using the

inclination and direction as interpolated at the bit location. The Z
reference axis is tangent to the wellbore and points toward the surface.

The X and Y reference axes are also established. The X axis points
toward the surface (vertical) and theY-axis is parallel to the surface
(lateral).
Hole diameters are assumed to be constant over the interval specified by

the user in the WELLPLAN Wellbore Editor.
Calculating the Solution

Using the information from the previous steps of the analysis, the
force/contact solution can be calculated. This is a complex, iterative
procedure. First, the drillstring finite element model is laid out along the
z-axis described above. Unless the wellbore is straight, the drillstring
finite element model penetrates the wellbore described by the surveys.
At this point, the program begins to determine the force acting between
the wellbore and the drillstring.
The boundary conditions are enforced on the nodes specified. All other
nodes have no boundary conditions applied. The program determines
where the drillstring has (theoretically) penetrated the wellbore and
calculates the restoring force necessary to move the node back into the
wellbore. If the node is already inside the wellbore, no force or
displacements are applied to the node.
These steps are repeated until the changes in displacements at all nodes
fall below a set tolerance. The objective is to determine the forces
necessary to move the nodes along the reference axis to the
corresponding nodal position lying along the wellbore centerline. When
this is accomplished, the solution is considered complete. At this point,
the axial forces, torque, stresses and coordinates (X, Y, and Z) of each
node are known.
Bit Tilt and Resultant Side Force

The following two figures are inclination and directional views of the
forces acting on a bit. In these figures, the following nomenclature is
used.

Figure 5: Inclination Forces
FI
FR
FA
φΑ
φI
φR TAN

Figure 6: Direction Forces

N TAN
θD
FR
FA
θA
θR
FD
FI = Inclination Force
FD = Direction Force
FRI = Resultant Inclination Force
FR = Resultant Direction Force
φI = Wellbore Inclination
fA = Bit Inclination
fR = Resultant Force Inclination Angle
θD = Wellbore Direction Angle
θA = Bit Direction Angle
θR = Resultant Force Direction Angle
These figures can be somewhat misleading because the inclinational (FI)
and directional (FD) side forces compared to the axial force (FA) in the
diagrams are represented approximately equal in magnitude. In normal
operating conditions, the axial force (FA) is usually 10 to 100 times the
magnitude of the side forces.

The bit tilt is defined as the angle between the centerline of the wellbore
and the centerline of the bit. As shown, there is a bit tilt in both the
inclination and azimuth directions. Bit tilt is a result of the bending
characteristics of the bottom hole assembly and the resulting force
acting on the bit.
The resultant force is a vector solution of all the forces acting on an

individual node, and it is this force that determines the magnitude of the
displacement from the center line. The bit trajectory is determined by
the resultant force acting on the bit and by the bit tilt.
Drillahead Solutions
The Bottom Hole Assembly module is capable of two analysis modes:
l The static or “in-place” solution has been explained in the previous

discussion. A static solution assumes the bit is stationary at the user
specified depth.
l The “drillahead” solution advances the bit depth, in 5 foot intervals,

through the interval specified by the user. At each of the 5 foot
intervals, a static solution is performed.
The drillahead solution assumes:

• The bit will drill in the direction it is pointed.
• The bit will cut sideways due to the presence of side forces
generated in the inclination and direction axes.
• The formation has isotropic rock properties.
Although side cutting is affected by penetration rate, it is not entirely a

function of the same parameters that affect penetration rate. Lateral
penetration rates do not always vary with penetration rate. One reason
for this can be attributed to the variety of bits available. Different bits
have different side cutting abilities. To calculate the lateral penetration
rate, the Bottom Hole Assembly module uses the Warren Penetration
Rate Model.

Warren Penetration Rate Model (Equation 3)

CS
Ri =
A (S2)(D3) C
+
(RSB)(Fi2) (RS) (D)
Where:
Ri = Lateral penetration rate (ft/hr)

CS = Side cutting coefficient = bit coefficient /10.0
S = Rock strength = formation hardness / 10.0
D = Bit diameter (in)
Rs = Rotary speed (rpm)
Fi = Lateral side force at the bit (kips)
A = Bit constant = 0.03
B = Bit constant = 0.60
C = Bit constant = 2.80
Bit Coefficient
Bit coefficients indicate how efficient a bit will cut sideways. Values for
bit coefficient range from 1 - 100. Note that a value of 0 indicates the bit
does not cut sideways, and the wellbore trajectory will be based solely
on bit tilt.
The following table includes suggested bit coefficients for roller cone
bits. Typically range for this type of bit is 20 - 80, with 20 used for soft
formations, and 80 used for hard formations.
IADC Series Bit Coefficient
8 20-30
3,7 30-40
2,6 40-60
1,4,5 60-80

The values for fixed cutter bit coefficients are more difficult to
determine from the IADC classification system. Cutter size, density, and
placement impact the determination of bit coefficient.
Fixed Cutter Bits Bit Coefficient
Flat Faced Diamond 0-5
Step Profile/Small Cutters 10-20
Bladed/Small Cutters 20-40
Step Profile/Large Cutters 40-60
Bladed/Large Cutters 60-80
Formation Hardness
Formation hardness is used in Equation 3 (page 436) to model the
formations resistance to the bit side cutting capability. Formation
hardness is a number between 0 and 60, with the larger numbers
indicating the relative hardness of the formation. The table below
correlates formation hardness to rate of penetration and formation
description.
Formation Formation ROP ROP

Description Hardness (ft/hr) (m/hr)
Soft 10 100+ 30+
Medium Soft 20 75 23
(Shallow Gulf
Coast)
Medium 30 50 15
(Above 10,000
feet)
Medium Hard 40 30 9
(Below 10,000
feet)
Hard 50 20 6
(Granite)
Rigid 60 10 3
(Igneous Rock)

References
Millheim, K.K., Jordan, S., and Ritter, C.J., “Bottom Hole Assembly
Analysis Using the Finite Element Method,” Journal of Petroleum
Technology, February, 1978, 265-74.
Warren, T.M., “Factors Affecting Torque for a Roller Cone Bit,”

Journal of Petroleum Technology, September 1984, 1500-08.
Rockey, K.C., Evans, H.R., Griffiths, D.W., and Nethercot, D.A., “The
Finite Element Method,” Granada Publishing Limited, 1975.
Williams, J.B., Apostal, M.C., Haduch, G.A., “An Analysis of Predicted

Wellbore Trajectory Using a Three-dimensional Model of a Bottomhole
Assembly with Bent Sub, Bent Housing, and Eccentric Contact
Capabilities,” SPE 19545, 1989.
Millheim, K., Jordan, S., Ritter, C.J., “Bottom Hole Assembly Analysis
Using the Finite Element Method,” SPE 6057, 1978.
Millheim, K., “Directional Drilling” (an 8 part series), Oil and Gas
Journal, 1979.

Chapter 10
Notebook
Notebook provides a wide range of simple operational calculations. The calculations in Notebook
are divided into three categories, including: Miscellaneous, Fluids, and Hydraulics
Overview
of using the Notebook module. To reinforce what you learn in the class
lecture, you will have the opportunity to complete several exercises
designed to prepare you for using the program outside of class. The
information presented in this chapter can be used as a study guide during
the course, and can also be used as a reference for future torque and drag
analysis.
Starting Notebook
You must have a Case open to use the Notebook module even though
case data will not be used in any analysis within the Notebook module.
Open the Case ‘9 5/8” Casing’ in the Project ‘Guided Tour’, and Well
‘Tour #1’.
There are two ways to launch the Notebook module. You can select
Notebook from the Modules Menu, or you can click the Notebook
Button on the Modules Toolbar.

Chapter 10: Notebook
Choose Notebook from Modules Menu,

or by clicking the Notebook button
Select desired
analysis mode
from submenu or
from Mode drop
down list
Notebook Analysis Modes

Notebook offers three analysis modes. The analysis mode are essentially
a grouping of similar operational calculations. The analysis modes or
groups are:
l Miscellaneous - This group of calculations include: determining the

linear weight (in air and buoyed) of a component or a section of
pipe, calculating the block line cut off length and analyzing leak off
test data.
l Fluids - This group of calculations can be used to achieve the

desired fluid weight by mixing fluids, diluting, or weight up. You
can also determine the compressibility of a water or oil based mud.
l Hydraulics - This group of calculations can be used to determine

the pump output, annular and pipe volumes, nozzle TFA or sizes,
and buoyancy factors.

Miscellaneous Mode
To access the Miscellaneous mode, select Miscellaneous from the Mode

drop down list.
The Miscellaneous mode calculates:
l Linear Weight
l Blockline Cut Off Length
l Leak Off Test
Linear Weight
Use the Parameter→Linear Weight dialog to quickly calculate the
weight-in-air and buoyed-weight of a component based on a specified
OD, ID, and mud weight.
To calculate the linear weight, specify the components ID and OD, its
length, the density of the mud, and whether it is a steel or aluminum
component.
Enter required input

data
Click in output
Specify component section to
material calculate and view
results
Blockline Cut Off Length

Use the Parameter→Blockline Cut Off dialog to quickly calculate the
recommended cut-off length for rotary drilling lines. These calculation
values are based on API RP 9B.

Click a radio button to Select a Drum Diameter

select Drum Type from the list of drum
diameters suitable for
the respective mast
Select a Mast Height height.
from the list
View results
Leak Off Test

Use the Parameter→Leak Off Test dialog to quickly calculate the
formation breakdown pressure and equivalent mud gradient from a leak
off test (LOT).
The air gap and sea depth can be set

to zero for a land rig.
Click a field in the Output group box to

display results

Fluids Mode
To access the Fluids analysis mode, select Fluids from the Mode drop
down list.
The Fluids Mode calculates:
l Mix Fluids
l Dilute / Weight Up
l Fluid Compressibility
Mix Fluids
Use the Parameter→Mix Fluids dialog to quickly calculate the density
and volume of a fluid when two fluids with different densities and
volumes are mixed.
Specify initial volume and

density of one fluid
Specify the density and

volume of the second fluid
Click in output to view

results
Dilute /Weight Up
Use the Parameter→Dilute/Weight Up dialog to calculate the
resulting volume when the density of a fluid is increased or decreased to
a different density. You can opt to keep the volume constant. In this
case, the required dump volume is determined.

To calculate a volume, specify the volume and density of the initial

fluid, the density of the final fluid mixture, and the density of the heavier
fluid you want added. If you mark the Maintain total volume check box,
the total volume of the final mixture will not be allowed to exceed the
volume specified in the Initial Volume field. You must specify volumes
in all fields in order for a resulting volume to be calculated.
Enter the volume and density of

your original fluid
Required
Enter the required fluid density operation
achieve
required
Specify the density of the fluid density will be
you are using to dilute or weight indicated
up the original fluid with
Check box to keep volume

constant. In this box is checked,
the Initial Dump Volume will be
calculated
Fluid Compressibility
Use the Parameter→Fluid Compressibility dialog to quickly
calculate the volume of mud that must be pumped to overcome the
compressibility of the fluid.
Specify the hole volume and

test pressure
Specify the mud type
Click in output section to view

results

Hydraulics Mode
To access the Hydraulics Mode, select Hydraulics from the Mode drop
down list. The Hydraulics mode calculates:
l Pump Output
l Annular capacity, volume and velocity
l Pipe capacity, volume and velocity
l Nozzle TFA or sizes based on TFA
l Buoyancy factors
Pump Output
Use the Parameter→Pump Output dialog to quickly calculate the
flow rate and volume-per-stroke for a user-defined pump configuration.
Enter all required input data
Rod diameter is not required for

a triplex pump
Click radio button to select pump

type
Click in output section to view

results
Annular
Use the Parameter→Annular dialog to calculate the capacity, volume,
and velocity for two annular sections.

Enter flow rate Total annular

volume
Enter data for first

annular section Calculated
data for
sections
Enter data for

Calculated
second annular
fluid velocity
section
in annulus
Pipe
Use the Parameter→Pipe dialog to calculate the linear capacity,
volume, linear displacement, total displacement and velocity for two
pipe sections.
Enter flow rate Total pipe capacity
Total fluid
displacement
Enter data for one
pipe section
Calculated results
for each section
Enter data for

second pipe
section
Nozzles
Use the Parameter→Nozzles dialog to calculate the nozzle sizes
required to produce a desired total flow area (TFA) or to calculate the
TFA based on a specified number and sizes of nozzles.

Input size and number Click the Total

of nozzles to calculate Flow Area radio
TFA button to calculate
TFA based on
specified nozzle
sizes
Input TFA to calculate
size and number of
nozzles Click the Nozzles
radio button to
calculate nozzle
sizes base on
specified TFA.
Buoyancy
Use the Parameter→Buoyancy dialog to quickly calculate the
buoyancy factor based on the specified mud density.
Specify mud weight
Click in output section to

calculate the buoyancy
factor

Calculations
Block Line Cut Off Length
Π
Length = Laps × Drum Diameter ×
12
Dilute/Wt Up Fluid
V1 D1 +V 2D 2 = V 3 D 3
Where:
V1 = Volume of one material to be mixed
D1 = Density of V1 material
V2 = Volume of second material to be mixed
D2 = Density of V 2 material
V3 = Total volume
D3 = Density of total volume
Fluid Buoyancy
Mud Weight
Buoyancy = 1 −
Steel Density

Fluid Compressibility
Test Pressure [ psi ] × Hole Volume [bbl ]

Vol to Pump [bbl ] =
Constant
where:
Constant for oil-based mud = 2.2e5
Constant for water-based mud = 3.16e5
Leak Off Test
Formation Breakdown Pressure = TVD × 0.052 × Mud Density + Test Pressure Density
Formation Breakdown Pressure
Equivalent Mud Gradient =
TVD
Formation Breakdown Gradient =
Formation Brekdown Pressure − Sea Depth × Seawater Gradient
TVD − AirGap − Sea Depth
Mix Fluids
V1 D1 +V 2D 2 = V 3 D 3
Where:
V1 = Volume of one material to be mixed
D1 = Density of V1 material
V2 = Volume of second material to be mixed
D2 = Density of V 2 material
V3 = Total volume
D3 = Density of total volume

Pump Output
For a duplex pum p
Q = 1 . 568 e −6 × L ( 2 × d r − d y ) × N × η
2 2
W here:
L = stroke length
dλ = liner diam eter
dr = rod diam eter
N = stroke rate
η = volum etric efficiency
For a triplex pum p:
Q = 2 . 3555 e − 6 × L × d λ × N × η
2
Nozzle Area
2
Π d 
n
TFA = ∑ ni  × ( i ) 
i =1  4 32 
Where:
di = Size of the nozzle
ni = Number of nozzles in each group
i = Number of groups

Well Plan

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Well Plan

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WELLPLAN, Release 2000.

copyright © 2001 by Landmark Graphics Corporation

Part No. 157853 March 2001

Landmark Graphics Corporation

March 2001 Contents iii

Sound Effects ............................................................................................................... 39

iv Contents March 2001

DEX and File Importing and Exporting ............................................................................. 70

Torque Drag Analysis................................................................................................... 71

March 2001 Contents v

Analyzing Results ........................................................................................................ 100

vi Contents March 2001

Twist ............................................................................................................................ 139

Hydraulics Analysis ...................................................................................................... 147

March 2001 Contents vii

Table ...................................................................................................................... 169

viii Contents March 2001

Analyzing Results ........................................................................................................ 198

Well Control Analysis................................................................................................... 241

March 2001 Contents ix

Starting Well Control Analysis .................................................................................... 242

x Contents March 2001

Allowable Kick Volume Calculations ......................................................................... 276

Surge Analysis ................................................................................................................. 309

March 2001 Contents xi

Methodology ................................................................................................................ 337

Cementing-OptiCem Analysis ................................................................................. 349

xii Contents March 2001

Critical Speed ................................................................................................................... 381

Bottom Hole Assembly ............................................................................................... 403

March 2001 Contents xiii

Supporting Information and Calculations........................................................................... 422

Notebook ............................................................................................................................. 439

xiv Contents March 2001

WELLPLAN can be used in the office or at the well site. WELLPLAN

Training Course and Manual Overview

This training class is designed to be flexible to meet the needs of the

Generally, a training course begins with a quick introduction. Following

Single User and Network Installations

A typical installation at the rigsite is standalone with all modules

In the office, a network installation enables most components to be

WELLPLAN is licensed software, and requires some form of license in

Network Licensing uses a lock file configuration to track the number of

If a license to any WELLPLAN module is not available, a warning

WELLPLAN is installed with several tools and documentation to assist

Using the Documentation sub-group, you may select:

l Install Guide - The installation guide for WELLPLAN can be

l Landmark Home Page - This option can be used to access

l Release Notes - The Release Notes provide useful information

Using the Tools sub-group, you may select:

l Report Manager - Use to view or print reports generated using

l WELLPLAN 5 Catalog Import - Use this tool to import catalogs

l Use the Start Menu. Select ‘WELLPLAN’ using Landmark

l Double-click on any desktop shortcut you have configured.

After WELLPLAN launches, a splash window appears that displays

Projects, Wells, and Cases

What is a Project, Well and Case?

A project is the highest level of organization. A project can refer to a

Creating a Project, Well and Case

Enter the well name.

Select a project with

This training course uses a Case titled ‘9 5/8”casing’ in the Project

Select the project

Saving and Deleting Cases, Wells, and Projects